Home

2011 Nissan Altima Owner`s Manual

1. 12 1i 109 8 7 6 5 LDI0552 Maintenance and do it yourself 8 7 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a pre diluted mixture of 50 Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant blue and 50 water to provide year round anti freeze and coolant protection The anti freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors Additional engine cool ing system additives are not necessary AWARNING e Never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot Wait until the engine and radiator cool down Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator See precautions in If your vehicle overheats found in the In case of emergency section of this manual The radiator is equipped with a pres sure type radiator cap To prevent en gine damage use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap 8 8 Maintenance and do it yourself ACAUTION e When adding or replacing coolant be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue or equivalent Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue is pre diluted to provide antifreeze protection to 34 F 37 C If additional freeze protec tion is needed due to weather where you operate your vehicle add Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue concentrate following the direc tions on the container If an equivalent coolant other than Gen
2. WHA1505 Backing up on a steep downhill When backing up the vehicle down a hill the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown farther than the actual distance For example the display shows 3 ft 1 0 m to the place but the actual 3 ft 1 0 m distance on the hill is the place Note that any object on the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 15 Backing up behind a projecting object The position is shown farther than the position in the display However the position is actually at the same distance as the position The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to the position if the object projects over the actual backing up course WHA1506 4 16 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Setting Display 8 00 BRIGHTNESS 2 MIN MAX FO 8 0 8 LHA1272 Type A ADJUSTING THE SCREEN The procedure for adjusting the quality of the screen differs depending on the type of screen present on the vehicle For vehicles without a touch screen Type A e To adjust the Brightness and Contrast press the ENTER button on the audio sys tem repeatedly until the desired setting is displayed Use the TUNE SCROLL knob to adjust the display to the desired level Settings gt Display Adjustment 8 00 Display 3 Brightness
3. el WHA1530 USB INTERFACE models without Navigation System if so equipped Connecting a device to the USB input jack The USB input jack is located in the center con sole Open the protective cover Q on the USB jack then insert the USB device into the jack When a compatible storage device is plugged into the jack compatible audio files on the stor age device can be played through the vehicle s audio system Audio file operation AUX button Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position and press the AUX button to switch to the USB input mode If another audio source is plugged in through the AUX IN jack on the radio the AUX button toggles between the two sources USB mp3 8 00 Folder XXXXXX Song XXXXXX Artist XXXXXX an2 114 LHA1280 Play information Information about the audio files being played can be displayed on the display screen of the vehicle s audio system Depending on how the audio files are encoded information such as Folder Song and Artist will be displayed The track number and number of total tracks in the folder are displayed on the screen as well For example the fourth track out of twelve total is currently playing Ha gt p SEEK CAT Reverse or Fast Forward buttons Press and hold the SEEK CAT buttons M4 or gt gt for 1 5 seconds while an audio file on the USB device is playing to rev
4. CD MP3 display mode While listening to an MP3 WMA CD certain text may be displayed on the screen if the CD has been encoded with text information Depending on how the MP3 WMA CD is encoded informa tion such as Artist Song and Folder will be dis played The track number and the total number of tracks in the current folder or on the current disc are displayed on the screen as well For example the first track out of fourteen total is currently playing 4 52 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Press the SEEK CATEGORY button 4 while a CD or MP3 WMA CD is playing to return to the beginning of the current track Press the SEEK CATEGORY button 4 several times to skip backward several tracks Press the SEEK CATEGORY button PI while a CD or MP3 WMA CD is playing to advance one track Press the SEEK CATEGORY button gt several times to skip forward sev eral tracks If the last track on a CD is skipped the first track on the disc is played If the last track in a folder of an MP3 WMA CD is skipped the first track of the next folder is played SCROLL TUNE knob MP3 WMA CD only If an MP3 WMA CD with multiple folders is play ing turn the SCROLL TUNE knob to change folders Turn the knob to the left to skip back a folder Turn the knob to the right to skip ahead a folder RPT button When the RPT button is pressed while a com pact disc is playing the play pattern can be changed
5. 0 0 cee 9 27 CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL LUBRICANTS The following are approximate capacities The actual refill capacities may be slightly different When refilling follow the procedure described in the Maintenance and do it yourself section to determine the proper refill capacity Capacity Approximate Recommended Fluids and Lubricants US measure Imp measure Liter Fuel 20 gal 16 5 8 gal 75 6 See Fuel recommendation later in this section Engine oil 8 Drain and Refill With oil filter change QR25DE 4 7 8 qt 4 qt 4 6 VO35DE 5 1 8 qt 4 1 4 qt 4 8 Engine oil with API Certification Mark 1 2 Without oil filter QR25DE 4 1 2 qt 3 3 4 qt 4 3 Viscosity SAE 5W 30 1 2 change VO35DE 4 3 4 at 4qt 4 5 Cooling system With reservoir gzet zga gal TA gal Pre diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue or equivalent Manual transmission gear oil Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid MTF HO Multi 75W 85 or equivalent 3 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT fluid Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 2 4 Power steering fluid PSF Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent 5 Brake and clutch fluid Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid 6 or equivalent DOT 3 Multi purpose grease NLGI No 2 Lithium Soap base Air conditioning system refrigerant HFC 134a R 134a 7 Air conditioning system oil Genuine NISSAN A C Syst
6. 2 10 Bulb replacement 8 30 c Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants s ssas ora a eea e a a 9 2 Cargo See vehicle loading information 9 13 Car phone or CBradio 4 91 CD care and cleaning 4 87 CD player See audio system 4 46 4 52 4 58 4 64 Check tire pressure Child restraints Precautions on child restraints 1 23 1 29 1 34 1 38 Top tether strap anchor point locations 1 27 Child safety rear doorlock 3 6 Chimes audible reminders 2 16 Cleaning exterior and interior 7 2 Clock a5 Hs ct arse ie db Ave ae at eat el 4 45 4 50 models with navigation system 4 8 models without navigation system 4 45 Clock Setete ha a es aah we a cae 4 8 4 45 Clutch Clutch fluid s s saas bs a eee ee 8 8 15 C M V S S certification label 2 0 9 10 Cold weather driving 5 28 Compact disc CD player somos eee ed 4 46 4 52 4 58 4 64 Compass display 00 2 6 Console box soraa ge wR es 2 41 Console light 4444 64 eee eee wes 2 50 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT 5 11 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT fluid sor ee ow ed Ree Ae 8 13 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission CVT 044 5 11 Transmission shift selector lock release 5 16 Control panel buttons 0 0 4 2 Brightness contrast button 4 12
7. Missed Use the Missed command to list the calls made to the vehicle that were not answered Connect Phone NOTE The Add Phone command is not available when the vehicle is moving Main Menu Connect Phone Add Phone Select Phone Delete Phone Turn Bluetooth OFF Use the Connect Phone commands to manage the phones connecting to the vehicle or to enable the Bluetooth function on the vehicle Add Phone Use the Add Phone command to add a phone to the vehicle See Connecting procedure in this section for more information Select Phone Use the Select Phone command to select from a list of phones connected to the vehicle The sys tem will list the names assigned to each phone and then prompt you for the phone you wish to select Only one phone can be active at a time Delete Phone Use the Delete Phone command to delete a phone that is connected to the vehicle The sys tem will list the names assigned to each phone and then prompt you for the phone you wish to delete Deleting a phone from the vehicle will also delete that phonebook for that phone Turn Bluetooth OFF Use the Turn Bluetooth OFF command to prevent a wireless connection to your phone 4 102 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems SPEAKER ADAPTATION SA MODE Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out of dialect users to train th
8. LDIO556 WDI0214 5 Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level It should be between the H High and L Low marks This is the normal oper ating oil level range If the oil level is below the L Low mark remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening Do not overfill 6 Recheck oil level with the dipstick It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break in period depending on the severity of operating conditions ACAUTION Oil level should be checked regularly Op erating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine and such damage is not covered by warranty WDI0492 QR25DE CHANGING ENGINE OIL 1 Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature then turn it off Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise Place a large drain pan under the drain plug WD10493 VQ35DE Remove the drain plug B with a wrench by turning it counterclockwise and completely drain the oil If the oil filter is to be changed remove and replace it at this time See Changing engine oil filter in this section Waste oil must be disposed of prop erly Check your local regulations Maintenance and do it yourself 8 11 AWARNING Prolonged and repeated contact
9. 0 00c cece eee 5 10 Starting the engine 02 eee eee eee ee 5 10 Driving the vehicles nesnese n engia E EREN 5 11 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT if so equipped 6 6 ieee cece ismine 5 11 Manual transmission if so equipped 5 17 Parking brak 22se cceeciene eas tawetes sade daane 5 19 Cruise GOMO asno grdine nan ase keorde aang 5 20 Precautions on cruise control 005 5 20 Cruise control operations 000 5 20 Break in schedule 0 cece cee ee ee een cen eens 5 22 Increasing fuel economy 0 6 cece eee eee 5 22 Parking parking on hills 0 0 0 cece eee 5 23 PoWer S BER g sassa eurea peyami pekn ten weateda eka 5 24 Brake System agresi iri oteteerigiwan esiis er 5 24 Brake precautions s aeri ii terrne eee eee 5 24 Anti lock Braking System ABS 0005 5 25 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system 5 26 Cold weather driving 0c cee eee eee ee 5 28 Freeing a frozen door lock c cece eee 5 28 Antifree uc ceeci et ecev eed yaa dana wee tee 5 28 Battery sis cipicn woacinmpn aaa anal oeni a eei 5 28 Draining of coolant water cece e eee 5 28 Tirs SQUIPMENE aie urri set ag ties wane nori de eee 5 28 Special winter equipment 000 5 28 Driving On SNOW OF ICE kee ee 5 28 Engine block heater if so equipped 5 29 PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING AWAR
10. Mute Use the Mute command to mute your voice so the other party cannot hear it Use the mute command again to unmute your voice NOTE If a call is ended or the cellular phone network connection is lost while the Mute feature is on the Mute feature will be reset to off for the next call so the other party can hear your voice Phonebook phones without automatic phonebook download function NOTE The Transfer Entry command is not avail able when the vehicle is moving Main Menu Phonebook Transfer Entry Delete Entry List Names For phones that do not support automatic down load of the phonebook PBAP Bluetooth pro file the Phonebook command is used to manu ally add entries to the vehicle phonebook The phonebook stores up to 40 names for each phone connected to the system NOTE Each phone has its own separate phone book You cannot access Phone A s phone book if you are currently connected with Phone B Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 99 Transfer Entry Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new name in the system When prompted by the system say the name you would like to give the new entry For example say Mary If the name is too long or too short the system tells you then prompts you for a name again Also if the name sounds too much like a name already stored the
11. 2 When the door is closed with the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle and the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position A chime will also sound Parking brake warning This warning illuminates when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven SHIFT P warning CVT models This warning illuminates when the ignition switch is pushed to stop the engine with the shift selec tor in any position except in the P Park position If this warning illuminates the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position Move the shift selec tor to the P Park position or place the ignition switch in the ON position An inside warning chime will also sound If the shift selector is moved to the P Park position the Push warning will appear Refer to Push warning CVT models in this section For additional information about Intelligent Key see NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Pre driving checks and adjustments section Engine start operation indicator CVT models This indicator illuminates when the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK OFF ACC or ON position with the shift selector in the P Park position This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the push button ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed Engine start operation indicator M T models This indicator illuminates when the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK OFF ACC or ON position with the sh
12. 4 124 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Voice command examples Some basic voice command examples are de scribed here For navigation system commands see the sepa rate Navigation System Owner s Manual os ep 0 2 LHA0768 8 00 Voice Recognition Kd 4 Phone Navigation 4 Information Practice 44 Audio 4 Help To exit hold the TALK switch LHA1333 Example 1 Placing a call to the phone number 800 662 6200 1 Pressthe amp ing wheel switch located on the steer The system announces Would you like to access Phone Navigation Information Au dio or Help Say Phone Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 125 Voice Recognition gt Phone Yall 8 00 e 4 44 Dial Number 4 Vehicle Phonebook 4 Handset Phonebook er _ 4 Call History 4 Intemational Call Phone To exit hold the TALK switch LHA1334 Voice Recognition gt Dial Num Yal 8 00 4 Dial Number Please say the entire number or groups of numbers Manual Controls To exit hold the TALK switch LHA1335 Voice Recognition gt Dial Num Yal 8 00 800 4 Dial 47 Change Number Help Please say the next 3 digits Dial or Manual Controls say Chan
13. 4 138 Troubleshooting guide 20ce eee eae 4 140 CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM if so equipped AWARNING e Positioning of the heating or air condi tioning controls and display controls should not be done while driving in or der that full attention may be given to the driving operation a MAP 2 Do not disassemble or modify this sys g tem If you do it may result in accidents ZD DEST 3 fire or electrical shock ROUTE 4 Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality such as a frozen screen or INFO lack of sound Continued use of the SETTING 6 system may result in accident fire or 5 electric shock vot In case you notice any foreign object in 7 the system hardware spill liquid on it x or notice smoke or smell coming from pusHON oFF Utt rm it stop using the system immediately and contact your nearest NISSAN dealer Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents fire or electrical shock LHA1400 INFO button P 4 5 SETTING button P 4 6 Volume control knob 1 Display screen MAP button DEST button ROUTE button ON 41D brightness control button 4 2 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognitio
14. ACAUTION e Do not substitute engine anti freeze coolant for windshield washer fluid This may result in damage to the paint Do not fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir with washer fluid concen trates at full strength Some methyl al cohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield washer fluid reservoir e Pre mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer s recom mended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield washer fluid reser voir Do not use the windshield washer fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water 8 16 Maintenance and do it yourself BATTERY Keep the battery surface clean and dry Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer disconnect the negative battery terminal cable to prevent discharge AWARNING e Do not expose the battery to flames an electrical spark or a cigarette Hydro gen gas generated by the battery is ex plosive Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin eyes fabrics or painted surfaces Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or injury After touch ing a battery or battery cap do not touch or rub your eyes Thoroughly wash your hands If the acid contacts your ey
15. Air recirculation button Fan r 3 recirculation control button OFF Air passed through heater core Temperature control dial Air conditioner button Air flow control LHA2035 4 24 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Cooling lt Air not passed through heater j core amp Fan Air flow Temperature control dial modes control dial haaa Air recirculation Air conditioner button button Fan A C Temp Air flow recirculation control button button control control Automatically Automatically LHA2036 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 25 HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER automatic if so equipped 10 9 8 WHA1171 Driver temperature control dial Air flow control buttons Passenger temperature control dial DUAL button Rear defrost button Front window defrost button Fan speed dial system OFF button Air recirculation button A C ON OFF button 0 AUTO button O OnNoaRON gt AWARNING The air conditioner cooling function op erates only when the engine is running Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle Pets should also not be left alone They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle Also on hot sunny days temperat
16. Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights before backing the trailer into the water or the trailer lights may burn out When towing a trailer final drive gear oil should be replaced and transmission oil fluid should be changed more fre quently For additional information see the Maintenance and do it yourself section earlier in this manual FLAT TOWING Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle such as a motor home ACAUTION e Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage e Whenever flat towing your vehicle al ways tow forward never backward e DO NOT tow any continuously variable transmission vehicle with all four wheels on the ground flat towing Do ing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmis sion parts due to lack of transmission lubrication e For emergency towing procedures refer to Towing recommended by NISSAN in the In case of emergency section of this manual Manual Transmission if so equipped Always tow with the manual transmission in Neutral e After towing 500 miles 805 km start and idle the engine with the transmission in Neu tral for two minutes Failure to idle the engine after every 500 miles 805 km of towing may cause damage to internal transmission parts Continuously Variable Transmission if so equipp
17. Select the Background Color key the display color changes between day and night The new settings are automatically saved when you exit the setting screen by selecting the Back key or any other mode button Settings gt Color Theme 8 00 Black LHA1240 Settings gt Clock 8 00 On screen Clock Clock Format 24h Offset hour Offset min Daylight Savings Time Time Zone Eastern LHA1241 Color theme Select the Display key then select the Color Theme key The Color Theme select screen wil appear Select the key for the desired color The appear ance of the background arrows and bars wil change for all screens accordingly You can choose a black blue or red color theme 4 8 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Clock The following display will appear after pressing the SETTING button then selecting the Clock key On screen Clock When this item is enabled indicator light illumi nated a clock is always displayed in the upper right corner of the screen This clock will indicate the time almost exactly because it is always adjusted by the GPS system Clock Format 24h When this item is enabled indicator light illumi nated the clock format will change from the default 12 hour display to
18. XM3 gt Favorite Artists 8 00 Alert None Add Current Artist None Add Current Artist None Add Current Artist None Add Current Artist None Add Current Artist LHA1375 Menu XM if so equipped Select the Menu key to see a list of options Preset List Displays the list of presets Press and hold the key on the touchscreen to save a preset Customize Channel List deselect chan nels to skip while using the TUNE FOLDER knob e Favorite Artist amp Songs Tags the current artist or song playing on XM as a favorite Turn the Alert ON to indicate whenever a favorite artist or song is playing on XM The audio system must be playing XM radio for this feature to work Delete a favorite artist or song e Categories Displays a category list for XM radio Select a category to select the first channel for that category Direct Tune Tune to a channel by entering the channel number Radio data system RDS RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a data information service transmitted by some radio stations on the FM band not AM band Cur rently most RDS stations are in large cities but many stations are now considering broadcasting RDS data RDS can display Station call sign such as WHFR 98 3 Station name such as The Groove Music or programming type such as Clas sical Coun
19. six six two The system repeats the numbers and prompts you to enter more six two zero zero Wen Say pound for Say star for avail able when using the Special number com mand and the Send command during a call See List of voice commands and Special number in this section for more information Example 1 555 1212 123 One five five five one two one two star one two three Say plus for available only when using the Special Dialing commana Say pause for a 2 second pause available only when storing a phone book number NOTE For best results say phone numbers as single digits The voice command Help is available at any time Please use the Help command to get information on how to use the system LHA0757 CONTROL BUTTONS The control buttons for the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System are located on the steering wheel bl PHONE SEND Press the l button to initiate a VR session or answer an incom ing call Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 95 You can also use the amp button to interrupt the system feedback and give a command at once See List of voice commands and During a call in this section for more information a PHONE END While the voice recognition sys tem is active press and hold the button for 5
20. 1 Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat Position the child restraint on the seat Always follow the restraint manufacturer s instructions WRSO761 Rear facing step 2 2 Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer s in structions for belt routing 1 30 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0669 Rear facing step 3 Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended At this time the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR mode child restraint mode It reverts to the Emergency Locking Retractor ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted LRS0670 Rear facing step 4 4 Allow the seat belt to retract Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt WRS0762 Rear facing step 5 5 Remove any additional slack from the seat belt press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt WRS0763 Rear facing step 6 6 After attaching the child restraint test it be fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near
21. Contrast Backgroud Color 1 4 LHA1238 Type B e Do not adjust the Brightness or Contrast of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving For vehicles with a touch screen Type B e To adjust the Brightness Contrast Display ON OFF and Color of the RearView Moni tor press the SETTING button and then select the Display key with the RearView Monitor on When the display adjustment screen appears touch the or key on the desired item and adjust the level e Do not adjust the Brightness Contrast and Color of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving OPERATING TIPS When the shift selector is shifted to R Re verse the monitor screen automatically changes to the RearView Monitor mode However the radio can be heard it may take some time until the RearView Monitor is displayed after the shift selector has been shifted to R Reverse Objects may be distorted momentarily until the Rear View Monitor screen is displayed com pletely When the shift selector is returned to a position other than R Reverse it may take some time until the screen changes Objects on the screen may be distorted until they are completely displayed When the temperature is extremely high or low the screen may not clearly display ob jects This is not a malfunction When strong light directly enters the cam era objects may not be displayed clearly
22. LHA1378 When there are both audio and movie files in the USB memory the mode select screen is dis played Use the touchscreen to select the pre ferred type of file When there is only type of file in the USB memory that audio or movie operation screen is displayed and starts to play When you play a file with limited playing time the confirmation screen will be displayed before starting to play the file Confirm the playing time and select yes to start playing Audio file operation DISC AUX button Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position and press the DISC AUX button to switch to the USB input mode If another audio source is playing and a USB memory device is inserted press the DISC AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the USB memory mode If the system has been turned off while the USB memory was playing push the ON OFF VOL control knob to restart the USB memory lt lt Ppl Seeking Reverse or Fast Forward button Press and hold the 4 side of the seeking button for 1 5 seconds while an audio file on the USB device is playing to reverse the track being played Press and hold the Pl side of the seeking button for 1 5 seconds while an audio file on the USB device is playing to fast forward the track being played The track plays at an in creased speed while reversing or fast forwarding When the button is released the audio file re turns to normal pla
23. This mode is only available when music has been downloaded into the Music Box system Volume control switch Push the volume control switch to increase or decrease the volume v A Tuning Type A and Type B switches only Memory change radio While in one of the preset radio station banks push the tuning switch Y or 4 for less than 1 5 seconds to change to the next preset station in memory Seek tuning radio Push the tuning switch Y or 4 for more than 1 5 seconds to seek the next or previous radio station Next Previous track CD Push the tuning switch Y or 4 for less than 1 5 seconds to return to the beginning of the present track or skip to the next track Push several times to skip back or skip through tracks v A Menu control switch ENTER button Type C switch only While the display is showing a map or audio screen tilt the Menu Control switch upward or downward to select a station track CD or folder For most audio sources tilting the switch up down for more than 1 5 seconds provides a different function than a tilting up down for less than 1 5 seconds AM and FM Tilt up down for less than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the preset station Tilt up down for more than 1 5 seconds to seek up or down to the next station Press the ENTER button to show the list of preset stations Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 89
24. V if so equipped WRS0829 LRS0661 LATCH webbing mounted attachment Installing child restraint LATCH lower anchor attachments LATCH compatible child restraints include two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle With this sys tem you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint Check your child re straint for a label stating that it is compatible with LATCH This information may also be in the in structions provided by the child restraint manu facturer 1 26 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0662 LATCH rigid mounted attachment When installing a child restraint carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint WRS0797 Top tether anchor point locations The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchor attachments or seat belts See In stalling top tether strap later in this section If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap consult your NISSAN dealer for details Anchor points 4 are located on the rear parcel shelf dis a LRS0824 if so equipped REAR FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child S
25. e Do not drop the Intelligent Key Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key e Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key If the Intelligent Key gets wet im mediately wipe until it is completely dry e Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where tem peratures exceed 140 F 60 C Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field such as a TV audio equipment and personal computers Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 7 If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli gent Key from the vehicle This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle For information regarding the erasing procedure contact a NISSAN dealer 3 8 Pre driving checks and adjustments WPD0465 Coupe shown Sedan similar OPERATING RANGE The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the request switch When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operat ing location the Intelligent Key system s operat ing range becomes narrower and the Intelligent Key may not function properly The operating range is wit
26. 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Driver supplemental air bag horn P 1 41 P 2 35 Cruise control main set switch P 5 20 Windshield wiper and washer switch P 2 28 Ignition switch P 5 7 Hazard warning flasher switch P 2 34 Front passenger air bag status light P 1 51 Front passenger supplemental air bag P 1 41 Glove box P 2 41 Navigation system if so equipped P 4 2 Covered storage box P 2 42 Heater and air conditioner automatic P 4 26 Heater and air conditioner manual P 4 19 Shift selector P 5 11 Audio system controls if so equipped Storage if so equipped P 4 29 P 2 42 Tilt telescopic steering wheel controls P 3 28 20 21 22 Vehicle information display controls P 2 17 Hood release P 3 23 Trunk opener P 3 23 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC OFF switch P 2 36 NISSAN Intelligent Key port P 5 7 Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual if so equipped See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details METERS AND GAUGES RPMx1000 o WIC1259 oOoaRON gt Tachometer Speedometer Fuel gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge Odometer twin trip odometer Twin trip odometer change button Vehicle information display Instrument brightness control Instruments and controls 2 3 Hy E eN 2 R ec 3 WIC14
27. CD TEXT LHA1267 pecan LHA1415 Track List The tracks on the disc are displayed Select the key of a track name to begin playing that track Title Text Priority Record to Music Box Automatic Recording Recording Quality For more information about these options see Music Box in this section 4 amp CD EJECT button To eject a CD press the OPEN TILT button to ower the display screen Once the screen is in the lowered position press the amp button to the left of the CD DVD insert slot The CD will be ejected When the amp button is pressed while the CD is being played the CD will eject and the system will turn off Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 61 WHA1532 AUX auxiliary input jacks The auxiliary input jacks are located inside the center console NTSC compatible devices such as video games camcorders and portable video players can be connected to the auxiliary input jacks Audio devices such as some MP3 players can also be connected to the system through the auxiliary input jacks The auxiliary input jacks are color coded for iden tification purposes Red right channel audio input White left channel audio input Yellow video input Before connecting a device to the auxiliary input jacks turn off the power of the portable device With a
28. FOREWORD Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners This vehicle is delivered to you with confidence It was produced using the latest techniques and strict quality control This manual was prepared to help you under stand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles kilome ters of driving pleasure Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties cov ering your vehicle The NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide explains details about maintaining and servicing your ve hicle Additionally a separate Customer Care Lemon Law Booklet U S only will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle as well as clarify your rights under your state s lemon law Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle best When you require any service or have any questions they will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to them READ FIRST THEN DRIVE SAFELY Before driving your vehicle please read this Owner s Manual carefully This will ensure famil iarity with controls and maintenance require ments assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle AWARNING IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE MINDERS FOR SAFETY Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers e NEVER drive under the i
29. Skipping with high bit rate Skipping may occur with large quantities of data such as for high bit rate data files Moves immediately to the If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like MP3 or when play is prohibited by copyright protection the next song when playing player will skip to the next song Songs do not play back in The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software Therefore the files might not play in the desired order the desired order Random Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on the USB device Music cuts off or skips Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 41 Compressed Video Files models with Navigation System Explanation of terms DivX DivX refers to the DivX codec owned by Div Inc used for a lossy compres sion of video based on MPEG 4 e AVI AVI stands for Audio Video Interleave It is standard file format originated by Micro soft Corporation A divx encoded file can be saved into the avi file format for playback on this system if it meets the requirements stated in the table in this section However all avi files are not playable on this system since different encodings can be used other than the DivX codec e ASF ASF stands for Advanced Systems Format It is file format owned by Microsoft Corporation Note Only asf files that meet the requirements stated in the t
30. Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the screen This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper This is not a malfunction The screen may flicker under fluorescent light This is not a malfunction The colors of objects on the RearView Moni tor may differ somewhat from those of the actual object When the contrast of objects is low at night pressing the SETTING button or ENTER button may not change the brightness Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a dark place or at night If dirt rain or snow attaches to the camera the RearView Monitor may not display ob jects Clean the camera Do not use alcohol benzine or thinner to clean the camera This will cause discolor ation To clean the camera wipe with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wipe with a dry cloth Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected Do not use body wax on the camera window If body wax does get on the camera window wipe off the wax with a clean cloth damp ened with mild detergent diluted with water Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 17 VENTS WHAO0736 Right and Left Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent slides Center Open or close the vents by using the dial Move the dial toward the to open the vents o
31. XM if so equipped Tilt up down for less than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the preset station Tilt up down for more than 1 5 seconds to go to the next or previous category Press the ENTER button to show the XM Menu iPod Tilt up down for less than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number Press the ENTER button to show the iPod Menu CD Tilt up down for less than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number Tilt up down for more than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the folder number if playing compressed audio files Press the ENTER button to show the CD Menu DVD Tilt up down for less than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number Tilt up down for more than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the title number Press the ENTER button to select an item from the DVD display When the transparent operation menu ap pears the switch will control the menu USB Tilt up down for less than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number Tilt up down for more than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the folder number Press the ENTER button to show the USB Menu Music Box Tilt up down for less than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number Tilt up down for more than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the album folder number if playing compressed audio files Press the ENTER button
32. peats the number and begins dialing If a call back number does not exist the system announces There is no number to call back and ends the VR session During a call During a call there are several command options available Press the amp button on the steering wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com mands e Help The system announces the avail able commands e Go back Correction The system an nounces Go back ends the VR session and returns to the call e Cancel Quit The system announces Cancel ends the VR session and returns to the call Send Enter Call Dial Use the Send command to enter numbers or during a call For example if you were directed to dial an extension by an automated system Say Send one two three four The system acknowledges the command and sends the tones associated with the numbers The system then ends the VR ses sion and returns to the call Say star for Say pound for e Transfer call Use the Transfer Call com mand to transfer the call from the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System to the cellular phone when privacy is desired The system announces Transfer call Call transferred to privacy mode The system then ends the VR session To reconnect the call from the cellular phone to the Bluetooth Hands Free System press the amp button
33. streaming audio if so equipped Some Bluetooth audio devices may not be recognized by the in vehicle audio system It is necessary to set up the wireless con nection between a compatible Bluetooth audio device and the in vehicle Bluetooth module before using the Bluetooth audio Operating procedure of the Bluetooth au dio will vary depending on the devices Make sure how to operate your audio device be fore using it with this system The Bluetooth audio may be stopped under the following conditions Receiving a call on the Hands Free Phone System Checking the connection to the hands free phone Do not place the Bluetooth audio device in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in vehicle Bluetooth module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless con nection disruption While an audio device is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connection the bat tery power of the device may discharge quicker than usual This system supports the Bluetooth Audio Distribution Profile A2DP AVRCP BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth Bluetooth SIG Inc U S A and licensed to Clarion 4 34 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Compact disc CD with MP8 or WMA models without Navigation System Terms MP3 MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Experts Group Audio Layer 3 MP3 is the most well known compressed digital aud
34. the command correctly Speak clearly using your normal speech pattern and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive for example windows open or defrost on NOTE If it is too noisy to use the phone it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized The system consistently selects the 1 Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored See Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with Navigation wrong voicetag in the phonebook System in this section 2 Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag 4 140 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 5 Starting and driving Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 Exhaust gas carbon monoxide 0 55 5 2 Three way catalyst 0 066 c cece ee eee 5 2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 5 3 Avoiding collision and rollover 0005 5 5 Off road TeCOVEIY sieou eace db biked oiia 5 6 Rapid air pressure lossS 0 0 c eee eee eee 5 6 Drinking alcohol drugs and driving 5 5 7 Push Button Ignition Switch 00 5 7 Push button ignition switch positions 5 8 Emergency engine shut off 0 eee seas 5 8 NISSAN Intelligent Key battery discharge 5 9 NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system 5 9 Before starting the engine
35. 11 Engine coolant reservoir P 8 8 12 Windshield washer fluid reservoir P 8 15 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details VQ35DE engine 1 Power steering fluid reservoir P 8 14 2 Engine oil filler cap P 8 10 3 Brake fluid reservoir Clutch fluid reservoir M T model P 8 15 8 15 4 Air cleaner P 8 20 5 Fuse block P 8 23 6 Battery P 8 16 i 8 Fuse fusible link box P 8 23 r Engine oil dipstick P 8 10 9 Radiator cap P 8 8 10 Drive belt location P 8 18 11 Engine coolant reservoir P 8 8 12 Windshield washer fluid reservoir P 8 15 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details I I 1 l i 12 1i 109 8 7 6 5 LDI0552 Illustrated table of contents 0 11 WARNING INDICATOR LIGHTS Warning Name Page Warning Name Page Indicator Name Page light light light Low tire pressure 2 12 Cruise set switch 2 15 warning light fae indicator light iy Master warning light 2 13 Se Front passenger air 2 15 Brake warning light 7 Seat belt warning 9 14 High beam indicator 2 15 F light and chime light blue 2 14 E 2 15 SOON Anti lock Braking System ABS warn ing light o Supplemental air SERVICE Malfunction Indica N bag warning light tor Light MIL Charge warning Indicator Security indicator 2 27 light light light Continuously Vari Cont
36. 33 PSI IP235 45R18 sid 8 Rear Original Tire P215 60R16 220 kPa 32 PSI 4 7 230 kPa 33 PSI P235 45R18 i sid T135 90R16 420 kPa 60 PSI WDI0394 Example TIRE LABELING Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information iden tifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also pro vides the tire identification number TIN for safety standard certification The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall 8 42 Maintenance and do it yourself P215 65R15 95H 65 t 3 Example Tire size example P215 65R15 95H 1 P The P indicates the tire is de signed for passenger vehicles not all tires have this information 2 Three digit number 215 This num ber gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to side wall edge 3 Two digit number 65 This number known as the aspect ratio gives the tire s ratio of height to width 4 5 15 t WDI0395 R The R stands for radial Two digit number 15 This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches Two or three digit number 95 This number is the tire s load index It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support You may not find this information on all tires be cause it is not required by law 7 H Tire speed rating You should not drive the vehicle faste
37. AUX button Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and press the AUX button repeatedly until the iPod mode is displayed on the screen If another audio source is playing and the iPod is connected press the AUX button repeatedly to switch to the iPod mode If the vehicle audio system is turned off while the iPod is playing the iPod will start when the VOL ON OFF control knob is pressed Interface The interface for iPod operation shown on the vehicle s audio system display screen is similar to the iPod interface Use the TUNE SCROLL knob and ENTER button to navigate the menus on the screen The iPod MENU button on the vehicle audio system is used to move up one level in the iPod menus Depending on the iPod model the following items may be available on the menu list screen For further information about each item see the iPod Owner s Manual Playlists e Artists Albums e Songs Podcasts Genres Composers Audiobooks e ShuffleSongs lt lt Ppl SEEK CaT buttons Press the SEEK CAT buttons M44 skip backward or forward one track Press and hold the SEEK CAT buttons M4 or gt for 1 5 seconds while a track is playing to reverse or fast forward the track being played The track plays at an increased speed while reversing or fast forwarding When the button is released the track returns to normal play speed RPT button or PP to Press th
38. Automatic Hold option is turned on an incom ing call will be placed on hold automatically after several rings When the Vehicle Ringtone op tion is turned on a specific ringtone that is differ ent from the cellular phone s will sound when receiving a call Auto Downloaded See Handset Phonebook in this section for information about automatically downloading the handset phonebook BLUETOOTH SETTINGS To set up the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System to your preferred settings press the SET TING button on the instrument panel and select the Bluetooth key on the display Bluetooth Turn the Bluetooth system on or off Connect Bluetooth See Connecting procedure in this section for more information about connecting a phone Connected Devices Display a list of the Bluetooth devices con nected to the system 4 116 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Edit Bluetooth Info Check information about the device name device address and device PIN Replace Connected Phone Replace the phone currently connected to the system This option allows you to keep any voic etags that were recorded using the previous phone 8 00 Saco Settings gt Volume amp Beeps Audio Volume eeeeeeeseeed DO Guidance Volume C lOssocccsossej gt Ringtone C P cccccccccce gt Incoming Call G bOcesecccccoef gt Outgoing Call Glise DO going 1
39. CD insert slot AUX IN jack SCAN button RDM RPT button TUNE FF REW button CD eject button AUDIO button BASS TREBLE FADE 0 PWR VOL control knob and BALANCE 1 AUX button 4 44 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems a RONS O9N D 12 RADIO button 13 CD button 14 DISP button 15 PRESET A B C button 16 Station select 1 6 buttons 17 X pause mute button FM AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC CD PLAYER if so equipped For all operation precautions see Audio opera tion precautions earlier in this section Audio main operation PWR VOL control knob Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position then press the PWR VOL control knob If you listen to the radio with the engine not running place the ignition in the ACC position The mode radio or CD that was playing imme diately before the system was turned off resumes playing When no CD is loaded the radio comes on Pressing the PWR VOL control knob again turns the system off Turn the PWR VOL control knob to the right to increase volume or to the left to decrease volume AUDIO button Bass Treble Fade and Balance Press the AUDIO button to change the mode as follows Bass Treble Fade Balance Beep ON OFF Audio Bass To adjust Bass Treble Fade and Balance press the AUDIO button until the desired mode ap pears in the display Press the TUNE FF REW 4 or V to adjust Bass and Treble
40. DVD menus are automatically configured and the contents will be played directly when the Menu Skip key is turned on Note that some discs may not be played directly even if this item is turned on e CM Skip DVD VIDEO Select the CM Skip key to choose the setting time for CM backward and forward operations Use the or key to choose a setting time of 15 30 or 60 seconds e DRC DVD VIDEO DVD VR DRC Dynamic Range Compression auto matically adjusts the soundtrack volume level to maintain a more even sound to the speakers e DVD Language DVD VIDEO VIDEO CD Select the DVD Language key to open the number entry screen Input the number cor responding to the preferred language and select the OK key The DVD top menu language will be changed to the one speci fied Display Adjust the image quality of the screen by selecting the preferred adjustment items Audio Choose the preferred language for the au dio Subtitle DVD VIDEO DVD VR Choose the preferred language for the sub titles Display Mode DVD VIDEO VIDEO CD DVD VR Choose from the Full Wide Normal or Cinema mode Title List DVD VR Choose the preferred title from the list Play Mode Choose the preferred play mode PG PL Mode DVD VR Choose from the PG or PL mode 4 66 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems
41. If the passenger air bag status light will not illu minate even though you believe that the child restraint the seat belts and the occupant are properly positioned the system may be sensing an unoccupied seat in which case the air bag is OFF Your NISSAN dealer can check that the system is OFF by using a special tool However until you have confirmed with your dealer that your air bag is working properly reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat 1 52 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system The air bag system and passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change in the passenger seat status However if the seat becomes unoccupied the air bag status light will remain off If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system the supplemental air bag warning light RF located in the meter and gauges area in the center of the instrument panel will blink Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer Other supplemental front impact air bag precautions AWARNING e Do not place any objects on the steer ing wheel pad or on the instrument panel Also do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel Such ob jects may become dangerous projec tiles and cause injury if the front air bags inflate Do not place objects with sharp edges on the seat Also do not place heavy objects on the seat that will leave per manen
42. NISSAN dealer e For additional information see Mal function Indicator Light MIL later in this section COMPASS DISPLAY if so equipped This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in dicates the direction of the vehicle s heading With the ignition switch placed in the ON posi tion press the A button as described in the chart below to activate various features of the automatic anti glare rearview mirror Push and hold the N Push button again for about 1 sec button for about ond to change settings Compass display toggles on off Feature Compass zone can be changed to 5 seconds correct false compass readings 9 seconds Compass enters calibration mode For information about the automatic anti glare feature refer to Automatic anti glare rearview mirror in the Pre driving checks and adjust ments section merne N LIC1487 Press the A button for about 1 second when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position to toggle the compass display on or off The display will indicate the direction of the vehicle s heading N North E East S South W West If the display reads C calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at less than 5 MPH 8 km h You can also calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle on your everyday route The com pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three complete
43. Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 31 4 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Control panel buttons color screen with Navigation System if so equipped 0005 4 2 How to use the touch screen 000 eae 4 3 How to select menus on the screen 4 5 How to use the INFO button 08 4 5 How to use the SETTING button 4 6 THD button cece eee cece cece cece e ees 4 12 RearView Monitor if so equipped 000 4 13 How to read the displayed lines 00 4 13 Difference between predicted and actual GISTANCES meoin corape seh bee seed tates eels 4 14 Adjusting the screen 06 cece eee eee 4 16 Operating PSr issdeeciane re waded dander ears 4 17 VENIS incite i anrora nese E REE en 4 18 Heater and air conditioner manual if so equipped 6 ieee si eeano 4 19 CONS erian Aa beh E 4 19 Heater operation 000 cece eee eee eee 4 20 Air conditioner operation 0 0c cee eee 4 21 Airflow Chass a2s 0ce redini adenan nonr pads 4 22 Heater and air conditioner automatic if so equipped scrise re orte sersan nornon peii 4 26 Automatic operation 0 0 ccc eee eee 4 26 Manual Operation csccc veces swat eines eee 4 27 Operating tipSse cidceinesvinie EAEE woken we Servicing air conditioner 0 00 0005 Audio system if so equipped e eee eee Radio senp en
44. See Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants in the Technical and con sumer information section of this manual PARKING PARKING ON HILLS 1 D L 7 7 7 7 u y g u RSX 7 LI RX 7 SSD0488 A WARNING has been pushed as far forward as it can e Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass waste paper or rags They may ignite and cause a fire Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P Park for CVT models or in an appropriate gear for manual transmission models Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident Make sure the shift selector i go and cannot be moved without de pressing the foot brake pedal Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls Unattended children could become involved in seri ous accidents Firmly apply the parking brake Manual transmission models Place the shift selector in the R Reverse position When parking on an uphill grade place the shift selector in 1st gear Continuously Variable Transmission CVT models Move the shift selector to the P Park position To help prevent the vehicle from rolling
45. The curtain air bags are located in the side roof rails These systems are designed to meet voluntary guidelines to help reduce the risk of injury to out of position occu pants However all of the information cau tions and warnings in this manual still ap ply and must be followed The side air bags and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity side impact They are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted They may not inflate in cer tain side collisions Vehicle damage or lack of it is not always an indication of proper side air bag and curtain air bag operation When the side air bags and curtain air bags inflate a fairly loud noise may be heard followed by the release of smoke This smoke is not harm ful and does not indicate a fire Care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking Those with a history of a breathing con dition should get fresh air promptly Side air bags along with the use of seat belts help to cushion the impact force on the chest and pelvic area of the front occupants Curtain air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear outboard seat ing positions They can help save lives and re duce serious injuries However an inflating side air bag and curtain air bag may
46. The label is typically located on the driver side center pillar or on the driver s door For additional information see Wheels and tires in the Main tenance and do it yourself section of this manual RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE BREAK IN PROCEDURE During the first 1 200 miles 2 000 km of vehicle use follow the recommendations outlined in the Break in schedule information found in the Starting and driving section of this manual Fol low these recommendations for the future reli ability and economy of your new vehicle Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life Printing March 2011 17 Publication No OM1E OL32U2 Printed in U S A ES2 B
47. Use Handset 8 XXXXXXXX Mute XXXXXXXX Keypad LHA1324 DURING A CALL There are some options available during a call Select one of the following displayed on the screen if necessary Hang up Finish the call Use Handset Transfer the call to the cellular phone Mute Mute your voice to the person 4 114 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Keypad Brings up a keypad enter digits when needed For example entering your PIN number for voice mail NOTE Pushing the TALK switch on the steering wheel during a call allows num bers and digits to be sent using Voice Rec ognition Cancel Mute This will appear after the Mute key is selected Mute will be cancelled To adjust the person s voice to be louder or quieter press the volume control switch located on the steering wheel switches or turn the volume control knob on the instrument panel while talking on the phone This adjustment is also available in the SETTING mode Go fl Yu 8 00 Call in Progress amp 0 04 Hang up Use Handset 8 XXXXXXXX Mute XXXXXXXX Keypad LHA1324 Settings gt Phone Qo HH Yl 8 00 rack Edit Vehicle Phonebook Delete Phonebook Download Handset Phonebook Volume amp Ringtone Auto Downloaded Add or edit phonebook entries LH
48. aaan ET lon s WPD0441 LPD0394 Pull the hood lock release handle located AWARNING OPENER OPERATION below the driver s side instrument panel the hood springs up slightly e Make sure the hood is completely WARNIN f pungs ae closed and latched before driving Fail A G Lift the lever at the front of the hood with your ure to do so could cause the hood to fly e Do not drive with the trunk lid open This fingertips and raise the hood open and result in an accident could allow dangerous exhaust gases z to be drawn into the vehicle See Ex Remove the support rod from the clamp e If you see steam or smoke coming from haust gas in the Starting and driving the engine compartment to avoid injury Sactionionthicnnanital Insert the support rod into the hole on the do not open the hood passenger s side of the hood When closing the hood return the hood rod to its original position Lower the hood approximately 12 inches 30 cm above the latch and release it This allows proper engagement of the hood latch Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 23 e Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously in jured Keep the car locked with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use and prevent children s access to car keys To open the trunk lid push the opener switch down To close the t
49. all of the information cautions and warn ings in this manual still apply and must be followed The driver supplemental front impact air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel The passenger supplemental front impact air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions although they may in flate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions Vehicle damage or lack of it is not always an indication of proper front air bag system opera tion The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual stage air bag inflators It also monitors informa tion from the crash zone sensor the Air bag Control Unit ACU seat belt buckle sensors and the occupant classification sensor pattern sen sor Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver For the front passenger the occupant classification sensor is also monitored Based on information from the sensors only one front air bag may inflate in a crash depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted Additionally the front passenger air bag may be automatically turned OFF under some conditions depending on the information provided by the occupant classification sensor If the front passenger air bag is OFF the
50. climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 59 CD gt Menu 8 00 Folder List Track List Play Mode LHA1259 CD gt Play Mode 8 00 Normal 1 Folder Repeat 1 Track Repeat 1 Disc Random 1 Folder Random LHA1262 CD gt Folder List 8 00 Qa XXXXXXX fa XXXXXXX fa XXXXXXX Ma XXXXXXX LHA1260 Play Mode This option allows you to alter the play pattern of the CD Touch the key of the mode you wish to apply The modes change the play pattern as follows 1 Track Repeat the current track is repeated 1 Disc Random tracks from the entire disc are played randomly 1 Folder Repeat compressed audio files CD only the current folder is repeated 1 Folder Random compressed audio files CD only tracks from the current folder are played randomly Normal Plays all tracks on the CD in sequentia order until stopped 4 60 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems e Folder List The folders on the disc are displayed Select the key of a folder name to begin playing tracks from that folder CD gt Track List 8 00 XXXXXXXX mp3 XXXXXXXX mp3 XXXXXXXX mp3 XXXXXXXX mp3 XXXXXXXX mp3 XXXXXXXX mp3 LHA1261 CD gt Title Text Priority 8 00 CDDB
51. e Adapting the System to Your Voice Tutorial for adapting the system to your voice USING THE SYSTEM Initialization When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized which takes a few seconds When completed the system is ready to accept voice commands If the amp switch is pressed before the initializa tion completes the display will show the mes sage System not ready or a beep sounds Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 135 Before starting To get the best performance from NISSAN Voice Voice Recognition 8 00 Recognition observe the following E a uj Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as ED TEN possible Close the windows to eliminate the one k s a i aj Navigation surrounding noises traffic noises vibration z information C practice sounds etc which may prevent the system 9 Audio j from recognizing the voice commands cor a Help rectly Alternate Command Mode ON When the climate control is in the AUTO To exit hold the TALK switch mode the fan speed decreases automati cally for easy recognition eal Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a LHA0768 LHA1345 command Giving voice commands 2 A list of commands appears on the screen Speak in a natural voice without pausing 1 P drel bee itch d and the system announces Please s
52. e Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously in jured Keep the car locked with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use and prevent children s access to car keys WRS0745 WRS0167 To fold down the driver s side of the rear seat Center armrest if so equipped reach through the opening and pull on the strap located behind the seat Pull the armrest down until it is horizontal The rear seats can be locked using the mechani cal key to prevent unauthorized access For more information on keys refer to Keys in the Pre driving checks and adjustments section of this manual Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 9 HEAD RESTRAINTS AWARNING Head restraints supplement the other ve hicle safety systems They may provide additional protection against injury in cer tain rear end collisions Adjust the head restraints properly as specified in this section Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks or remove the head resiraint Do not use the seat if the head restraint has been re moved If the head restraint was removed reinstall and properly adjust the head re straint before an occupant uses the seat ing position Failure to follow these in structions can reduce the effectiven
53. key Select the key of the setting you wish to change Select Language Select the English key or the Frangais key to change the language shown on the display If you select the Frangais key French language will be displayed so please use the French Own er s Manual To obtain a French Owner s Manual please see Owner s Manual Service Manual Or der Information in the Technical and consumer information section Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 11 Settings gt Select Units 8 00 US Metric LHA1252 Select Units Select the US mi F MPG key or the Metric km C L 100 km key to change the units shown on the display Voice Recognition For Voice Recognition settings refer to NISSAN Voice Recognition system in this section Navigation settings Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual for information regarding these set tings Audio settings For audio settings refer to Audio System in this section Phone settings For phone settings refer to Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with Navigation System in this section Bluetooth settings For Bluetooth phone settings refer to Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with Navigation System in this section For Bluetooth audio settings refer to Bluetooth streaming audio
54. section of this manual for wheel off set dimensions When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced the TPMS if so equipped will not function and the low tire pres sure warning light will flash for approxi mately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire re placement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS if so equipped Do not install a damaged or deformed wheel or tire even if it has been re paired Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail with out warning e The use of retread tires is not recommended e For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety In formation US or Tire Safety Informa tion Canada in the Warranty Informa tion Booklet Wheel balance Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life Even with regular use wheels can get out of balance Therefore they should be bal anced as required Wheel balance service should be per formed with the wheels off the vehicle Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage e For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Infor mation Canada in the Warranty In formation Booklet Care of wheels Wash
55. see Moonroof 2 46 SUAVISOFS 6s 486 es hea ae ee ee E A 3 28 Supplemental air bag warning light 1 57 2 14 Supplemental front impact air bag system 1 50 Supplemental restraint system Information and warning labels 1 56 Precautions on supplemental restraint SYSLEM e soa Gee ae eee ae a ee 1 41 Supplemental restraint system Supplemental air bag system 1 41 Switch Autolight switch lt cs s oa s saana ma 2 31 Automatic power window switch 2 45 Fog light switch s iiie mia on 2 34 Hazard warning flasher switch 2 34 Headlight and turn signal switch 2 29 Headlight control switch 2 31 Power door lock switch aoaaa aaao 3 5 Rear window and outside mirror defroster SWIHCHE iea he we ee ee 2 29 Turn signal switch ace canadai 2 33 Vehicle dynamic control VDC off SWIC 6b wa he Re ee a 2 36 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 28 T Tachometer oi osaa eae ane ew ee es 2 5 Temperature gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 5 Theft NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system engine statt 2 27 3 3 5 9 Three way catalyst 2 ee eee 5 2 Tire 10 6 Flat tine ics aa a ea ee eg Re ae 6 2 Sparetie 0 2 2 0 200084 6 4 8 49 Tire and Loading Information label 9 11 Tire Chains s z 2 2 0 8 2 p rs i doe yoked 8 46 Tire placard sce ea ee eG 9 11 Tirepresstre s y nto ed ee eee te 8 38 Tirecrotation z s aer 44 ocr dui dee
56. tail lights turn signal lights and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely Also check headlight aim Road wheel nuts lug nuts When checking the tires make sure no wheel nuts are missing and check for any loose wheel nuts Tighten if necessary Tire rotation Tires should be rotated every 7 500 miles 12 000 km Tires Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips If neces sary adjust the pressure in all tires including the spare to the pressure specified Check carefully for damage cuts or excessive wear Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS transmitter components Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal valve core and cap when the tires are replaced due to wear or age Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear there may be a need for wheel alignment If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds wheel balancing may be needed For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Information Booklet Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular basis Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage Have a dam aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility Windshield wiper bl
57. the ABS is not functioning properly Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer If an ABS malfunction occurs the anti lock func tion is turned off The brake system then operates normally but without anti lock assistance See Brake system in the Starting and driving sec tion BRAKE or Brake warning light This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems Parking brake indicator When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the light comes on when the parking brake is applied Low brake fluid warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the light warns of a low brake fluid level If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied stop the ve hicle and perform the following 1 Check the brake fluid level Add brake fluid as necessary See Brake fluid in the Main tenance and do it yourself section of this manual 2 If the brake fluid level is correct have the warning system checked by a NISSAN dealer AWARNING e Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on Driv ing could be dangerous If you judge it to be safe drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs Otherwise have your vehicle towed because driv ing it could be dangerous Pressing the brake pedal with the en gine stopped and or a low brake fluid level may increase your s
58. the CD DVD insert slot Insert the DVD into the slot with the label side facing up The DVD will be guided automatically into the slot and begin play ing To return the display screen to its upright position after the DVD is inserted press the OPEN TILT button again To eject a DVD press the OPEN TILT button to lower the display screen Once the screen is in the lowered position press the amp button to the left of the CD DVD insert slot The DVD will be ejected DISC AUX button Park the vehicle in a safe location for the front seat occupants to operate the DVD drive while watching the images Press the DISC AUX button until the DVD mode is active on the display When a DVD is loaded it will be replayed auto matically The operation screen will be turned on when the DISC AUX button is pressed while a DVD is playing The operation screen will turn off auto matically after a period of time To turn it on again press the DISC AUX button 4 64 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems LHA1376 DVD operation keys When the DVD is playing without the operation screen being shown you may use the touch screen to select items from the displayed video When the operation screen is being shown use the touchscreen to select an item from the dis played menus PAUSE Select the II key to pause the DVD To re sume playing the DVD use the key ee Select the P key t
59. the seat belt path The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the seat belt as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 31 7 Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the seat belt is not locked repeat steps 1 through 6 After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted the ALR mode child restraint mode is canceled LRS0824 if so equipped FORWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety and Child Restraint sections before in stalling a child restraint Follow these steps to install a forward facing child restraint using the LATCH system 1 Ifthe rear seat cushion has a flap pull the flap down to allow access to the anchors 1 32 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 2 Position the child restraint on the seat Al ways follow the child restraint manufactur er s instructions 4 The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback If the seating posit
60. tion Canada in the Warranty Informa tion Booklet All season tires NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod els to provide good performance all year includ ing snowy and icy road conditions All Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and or M amp S on the tire sidewall Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas Summer tires NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads Summer tire performance is substantially re duced in snow and ice Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M amp S on the tire sidewall If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels Snow tires If snow tires are needed it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires If you do not it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Generally snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed Never ex ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire If you install snow tires they must be the same size brand construction and tread pattern on all four wheels For additional traction on icy roads studded tires may be used However some U S states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use Chec
61. to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path The child re straint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child re straints fit in all types of vehicles 1 34 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 8 Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the child restraint is loose repeat steps 2 through 7 FORWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS AWARNING The three point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor ALR must be used when installing a child restraint Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision Also it can change the opera tion of the front passenger air bag See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section WRS0699 Forward facing front passenger seat step 1 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety and Child Restraint sections before in stalling a child restraint Follow these steps to install
62. vate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h For more details refer to Warning indicator lights and audible reminders in the Instruments and controls section and Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving section AWARNING If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking reduce vehicle speed pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible Driving with under inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an acci dent and could result in serious per sonal injury Check the tire pressure for all four tires Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Informa tion label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF If you have a flat tire replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally sp
63. which helps reduce the chance of engine damage could activate and automati cally decrease engine power Vehicle speed may decrease under high load Plan your trip carefully to account for trailer and vehicle load weather and road conditions AWARNING Overheating can result in reduced engine power and vehicle speed The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic which could increase the chance of a col lision Be especially careful when driving If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv ing speed pull to the side of the road ina safe area Allow the engine to cool and return to normal operation See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emer gency section of this manual A CAUTION Vehicle damage resulting from improper towing procedures is not covered by NISSAN warranties Total trailer load Tongue load Lo O Ka x 100 10 to 15 Tongue load Total trailer load WTI0160 Gross vehicle weight gala T11012M Tongue load Keep the tongue load between 10 15 percent of the total trailer load or use the trailer tongue load specified by the trailer manufacturer The tongue load must be within the maximum tongue load limits shown in the following Towing Load Specification chart If the tongue load be comes excessive rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight GVW Maximum Gross Axl
64. 0c eee 0 7 AIR BAGS SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 78 adel LD GRO YY A ae N amp PT 7D ee Mae 12 11 10 9 LII2001 0 2 Illustrated table of contents a 10 11 12 Top tether strap anchor P 1 27 Rear seat belts P 1 14 Roof mounted curtain side impact supplemental air bag P 1 41 Front seat mounted side impact supplemental air bag P 1 41 Head Restraints P 1 10 Front seat belts P 1 14 Side impact air bag pressure sensor driver s side shown passenger s side similar P 1 57 Supplemental front impact air bags P 1 41 Seats P 1 2 Occupant classification sensor pattern sensor P 1 50 Seat belt with pretensioner P 1 55 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren system P 1 25 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details EXTERIOR FRONT oo Coupe 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Power windows P 2 43 Windshield P 8 21 Windshield wiper and washer switch P 2 28 Engine hood P 3 23 Tie down P 6 14 Fog light switch if so equipped P 2 34 Headlight and turn signal switch P 2 29 Replacing bulbs P 8 28 Tire pressure P 8 38 Flat tire P 6 2 Tire chains P 8 46 Mirrors P 3 29 Door locks NISSAN Intelligent Key keys P 3 4 3 6 3 2 Illustrated t
65. 130 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 6 Alternate Command Mode is activated and the setting menu is expanded to include the Alternate Command Mode options See Settings menu in this section for an expla nation of the options Displaying the command list If you are controlling the system by voice com mands for the first time or do not know the appropriate voice command perform the follow ing procedure for displaying the voice command list available only in Alternate Command Mode Press the amp switch listen for the tone and say Help The system will respond by display ing the command list main menu Information gt Command List 8 00 Phone Commands Navigation Commands Information Commands Audio Commands Help Commands Push the TALK switch to start Voice Recognition LHA1342 8 00 Information Where am 1 Navigation Version Traffic Info GPS Position Weather Info Voice Recognition Map Update Displays the city nearest cross streets and GPS position LHA1402 Information gt Command List 8 00 Phone Commands Navigation Commands Information Commands Audio Commands Help Commands Push the TALK switch to start Voice Recognition LHA1342 Only manual controls such as the touchscreen can navigate the command list menu As an alter
66. 2 41 a roti ON VTN oN LIC1477 N SEN Lae e EN LIC1597 a LICO748 STORAGE BOX if so equipped 2 42 Instruments and controls COVERED STORAGE BOX Push the center of the lid to open GROCERY HOOKS The grocery hooks are located in the trunk and can be used to hang a standard size plastic grocery bag A CAUTION Do not apply a total load of more than 20 Ibs 9 kg to a single grocery hook WIC1264 LICO802 CARGO NET if so equipped AWARNING Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting In a sudden stop or collision un secured cargo could cause personal injury The cargo net helps keep packages in the cargo area from moving around while the vehicle is in motion To install the cargo net attach the net to the retainers To remove the cargo net detach the net from the cargo net retainers WINDOWS POWER WINDOWS AWARNING e Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows e Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls and become trapped in a window Unattended chil dren could become involved
67. 2 55 MEMO 2 56 Instruments and controls 3 Pre driving checks and adjustments KOS wives ense dea teendee dae deawale nena tne eae NISSAN Intelligent Key 0 005 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys DOOMS kristiana nue ua e p a naas Locking with key 0 6 i cece ee cee eee Locking with inside lock knob 008 Locking with power door lock switch Automatic door lOCKS ss cisco rorivovsrees vessi Child safety rear door lock Sedan only NISSAN Intelligent Key With Door and Trunk Request Switches cece eee eee eee Operating TAN ge unesene secs dgawiea wee ans Door locks unlocks precaution 008 NISSAN Intelligent Key operation How to use the remote keyless entry TUMCUION 2 ssc bie satiateetnyn avescsaaate papsonytiepchioacane a bined i Warning Signal sisi aiat yes ntenae wonatoae wade Troubleshooting guide ccc eee e eee NISSAN Intelligent Key Without Door and Trunk Request Switches 0 0 cece eee eee eee es Operating rangeres cese nineyi cece EE ao a How to use the remote keyless entry TUNCHON seras oo rat ertse ana agen 3 18 Warning signals s nesse nersini ina a 3 21 Troubleshooting guide cee eee 3 22 Hood sersris Slee wide ae Gitte oe aetna ged a eee 3 23 THUNK NIG ios rriar eugais pujian dened AE eae 3 23 Opener operation 0 cece eee eee ee 3 23 Int
68. 6 1 eee e eee teen eens 7 3 Corrosion protection 0 00 00ceeeeeeeeeeeee 7 6 Underbody 0 s cere reece 7 3 Most common factors contributing to vehicle GIASS asec eee den darasi ate EAn AE En SE MERET 7 3 COMMOSION eei e EA OE EEE EEEE 7 6 Aluminum alloy wheels if so equipped 7 3 Environmental factors influence the rate of Chrome parts c0ecg e ee eiae eE ip eaten 7 4 COMOSION ind E E E EE 7 6 Tire dressings errs ds serari renndi inneni waynes 7 4 To protect your vehicle from corrosion 7 6 Cleaning interior E e cece eee eee ee 7 4 CLEANING EXTERIOR In order to maintain the appearance of your ve hicle it is important to take proper care of it To protect the paint surfaces please wash your vehicle as soon as you can after a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain after driving on coastal roads when contaminants such as soot bird drop pings tree sap metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface when dust or mud builds up on the surface Whenever possible store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area When it is necessary to park outside park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover WASHING Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of water Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap a spec
69. 7 Use volume knob to adjust during playback LHA1253 CALL VOLUME Adjusting the incoming or outgoing call volume may improve clarity if reception between callers is unclear Incoming call adjusting this setting allows you to hear a difference in volume Outgoing call adjusting this setting allows the person you are talking with to hear a difference in volume To access the settings press the SETTING but ton then select Volume amp Beeps You can also adjust the volume of an incoming voice during a call by pushing the volume control switch on the steering wheel or by turning the volume control knob on the instrument panel NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM if so equipped NISSAN Voice Recognition allows hands free operation of the systems equipped on this ve hicle such as phone and vehicle information There are two voice recognition modes of opera tion available They are Standard Mode Alternate Command Mode In Standard Mode the factory default setting commands that are available are always shown on the display and announced by the system You can complete your desired operation by simply following the prompts given by the system Not all NISSAN Voice Recognition options are available while in Standard Mode For advanced operation you can change to an Alternate Command Mode that enables the op eration of the display audio and clima
70. 9 9 Vehicle identification cece eee eee ee eee 9 9 Vehicle identification number VIN plate 9 9 Vehicle identification number Chassis NUMbER lt 0 sia nccccctauebenas iirinn 9 9 Engine serial number 0 0c eee eee eee 9 10 F M V S S C M V S S certification label 9 10 Emission control information label 9 11 Tire and loading information label 9 11 Air conditioner specification label 9 12 Installing front license plate cee 9 12 Vehicle loading information cece eae 9 13 TEMS set sastds atase iaie eacahaSyard on E anid a 9 13 Vehicle load capacity 00 cece eee eae 9 13 Loading tPS rees taesan arroes ernaar Enea 9 15 Measurement of weights 0 e eee 9 15 TOWING atrajo sires eaek kGiewieiwen meee 9 16 Maximum load limits 0 0 cece eee eee 9 16 Towing load specification 0 seas 9 19 TOWING safeties eiiean tik doe eect eoa E 9 19 Flat tOWINGi ssori ies teeee esas akan anee eases 9 23 Uniform tire quality grading c cece eee 9 24 Emission control system warranty 0 008 9 25 Reporting safety defects 000 cece eee eee 9 25 Readiness for inspection maintenance I M test 9 26 Event Data Recorders EDR 0 00seeaeee 9 26 Owner s Manual Service Manual order information 9 27 In the event of a collision
71. For vehicles in the U S the factory default setting is the Standard Mode See NISSAN Voice Rec ognition Standard Mode in this section For ve hicles in Canada the factory default setting is the Alternate Command Mode See NISSAN Voice Recognition Alternate Command Mode in this section NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION STANDARD MODE The Standard Mode enables control of naviga tion phone and vehicle information With this setting active commands that are available are always shown on the display and announced by the system Displaying user guide If you use the NISSAN Voice Recognition system for the first time or you do not know how to operate it you can display the User Guide for confirmation You can confirm how to use voice commands by accessing a simplified User Guide which con tains basic instructions and tutorials for several voice commands 4 118 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Information gt User Guide 8 00 Getting Started Let s Practice Using the Address Book Finding a Street Address Placing Calls Help on Speaking LHA1326 1 Press the INFO button on the instrument panel 2 Select the Voice Recognition key NOTE You can skip steps 1 and 2 by pressing the 4 switch and saying Help 3 Select the User Guide key 4 Select an item Available items Getting Started Describes the basi
72. Space Automatic Recording Delete Songs from Music Box Recording Quality CDDB Version 132 kbps LHA1290 Music Box gt Music Box Used Free Space 8 00 p Saved Album Saved Track Remaining Time 8 54 153 hr 14 min LHA1291 Music Box gt Delete Songs from Music Box 8 00 Delete Current Song from Music Box Delete Albums from Music Box Delete All Songs Albums from Music Box 1 3 LHA1292 Music Box settings To set up the Music Box system to your preferred settings touch the Menu key during playback then touch the Music Box Settings key e Music Box Used Free Space Displays the number of tracks and albums stored on the hard drive The percentage of hard drive space taken up and the amount of remaining recording time left are also shown e Automatic Recording When this item is turned to ON the Music Box system automatically starts recording when a CD is inserted 4 82 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems e Delete Songs from Music Box Delete music data stored on the hard drive e Recording Quality Set the recording quality of 105 kbps or 132 kbps The default is set to 132 kbps e CDDB Version Shows the version of CDDB Compact Disc Data Base Gracenote NOTE The information contained in the Gracenote Dat
73. Stopping playback The system stops playing when Another mode radio CD USB Bluetooth Audio or AUX is selected The audio system is turned off The ignition switch is placed in the OFF position Seeking button Press the M4 side of the seeking button while a track is playing to return to the beginning of the current track Press the PPI side of the seeking button while a track is playing to skip to the beginning of the next track If you press and hold the M4 side of the seek ing button orthe Pl side of the seeking button for more than approximately 1 5 seconds the track will play while rewinding or fast forwarding When the M4 side of the seeking button or the PP side of the seeking button is released the track will return to the normal playing speed TUNE FOLDER knob The TUNE FOLDER knob skips from album to album unless it is playing All Songs from the Music Library menu When playing All Songs the TUNE FOLDER knob changes the track in stead of the album The upper right corner of the screen indicates if the TUNE FOLDER knob is changing by track or album Music Box gt Menu 8 00 Now Playing Music Library My Playlists Play Mode Normal Edit Music Information Music Box Settings LHA1284 Music Box menu There are some options available during play back Select the Menu key then select one of the following that are
74. System never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat An inflating air bag could seri ously injure or kill a child A rear facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat Be sure to purchase a child restraint that will fit the child and vehicle Some child restraints may not fit properly in your vehicle Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 23 Child restraint anchor points are de signed to withstand loads from child restraints that are properly fitted Never use the anchor points for adult seat belts or harnesses A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat Keep seatbacks as upright as pos sible after fitting the child restraint Infants and children should always be placed in an appropriate child re straint while in the vehicle e When the child restraint is not in use keep it secured with the LATCH system or a seat belt In a sudden stop or colli sion loose objects can injure occu pants or damage the vehicle ACAUTION A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot Check the seating sur face and buckles before placing a child in the child restraint This vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint anchor system referred to as the LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren sys tem Some child restraints include rigid or webbing mounted attachments that can be con nec
75. To remove the high mounted stop light Push toward rear of vehicle Lift to remove The high mounted stop light must be properly reinstalled before driving your vehicle Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film ACAUTION When cleaning the inside of the windows do not use sharp edged tools abrasive cleaners or chlorine based disinfectant cleaners They could damage the electri cal conductors radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS if so equipped Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp ened in a mild soap solution especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used If not removed road salt can discolor the wheels A CAUTION Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels e Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid or alkali contents to clean the wheels Appearance and care 7 3 e Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels when they are hot The wheel temperature should be the same as am bient temperature Rinse the wheel to completely remove the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied CHROME PARTS Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish TIRE DRESSINGS NIS
76. User Guide screen 4 120 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Useful tips for correct operation You can display useful speaking tips to help the system recognize your voice commands cor rectly 1 Select Help on Speaking 2 You can confirm the page by scrolling the screen 8 00 Settings gt Voice Recognition User Guide Alternate Command Mode Guide the usage of Voice Recognition LHA1331 Voice recognition settings The available settings of the NISSAN Voice Rec ognition system are described 1 Select Voice Recognition 2 You can confirm the page by scrolling the screen USING THE SYSTEM Initialization When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized which takes a few seconds When completed the system is ready to accept voice commands If the amp switch is pressed before the initializa tion completes voice commands will not be ac cepted Please wait until the NISSAN Voice Rec ognition initialization is completed BEFORE STARTING To get the best recognition performance from Voice Recognition observe the following The interior of the vehicle should be as quiet as possible Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises traffic noise and vi bration sounds etc which may prevent the system from correctly recognizing the voice commands Wait unti
77. a 24 hour display Offset hour Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing the hours Offset minute Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing the minutes Daylight Savings Time When this item is enabled indicator light illumi nated daylight savings time is on To turn off the daylight savings time touch the ON key the amber indicator light will go out Settings gt Time Zone 8 00 Pacific Mountain Central Eastern Atlantic Newfoundland LHA1243 Time Zone Select the Time Zone key the Time Zone screen will appear Select one of the following zones depending on the current location by selecting the correct time zone key to enable that time zone indicator light will illuminate for that location Pacific Mountain Central Eastern Atlantic Newfoundland Hawaii e Alaska After selection settings select the Back key or any other mode button to accept the changes Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 9 Settings gt Others 8 00 Settings gt Comfort 8 00 Settings gt Comfort 8 00 Auto Interior Illumination ON Light Off Delay E 45 sec gt gt Comfort Light Sensitivity 4 le f Speed Sensing Wiper Interval ON Language amp Units Light Off Delay e 45 sec gt gt Selective Door Unlock ON Vo
78. a E O EAE EN FM radio recepton s sis ri siisessieenoni inida AM radio reception 0 cece eee Satellite radio reception if so equipped Audio operation precautions 000 FM AM radio with compact disc CD player if so equipped 2 eee eee eee eee eee FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD player if so equipped 6 cece eee eee FM AM SAT radio with CD DVD player if so equipped 6 cece eect eters Digital Versatile Disc DVD Player Operation models with Navigation System USB interface models without Navigation System if so equipped 0 cece eee eee USB interface models with Navigation Systm ccsecwa aie ionnan teten Eea iPod player operation without Navigation System if so equipped 0 cece eee eee ee iPod player operation with Navigation System if so equipped 0 cece eee eee Music Box if so equipped e eee Bluetooth streaming audio if so equipped CD care and cleaning 0 0000 Steering wheel switch for audio control if so equipped 6 cece cece eee eee ANCNNA i ie rce bore ceet ec cawetnnna da dadie Car phone or CB radio 0 0 eee eee eee Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System without Navigation System if so equipped 4 Regulatory Information 0 0 eee Using the system sires rsraori nirst nada antes Control buttOns sasise o
79. a compatible Bluetooth audio device that is capable of playing audio files the device can be connected to the vehicle s audio system so that the audio files on the device play through the vehicle s speakers 4 84 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Settings gt Bluetooth o i Yul 8 00 Bluetooth Connect Bluetooth Connected Devices Edit Bluetooth Info Replace Connected Phone L LHA1316 Connecting Bluetooth audio To connect your Bluetooth audio device to the vehicle follow the procedure below 1 Press the SETTING button on the instru ment panel 2 Select the Bluetooth key 3 Select the Connect Bluetooth key Settings gt Bluetooth So dm Yu 8 00 sac E q Are you connecting a Bluetooth device to use with the handsfree phone system For audio devices please select No q l l H Yes No Cancel 16 2 5 LHA1317 Settings gt Connect Bluetooth 8 00 0000_ Start connecting your Bluetooth a E aucto device The PIN is 0000 q CFTC CET Please input passkey LHA1351 Bluetooth Audio Yul 8 00 Play Pause LHA1299 4 A screen will appear asking if you are con necting the device to use with the hands free phone system Select the N
80. a forward facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat 1 If you must install a child restraint in the front seat it should be placed ina forward facing direction only Move the seat to the rearmost position Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear facing direction and there fore must not be used in the front seat Position the child restraint on the seat Al ways follow the child restraint manufactur er s instructions The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback If necessary adjust or remove the head re straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit If the head restraint is removed store it in a secure place Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the child restraint is removed See Head restraints in this section for head restraint adjustment re moval and installation information If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit try another seating position or a different child restraint WRS0680 Forward facing step 3 3 Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer s in structions for belt routing If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether
81. a lower gear Avoid long or repeated use of the brakes when descending a hill as this reduces their effectiveness and could cause overheating Shifting to a lower gear instead provides engine braking and reduces the need to brake as frequently If the engine coolant temperature rises to a high temperature refer to If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section of this owner s manual Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle s first 500 miles 805 km For the first 500 miles 805 km that you do tow do not drive over 50 MPH 80 km h Have your vehicle serviced more often than at intervals specified in the recommended Maintenance Schedule in the NISSAN Ser vice and Maintenance Guide When making a turn your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels To compensate for this make a larger than normal turning radius during the turn Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle trailer handling possibly caus ing vehicle sway When being passed by larger vehicles be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect ve hicle handling Do the following if the trailer begins to sway 1 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to allow the vehicle to coast and steer as straight ahead as the road conditions allow This combination will help stabilize the ve
82. adjusted the moonroof glass panel has been adjusted or changed or the electrical supply interrupted and or some malfunction has been detected Use the following reset procedure to return the moonroof operation to normal 1 Place the ignition switch in the ON position 2 Push and hold the moonroof switch toward gt Once the moonroof has reached the full tilt position release the switch Push and hold the switch toward the LD position again After a delay of four seconds the moonroof will make a small movement and backup 3 Release the switch 4 Within 5 seconds of releasing the switch push and continuously hold the switch toward gt The moonroof will move from the tilt position to the open position and back to the close position NOTE If the switch is released at any time during Step 4 the procedure must be restarted 5 Release the switch Do not place the ignition switch in the OFF position for at least 2 seconds The moonroof is now reset If the moonroof still does not operate properly have the moonroof system checked by a NISSAN dealer Auto reverse function when closing or tilting down the moonroof The auto reverse function can be activated when the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto matic operation when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for about 45 sec onds after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position Depending on the environm
83. air recirculation but ton to off and the fan control dial to high to circulate the air e If electrical wiring or other cable con nections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the trunk lid or the body follow the manufacturer s recommen dation to prevent carbon monoxide en try into the vehicle e The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever a The vehicle is raised for service b You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment c You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system d You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system un derbody or rear of the vehicle THREE WAY CATALYST The three way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system Exhaust gases in the three way catalyst are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants AWARNING e The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys tem are very hot Keep people animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass waste paper or rags They may ignite and cause a fire ACAUTION e Do not use leaded gasoline Deposits from leaded gasoline will seriously re duce the three way catalyst s ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants Keep your engine tuned up Malfunc tions in the ignition fuel injection or electrical systems can
84. are many folders or file levels on the MP3 WMA disc or if it is a multisession disc some time may be required before the music starts playing The writing software and hardware combination might not match or the writing speed writing depth writing width etc might not match the specifications Try using the slowest writing speed Skipping may occur with large quantities of data such as for high bit rate data When a non MP3 WMA file has been given an extension of MP3 WMA mp3 or wma or when play is prohibited by copyright protection there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software Therefore the files might not play in the desired order Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 37 CD DVD or USB with Compressed Audio Files models with Navigation System The file types supported by this system are MP3 WMA AAC M4A and ATRACS Explanation of terms MP3 MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Experts Group Audio Layer 3 MP3 is the most well known compressed digital audio file format This format allows for near CD quality sound but at a fraction of the size of normal audio files MP3 conversion of an audio track can reduce the file size by ap proximately 10 1 ratio Sampling 44 1 kHz Bit rate 128 kbps with virtually no percep tibl
85. as follows CD 1 TRK RPT OFF CD with MP3 or WMA 1 FOLDER RPT 1 TRK RPT OFF 1 TRK RPT the current track will be repeated 1 FOLDER RPT the current folder will be re peated OFF No repeat play pattern is applied The indi cator on the display will turn off The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is applied RDM button When the RDM button is pressed while a com pact disc is playing the play pattern can be changed as follows CD 1 DISC RDM gt OFF CD with MP3 or WMA 1 DISC RDM 1 FOLDER RDM OFF 1 DISC RDM all tracks on the disc will be played randomly 1 FOLDER RDM all tracks in the current folder will be played randomly OFF No random play pattern is applied The indicator on the display will turn off The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is applied AUX button The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cas sette tape CD player MP3 player or a laptop computer Press the AUX button to play a compatible device plugged into the AUX IN jack The AUX button is also used to switch the audio system to a source plugged into the USB input jack in the center console When a device is plugged into the AUX IN jack while another device is plugged into the USB input jack the AUX button is used to to
86. buttons can be set in the same man ner Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 51 If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the radio memory will be canceled In that case reset the desired stations Compact disc CD player operation Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and carefully insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side up The compact disc is automatically pulled into the slot and starts to play If the radio is already operating it automatically turns off and the compact disc begins to play CD button When the CD button is pressed with the system off and the compact disc loaded the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play When the CD button is pressed with a compact disc loaded and the radio playing the radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play CD mp3 8 00 Folder XXXXXXXX Song XXXXXXXX Artist XXXXXXXX 14 0 22 LHA1275 pp SEEK CATEGORY lt lt Reverse or Fast Forward button Press and hold the SEEK CATEGORY button M4 or PP for 1 5 seconds while the compact disc is playing to reverse or fast forward the track being played The compact disc plays at an increased speed while reversing or fast for warding When the button is released the com pact disc returns to normal play speed P gt gt I SEEK CATEGORY button
87. cause abrasions or other injuries Side air bags and curtain air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the side air bag Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as 1 54 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system practical from the door finishers and side roof rails The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the occupants Because of this the force of the side air bag and curtain air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to or is against these air bag modules during inflation The side air bags and curtain air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over The side air bags and curtain air bags op erate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position After placing the ignition switch in the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational AWARNING Do not place any objects near the seat back of the front seats Also do not place any objects an umbrella bag etc between the front door finisher and the front seat Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a side air bag inflates Right after inflation several side air bag and curta
88. circles COMPASS DISPLAY Press the A button when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position The direction will be displayed Zone variation change procedure The difference between magnetic north and geo graphical north is known as variance In some areas this difference can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass readings Follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location if this happens 1 Establish your location on the zone map Refer to the illustration Record your zone number 2 Place the ignition switch in the ON position 3 Press the button in for 5 seconds until the current zone entry number is displayed 4 Press the A button repeatedly until the desired zone entry number is displayed Once the desired zone number is displayed stop pressing the button and the display will show compass direction within a few seconds NOTE Use zone number 5 for Hawaii Instruments and controls 2 7 WIC0355 2 8 Instruments and controls If a magnet is located near the com pass or the vehicle is driven where the terrestrial magnetism is disturbed the compass display may not indicate the correct direction In places where the terrestrial magne tism is disturbed the correction of the direction starts automatically Inaccurate compass direction The compass display is equipped with automatic correction function If the correct dir
89. data as How various systems in your vehicle were operating Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and How fast the vehicle was traveling Sounds are not recorded These data can help provide a better understand ing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equip ment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manu facturer and NISSAN dealer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have ac cess to the vehicle or the EDR EDR data will only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or as otherwise required or per mitted by law OWNER S MANUAL SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle Filled with wiring diagrams illustrat
90. driving 5 5 OFF ROAD RECOVERY If the right side or left side wheels leave the road surface maintain control of the vehicle by follow ing the procedure below Please note that this procedure is only a general guide The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the con ditions of the vehicle road and traffic 1 Remain calm and do not overreact 2 Do not apply the brakes 3 Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course 4 When appropriate slowly release the accel erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle 5 If there is nothing in the way steer the ve hicle to follow the road while vehicle speed is reduced Do not attempt to drive the ve hicle back onto the road surface until vehicle speed is reduced 6 When it is safe to do so gradually turn the steering wheel until both tires return to the road surface When all tires are on the road surface steer the vehicle to stay in the ap propriate driving lane 5 6 Starting and driving f you decide that it is not safe to return the vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle road or traffic conditions gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS Rapid air pressure loss or a blow out can occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused by driving on under inflated tires Rapid ai
91. ever you refuel Check that all windows and lights are clean Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition Also check tires for proper inflation Lock all doors Position seat and adjust head restraints Adjust inside and outside mirrors Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position See Warning indicator lights and audible reminders in the Instruments and controls section of this manual STARTING THE ENGINE 1 Apply the parking brake 2 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT model Move the shift selector to P Park or N Neutral P Park is recommended The starter is designed not to operate if the shift selector is in any of the driving positions Manual transmission M T model Move the shift selector to N Neutral De press the clutch pedal to the floor The starter is designed not to operate unless the clutch pedal is fully de pressed Push the ignition switch to the ON position Depress the brake pedal and the clutch pedal if so equipped and push the ignition switch to start the engine To start the engine immediately push and release the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal with the ignition switch in any position If the engine is very hard to start in ex tremely cold weather or when restarting depress the accelerator pedal a little a
92. for operation are displayed on the vehicle information display See Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls section 5 8 Starting and driving PUSH BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS LOCK Normal parking position The ignition switch can only be locked in this position The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is pushed to the ACC position while carrying the Intelligent Key or with the Intelligent Key inserted in the port The ignition switch will lock when any door is opened or closed with the ignition switched off OFF The ignition switch is in the OFF position when the engine is turned off using the ignition switch No lights will illuminate on the ignition switch ACC Accessories This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is not running ACC has a battery saver feature that will turn the ignition switch to the OFF position after 30 min utes under the following conditions all doors are closed shift selector is in P Park The battery saver feature will be cancelled if any of the following occur any door is opened shift selector is moved out of the P Park ignition switch changes position ON Normal operating position This position turns on the ignition system and electrical accessories A CAUTION Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition switch in ACC or ON positions when the engine is not running for an e
93. from the GVWR The remaining amount is the avail able maximum tongue load 9 18 Technical and consumer information To determine the Gross Trailer Weight weigh your trailer on a scale with all equipment and cargo that are normally in the trailer when it is towed Make sure the Gross Trailer Weight is not more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the trailer and is not more than the calculated available maximum towing capacity Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to be moved or removed to meet the specified rat ings Example Gross Vehicle Weight GVW as weighed on a scale including passengers cargo and hitch 4 103 Ib 1861 kg Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR from F M V S S C M V S S certification label 4 203 lb 1906 kg Maximum Towing Load from Towing Load Specification chart 1 000 Ib 454 kg 4 203 Ib 1906 kg GVWR 4 103 Ib 1861 kg GVW 100 Ib 45 kg Available for tongue weight 1 000 Ib 454 kg Capacity available for towing 100 Ib 45 kg Available tongue weight 1 000 lb 454 kg Available capacity 10 tongue weight The available towing capacity may be less than the maximum towing capacity due to t
94. hicle Do not correct trailer sway by steering or applying the brakes When the trailer sway stops gently apply the brakes and pull to the side of the road in a safe area Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal anced as described earlier in this section Be careful when passing other vehicles Passing while towing a trailer requires con siderably more distance than normal pass ing Remember the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes Use the Tow Mode or downshift the trans mission to a lower gear for engine braking when driving down steep or long hills This will help slow the vehicle without applying the brakes Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently This could cause the brakes to overheat resulting in reduced braking efficiency Increase your following distance to allow for greater stopping distances while towing a trailer Anticipate stops and brake gradually NISSAN recommends that the cruise con trol not be used while towing a trailer e Some states or provinces have specific regulations and speed limits for vehicles that are towing trailers Obey the local speed limits Check your hitch trailer wiring harness con nections and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50 miles 80 km of travel and at every break When launching a boat don t allow the wa ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or rear bumper
95. if so equipped AWARNING e Do not use your engine block heater with an ungrounded electrical system or a 2 pronged adapter You can be se riously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection Disconnect and properly store the en gine block heater cord before starting the engine Damage to the cord could result in an electrical shock and can cause serious injury e Use a heavy duty 3 wire 3 pronged ex tension cord rated for at least 10 A Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt GFI protected grounded 110 VAC outlet Failure to use the proper extension cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury Engine block heaters are available through NISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperature starting The engine block heater should be used when the outside temperature is 20 F 7 C or lower To use the engine block heater 1 2 Turn the engine off Open the hood and unwrap the engine block heater cord Plug the engine block heater cord into a grounded 3 wire 3 pronged extension cord Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt GFI protected grounded 110 volt AC VAC outlet The engine block heater must be plugged in for at least 2 4 hours depending on outside temperatures to properly warm the engine coolant Use an appropriate timer to turn the engine block heater on Before starting the
96. instrument panel on the driver s side Date of purchase Current odometer reading Your NISSAN dealer s name Your comments or questions OR You can write to NISSAN with the information at For U S customers Nissan North America Inc Consumer Affairs Department P O Box 685003 Franklin TN 37068 5003 For Canadian customers Nissan Canada Inc 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga Ontario L4W 4Z5 or via e mail at For U S customers nnaconsumeraffairs nissan usa com For Canadian customers information centre nissancanada com We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle Table of Contents Illustrated table of contents Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Instruments and controls Pre driving checks and adjustments Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Starting and driving In case of emergency Appearance and care Maintenance and do it yourself Technical and consumer information 0 Illustrated table of contents Air bags seat belts and child restraints 0 2 Instrument panel cc 2 c ctucers ve sees ee nei egen eae aes 0 8 Exterior frONtsc4 aad ozs ccatingernatadne tie ne Gd eat tie are 0 3 Engine compartment check locations 0 10 Exterior rear 2 2 0 e eect iti sa eee eee 0 5 Warning indicator lights s sessa cece eee ees 0 12 Passenger compartment 0
97. into traffic when parked on an incline it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL NO CURB Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the cen ter of the road if it moves Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi tion and remove the key Starting and driving 5 23 POWER STEERING The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic pump driven by the engine to assist steering If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks you will still have control of the vehicle However much greater steering effort is needed especially in sharp turns and at low speeds AWARNING If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving the power assist for the steering will not work Steering will be harder to operate 5 24 Starting and driving BRAKE SYSTEM The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits If one circuit malfunctions you will still have braking at 2 wheels BRAKE PRECAUTIONS Vacuum assisted brakes The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum If the engine stops you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal Howeve
98. is generally desirable not to turn off the headlights for short intervals for example when the vehicle stops at N a traffic signal Even when the daytime E o running lights are active Canada only the xenon headlights do not turn on This way the life of the xenon head lights is not reduced e If the xenon headlight bulb is close to burning out the brightness will drasti cally decrease the light will start blink ing or the color of the light will be come reddish If one or more of the a 1 ____ 28 E above signs appear contact a NISSAN Type A Type B dealer 2 30 Instruments and controls LIC1063 Type C HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH Lighting When turning the switch to the 4 posi tion the front parking tail license plate and instrument panel lights come on When turning the switch to the 2 posi tion the headlights come on and all the other lights remain on ACAUTION Use the headlights with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery LIC1086 Autolight system if so equipped The autolight system allows the headlights to be set so they turn on and off automatically The autolight system can Turn on the headlights front parking tail license plate and instrument panel lights au tomatically when it is dark Turn off all the lights when it is light Keep all the lights on for 45 seconds after you place the ignition switch in
99. located on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label GCWR Gross Combined Weight rating The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle passengers cargo and trailer Vehicle Capacity Weight Load limit Total load capacity maximum total weight limit specified of the load pas sengers and cargo for the vehicle This is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer the trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load This information is located on the Tire and Loading Information label if so equipped Cargo capacity permissible weight of cargo the subtracted weight of occupants from the load limit VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY Do not exceed the load limit of your ve hicle shown as The combined weight of occupants and cargo on the Tire and Loading Information label Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as Seating Capacity on the Tire and Load ing Information label To get the combined weight of occu pants and cargo add the weight of all occupants then add the total luggage weight Examples are shown in the follow ing illustration Technical and consumer information 9 13 Load limit 1 400 Ib 640 kg Load limit 1 400 Ib 640 kg Occupants Luggage Ri G 150 Ib x 2 300 Iib 30 Ib x 2 60 Ib 135 kg 14 kg 70 kg Occupants RR 150 Ib
100. locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during certain impacts The Automatic Locking Retractor ALR mode child restraint mode locks the seat belt for child restraint installation When the ALR mode is activated the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts See Child re straints later in this section for more information The ALR mode should be used only for child restraint installation During normal seat belt use by an occupant the ALR mode should not be activated If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten sion AWARNING When fastening the seat belts be certain that the seatbacks are completely se cured in the latched position If they are not completely secured passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop WRS0139 Unfastening the seat belts Tounfasten the seat belt press the button on the buckle The seat belt automatically re tracts Checking seat belt operation Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the retractor When the vehicle slows down rapidly To increase your confidence in the seat belts check the operation as follows Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly The retractor
101. lt r i aici aie etd 4 72 4 74 Music Box hard disk drive audio SYStSM is kei pea e atone aed 4 77 Audio system RAGIO0 21s bak oe wie ate arate Ghai deed 4 29 Audio System Settings sks ceded ena arana d 4 55 Audio system USB interface 4 66 4 68 Autolight switch 2 00 2 31 Automatic Automatic power window switch 2 45 Transmission shift selector lock release 5 16 Automatic anti glare inside mirror 3 30 Automatic door locks 0 3 5 AUX jack 2 2 0 2 00000 4 47 4 53 B Batterye sie ieg siege Pea ea Ge a 8 16 Charge warning light 2 11 Before starting the engine 5 10 Belt See drive belt 8 18 Block heater ENnQines lt 6 2 oka SFr diate 5 29 Bluetooth audio 0004 4 84 Bluetooth hands free phone SYSTEM a okon aa 9 aad ea ee 4 91 4 106 Boosterseats 0 0000 004 1 38 Brake Anti lock Braking System ABS 5 25 Brake fluid ss esata ee pe ee bad 8 14 Brake light See stop light 8 30 Brake system 2 0 0 2 0004 5 24 Brake warning light 0 2 11 Brake wear indicators 2 16 8 22 Parking brake operation 5 19 Self adjusting brakes 0 8 22 Brakes 22 fae eR Ree tiima 8 22 Break in schedule 0 5 22 Brightness contrast button 4 12 Brightness control Instrument panel 2 0000 2 33 Bulb check instrument panel
102. may result in short ened engine life and reduced engine performance e Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed either fast or slow and do not run the engine over 4 000 rpm Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear Avoid quick starts Avoid hard braking as much as possible Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles 800 km Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged 5 22 Starting and driving INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY Accelerate slowly and smoothly Maintain cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position Drive at moderate speeds on the highway Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking Maintain a safe distance behind other ve hicles Use a proper gear range which suits road conditions On level roads shift into high gear as soon as possible Avoid unnecessary engine idling Keep your engine tuned up Follow the recommended periodic mainte nance schedule Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres sure Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy Keep the wheels in correct alignment Im proper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy Air conditioner operation lowers fuel economy Use the air conditioner only when necessary When cruising at highway speeds it is more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to reduce drag Use the recommended viscosity engine oil
103. oc curs AWARNING There are some small distances immedi ately before the closed position which cannot be detected Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle before closing the window Instruments and controls 2 45 When power window switch does not operate If the power window automatic function closing only does not operate properly perform the fol lowing procedure to initialize the power window system 1 Place the ignition switch in the ON position 2 Open the window more than halfway by operating the power window switch 3 Pull the power window switch and hold it to close the window and then hold the switch more than 3 seconds after the window is closed 4 Release the power window switch Operate the window by the automatic function to confirm the initialization is complete The power window automatically opens or closes depending on if the automatic down or up function is selected 5 Perform steps 2 through 4 above for other windows If the power window function does not operate properly after performing the above procedure see a NISSAN dealer for assistance 2 46 Instruments and controls MOONROOF if so equipped 9 w Slo SO AUTOMATIC MOONROOF The moonroof will only operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position The auto matic moonroof is operational for about 45 sec onds even if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or OFF posit
104. odd 8 47 Typesiofttires sce sak ha Ke 8 45 Uniform tire quality grading 9 24 Wheels andtires 00 8 38 Wheel tire size 2 aa 9 8 Tire pressure Low tire pressure warning light 2 12 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 5 3 Towing Flat OWING s e sieno eee Ree we a 9 23 Towing load specification 9 19 Tow truck towing e edie s su iae ny 6 11 Trailer towing ars s es a e g a a a 9 16 Transceiver HomeLink Universal Transceiver 2 51 Transmission Continuously Variable Transmission CVP fluid e ea ois ne Be eS ga 8 13 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission CVT o a aa aa 5 11 Driving with manual transmission 5 17 Shift selector lock release 5 16 Travel See registering your vehicle in another COUNTIY gals ai gx e aran Hie ae Be ele a a 9 9 Trip odometer 2 0 00 2 eee 2 4 Trunk access through the rear seat 1 8 Trunk lid lock opener lever 3 23 TANKIDE a oe wee ecb sites ode nce Geet tn Es 2 51 Turn signal SWithisna eed aac ee a 2 33 U Uniform tire quality grading 9 24 USB interface Audio file operation 4 67 4 69 Video file operation 4 70 v Vanity IMITO sy ss ar iea ao Ge E a 3 29 Variable voltage control system 8 18 Vehicle dimensions and weights 9 8 Vehicle dynamic control VDC off switch 2 36 Vehicle dynamic control VDC system 5 26 Vehicle i
105. of a side impact rear impact rollover or lower severity fron tal collision Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents e The front passenger air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status light is lit or if the front passenger seat is unoccupied See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system e The seat belts and the front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat The front air bags inflate with great force Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys tem if you are unrestrained leaning forward sitting sideways or out of posi tion in any way you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practi cal from the steering wheel or instru ment panel Always use the seat belts The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened The Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt us age then inflates the air bags as needed Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident e The front passenger seat is equipp
106. on the ground Place the ignition switch in the OFF position and secure the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a rope or similar device Move the shift selector to the N Neu tral position WCE0195 coor e When towing Continuously Variable Transmission CVT or manual trans mission models M T with the rear wheels on the ground if you do not use towing dollies Always release the parking brake In case of emergency 6 13 LCE0138 VEHICLE RECOVERY freeing a stuck vehicle Pulling a stuck vehicle AWARNING To avoid vehicle damage serious per sonal injury or death when recovering a stuck vehicle e Contact a professional towing service to recover the vehicle if you have any questions regarding the recovery procedure 6 14 Incase of emergency e Do not use the vehicle tie downs to tow or free a stuck vehicle e Only use devices specifically designed for vehicle recovery and follow the manufacturer s instructions e Always pull the recovery device straight out from the front of the vehicle Never pull at an angle e Route recovery devices so they do not touch any part of the vehicle except the attachment point If your vehicle is stuck in sand snow mud etc use a tow strap or other device designed specifically for vehicle recovery Always follow the manufactur er s instructions for the recovery device Do not use the tie down hooks for towing or
107. on the power steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera tures of 32 86 F 0 30 C If the fluid is at or below the MIN line add Genu ine NISSAN PSF to HOT MAX or COLD MAX depending on system fluid temperature Remove the cap and fill through the opening 8 14 Maintenance and do it yourself ACAUTION DO NOT OVERFILL e Recommended fluid is NISSAN PSF or equivalent Genuine BRAKE AND CLUTCH if so equipped FLUID For further brake and clutch fluid specification information refer to Capacities and recom mended fuel lubricants in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual A WARNING e Use only new fluid from a sealed con tainer Old inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake and clutch systems The use of improper fluids can damage the brake and clutch system and affect the vehicle s stopping ability Clean the filler cap before removing Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of reach of children A CAUTION Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur faces This will damage the paint If fluid is spilled immediately wash the surface with water WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID LDI0558 LDI0558 LDI0579 BRAKE FLUID Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir If the fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake warning light comes on add Genuine NISSAN Su
108. or touch the double down arrow to scroll down an entire page Inputting characters Touch the letter or number key 1 There are some options available when inputting characters e Uppercase Shows uppercase characters Lowercase Shows lowercase characters Space Inserts a space 4 4 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems e Delete Deletes the last inputted character with one touch Touch and hold the Delete key to delete all of the characters e OK Completes the character input Touch screen maintenance If you clean the display screen use a dry soft cloth If additional cleaning is necessary use a small amount of neutral detergent with a soft cloth Never spray the screen with water or de tergent Dampen the cloth first and then wipe the screen 1 2 3 ae gt Comfort 8 00 Saar Auto interior Illumination eon E Light Sensitivity to DIO Light Off Delay 4 45 sec gt Speed Sensing Wiper Interval e oN Selective Door Unlock e oN Je Cabin lighting when unlocking doors WHA1401 HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE SCREEN Vehicle functions are viewed on the center dis play screen in menus Whenever a menu selec tion is made or menu item is highlighted different areas on the screen provide you with important information See the following for details 1 Hea
109. passenger air bag status light will be illuminated if the seat is unoccupied the light will not be illuminated but the air bag will be off See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section for further details One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system If you have any questions about your air bag system please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN dealer If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability you may also contact NISSAN Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner s Manual When a front air bag inflates a fairly loud noise may be heard followed by the release of smoke This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire Care should be taken to not inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly 1 50 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Front air bags along with the use of seat belts help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries However an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body Even with NISSAN advanced air bags seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and pas senger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel
110. recommended fuel lubricants se a nana ee 9 2 Changing engine oil a oaa 8 11 Changing engine oilfilter 8 12 Checking engine oillevel 8 10 EngineOllie s ess 3 Horgau a Gis kee 8 10 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation 9 5 Engine oil viscosity 0 9 5 Outside mirrors 2 2 ee ee ee 3 31 Overheat If your vehicle overheats 6 10 Owner s manual order form 9 27 Owner s manual service manual order information ssor 45 24 fen ee RR RES a 9 27 P Parking Parking brake operation 5 19 Parking parking on hills 5 23 Personal lights a gacn E onsa p i ea aa 2 50 Phone Bluetooth hands free SYSTEMI 3 08 e i a eet gh Sct Se ad 4 91 4 106 Power Power door locks 3 5 Power outlet 2 si oss ei wied a lw 2 36 Power rear windows 2 45 Power steering fluid 8 14 Power steering system 5 24 Power windows 0 005 2 43 Rear power windows 2 45 Precautions Maintenance precautions 8 5 Precautions on child restraints 1 23 1 29 1 34 1 38 Precautions on seat belt usage 1 14 Precautions on supplemental restraint SYStOM ea 2s ard Gere Eee eae ee ee 1 41 Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 Programmable features 4 6 Push starting soe e664 aw aw ewes 6 10 R Radio Car phone or CBradio 4 91 FM AM radio with compact dis
111. s Manual for information regarding this item Map Update Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual for information regarding this item Navigation Version Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual for information regarding this item GPS Position For GPS Position refer to the separate Naviga tion System Owner s Manual Voice Recognition settings For Voice Recognition settings refer to NISSAN Voice Recognition system in this section Settings 8 00 Navigation Volume amp Beeps Audio Display Phone Clock Bluetooth Others Adjust navigation settings LHA1236 Settings gt Display 8 00 Display Adjustment Color Theme LHA1237 HOW TO USE THE SETTING BUTTON When the SETTING button is pressed the Set tings screen will appear on the display You can select and or adjust several functions features and modes that are available for your vehicle 4 6 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Settings gt Display Adjustment 8 00 Display 3 Brightness Contrast Background Color amp WHA1502 Settings gt Display Adjustment 8 00 Display 3 Brightness Contrast Background Color Chieeeeee e E gt Push to change modes 2 4 WHA1503 Push the 2 switch to
112. shown on the front display while the vehicle is in any drive position to reduce driver distraction Audio is available when a movie is played To view movies on the front display stop the vehicle in a safe location move the shift selector to the P Park position and apply the parking brake AWARNING The driver must not attempt to operate the DVD system or wear the head phones while the vehicle is in motion so that full attention may be given to ve hicle operation e Do not attempt to modify the system to display a movie on the front screen while the vehicle is being driven Doing so may distract the driver and may cause a collision and serious personal injury or death ACAUTION e Only operate the DVD while the vehicle engine is running Operating the DVD for extended periods of time with the engine OFF can discharge the vehicle battery e Do not allow the system to get wet Excessive moisture such as spilled liq uids may cause the system to malfunction While playing VIDEO CD media this DVD player does not guarantee com plete functionality of all VIDEO CD formats Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 63 LHA1415 Playing a DVD Inserting Ejecting the DVD The CD DVD insert slot is located behind the display screen To insert the DVD press the OPEN TILT button on the audio unit The display screen will automatically move down to expose
113. taeraa eye a aaa AS 2 43 Moonroof if so equipped 6 c cence eee eee 2 46 Automatic moonroof 0 0c eee 2 46 interior lightivcc vers de centadvceiatedaeene thle wes 2 49 Console light if so equipped 0 0 2 50 Personal FIQHts isare riasenie rasoun o a ata Se 2 50 Map lights sie onc einsamen epia aA 2 50 MPUNKVGhts cadsty cus that aloaaiae aa ERES 2 51 HomeLink universal transceiver if so equipped 2 51 Programming HomeLink 0 eee ae 2 52 Programming HomeLink for Canadian CUSTOIMIGTS seccare ed kindred i i E 2 53 Operating the HomeLink universal e E E E E 2 53 Programming trouble diagnosis 5 2 53 Clearing the programmed information 2 53 Rolling code programming s ssssrrerr 2 54 Reprogramming a single HomeLink button 2 54 lf your vehicle is stolen 0 000 cee e ee eee 2 54 INSTRUMENT PANEL 11 1 fo a LEO sae esles 22 21 20 19 181417 16 15 14 13 12 omm WIC1598 1 Vents P 4 18 3 Steering wheel switch for audio control 2 Headlight fog light if so equipped turn if so equipped Bluetooth Hands free signal switch P 2 29 Phone System if so equipped P 4 95 P 4 91 P 4 106 4 Meters and gauges P 2 3 2 2 Instruments and controls Ii
114. the OFF position and all doors are closed To turn on the autolight system 1 Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi tion 2 Push the push button ignition switch to the ON position 3 The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off Initially if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and a door is opened and left open the headlights remain ON for 5 minutes If another door is opened during the 5 minutes then the 5 minute timer is reset To turn the autolight system off turn the switch to the OFF DAF or 2 position Instruments and controls 2 31 LIC1068 LIC1087 Be sure you do not put anything on top of the autolight sensor located on the top side of the instrument panel The autolight sen sor controls the autolight if it is covered the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark out and the headlights will illuminate If this occurs while parked with the engine off and the ignition switch placed in the ON position your vehicle s battery could be come discharged 2 32 Instruments and controls Headlight beam select To select the high beam function push the lever forward The high beam lights come on andthe O light illuminates Pull the lever back to select the low beam Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the headlight high beams on and off Battery saver system If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position
115. the VOL ON OFF control knob while the system is off to call up the mode radio or CD that was playing immediately before the system was turned off To turn the system off press the VOL ON OFF control knob Turn the VOL ON OFF control knob to adjust the volume This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen sitive Volume SSV for audio When this feature is active the audio volume changes as the driving speed changes Setting control knob Audio Display and Clock Press the SETTING button to adjust the audio display and clock settings as follows Bass Treble Fade Balance Speed Sensitive Volume SSV if so equipped Brightness Contrast On screen Clock Clock Adjust Bass Once the desired setting is displayed on the screen turn the SCROLL TUNE knob left or right to adjust the chosen setting Press the SETTING button to move to the next setting or wait approxi mately five seconds to exit the setting adjustment mode Setting Audio 8 00 BASS 1 MIN MAX pop pp See 5 o 5 LHA1270 Setting Audio 8 00 SPEED SENSITIVE VOL 3 LHA1271 Audio settings Adjust the bass treble fade and balance by selecting the desired setting with the SETTING button and then adjusting the level with the SCROLL TUNE knob Balance adjusts the sound between the left and right speakers Fade adjusts the sound between the front and r
116. the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions the battery s life is approximately 2 years If the battery is dis charged replace it with a new one When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis charged insert the Intelligent Key into the Intelli gent Key port to start the engine Replace the discharged battery with a new one as soon as possible For more details see Push button ig nition switch in the Starting and driving sec tion Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving radio waves if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves such as sig nals from a TV and personal computer the bat tery life may become shorter For information regarding replacement of a bat tery see Battery replacement in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle For information about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys contact a NISSAN dealer Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 17 ACAUTION Listed below are conditions or occur rences which will damage the Intelligent Key e Do not allow the Intelligent Key which contains electrical components to come into contact with water or salt water This could affect the system function e Do not drop the Intellige
117. the passenger compart ment temperature is extremely high Decrease the temperature before use Only use high quality 4 7 in 12 cm round discs that have the COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO or DVD Video logo on the disc or packaging Do not expose the CD DVD to direct sunlight CDs DVDs that are of poor quality dirty scratched covered with finger CD DVD combination player models recorded CDs It has no capability to i eels with Navigation System record or burn CDs prints or that have pinholes may not work properly e Do not force a disc into the CD DVD e The following CDs DVDs are not guar insert slot This could damage the anteed to play CD DVD player If the CD cannot be played one of the following messages will be displayed e Copy control compact discs CCCD e Recordable compact discs CD R Rewritable compact discs CD RW Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 31 e Recordable compact discs DVD R DVD R DL Rewritable compact discs DVD RW DVD RW DL Do not use the following CDs DVDs as they may cause the CD DVD player to malfunction 3 1 in 8 cm discs e CDs DVDs that are not round e CDs DVDs with a paper label e CDs DVDs that are warped scratched or have abnormal edges e This audio system can only play pre recorded CDs DVDs It has no capa bilities to record or burn CDs DVDs If the CD DVD cannot be played one of the foll
118. the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted Doing so may reduce its effectiveness Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts If the seat belt warning light glows con tinuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened it may indicate a mal function in the system Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer No changes should be made to the seat belt system For example do not modify the seat belt add material or install devices that may change the seat belt routing or tension Doing so may affect the operation of the seat belt system Modifying or tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious per sonal injury 1 16 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system e Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti vated it cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor See your NISSAN dealer Removal and installation of preten sioner system components should be done by a NISSAN dealer All seat belt assemblies including re tractors and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision by a NISSAN dealer NISSAN recom mends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced un less the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to opera
119. the shift selector in the N Neutral position CVT models Move the shift selector to the P Park posi tion Starting and driving 5 19 CRUISE CONTROL RaO WSD0169 Type B 3 Type A firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it will release Type B while pulling up on the parking brake lever slightly push the button and lower completely 4 Before driving be sure the brake warning light goes out 5 20 Starting and driving C O ACCEL RES C4 COAST SET ES LSD0184 CANCEL switch ACCEL RES switch COAST SET switch 4 ON OFF switch PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL If the cruise control system malfunctions it cancels automatically The SET indicator light in the instrument panel then blinks to warn the driver e f the SET indicator light blinks turn the cruise control switch off and have the sys tem checked by a NISSAN dealer oOn gt The SET indicator light may blink when the cruise control switch is turned ON while pushing the ACCEL RES COAST SET or CANCEL switch To properly set the cruise control system use the following proce dures AWARNING Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed On winding or hilly roads e On slippery roads rain snow ice etc In very windy areas Doing
120. the use of oil additives The use of an oil additive is not neces sary when the proper oil type is used and main tenance intervals are followed Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used Oil viscosity The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature Because of this it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper ated before the next oil change Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage Selecting the correct oil filter Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a high quality genuine NISSAN oil filter When re placing use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in Change intervals Change intervals The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters Using engine oil and filters that are not of the specified quality or exceeding recommended oil and filter change intervals could reduce engine life Damage to the engine caused by improper maintenance or use of incor rect oil and filter quality and or viscosity is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war ranty Technical and consumer information 9 5 Your engine was filled with a high quality engine oil when it was built You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change inte
121. the vehicle bumper or axle Be sure to leave enough slack in the chains to permit turning corners Trailer lights ACAUTION When splicing into the vehicle electrical system a commercially available power type module converter must be used to provide power for all trailer lighting This unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all trailer lights while using the vehicle tail light stoplight and turn signal circuits as a signal source The module converter must draw no more that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail lamp circuits Using a module converter that exceeds these power requirements may damage the vehicle s electrical sys tem See a reputable trailer dealer to ob tain the proper equipment and to have it installed Trailer lights should comply with federal and or local regulations For assistance in hooking up trailer lights contact a NISSAN dealer or repu table trailer dealer Trailer brakes If your trailer is equipped with a braking system make sure it conforms to federal and or local regulations and that it is properly installed AWARNING Never connect a trailer brake system di rectly to the vehicle brake system Pre towing tips Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded and or unloaded trailer is hitched Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose up or nose down condition check for improper tongue load overload worn suspension or other possible
122. the vehicle is parked near a parking meter In such cases correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions the battery s life is approximately 2 years If the battery is dis charged replace it with a new one When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis charged insert the Intelligent Key into the Intelli gent Key port to start the engine Replace the discharged battery with a new one as soon as possible For more details see Push button ig nition switch in the Starting and driving sec tion Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving radio waves if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves such as sig nals from a TV and personal computer the bat tery life may become shorter For information regarding replacement of a bat tery see Battery replacement in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle For information about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys contact a NISSAN dealer ACAUTION Listed below are conditions or occur rences which will damage the Intelligent Key Do not allow the Intelligent Key which contains electrical components to come into contact with water or salt water This could affect the system function
123. to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in P Park or N Neutral position with the parking brake fully applied Seat lifter if so equipped for driver s seat Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust the seat height until the desired position is achieved Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 3 FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT if so equipped for driver s seat Operating tips AWARNING Before driving the vehicle return the seat back to an upright seating position after manually releasing it Also make sure the seat is locked in place Failure to do so may cause the seat to move in a collision or sudden stop This may result in damage to the seat or personal injury Coupe ACAUTION Do not operate the power recline switch when the seatback has been manually released using the upper seatback re lease lever 1 Doing so can damage the seat Do noi pull on the upper seatback re lease lever or the trim to return the seatback to a normal seating position Doing so may damage the seat 1 4 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0841 The power seat motor has an auto reset overload protection circuit If the motor stops during operation wait 30 seconds then reactivate the switch Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off This will discharge the batte
124. to discontinue its online services at any time GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER CHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NONINFRINGEMENT GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RE SULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 83 CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAM AGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES Copyright Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technol ogy and related content delivery For more infor mation visit www gracenote com CD and music related data from Gracenote Inc copyright 2000 2007 Gracenote Gracenote Software copyright 2000 2007 Gracenote This product and service may practice one or more of the following U S Patents 5 987 525 6 061 680 6 154 773 6 161 132 6 230 192 6 230 207 6 240 459 6 330 593 and other patents issued or pend ing Some services supplied under license from Open Globe Inc for U S Patent 6 304 523 Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote The Gracenote logo and logotype and the Powered by Gracenote logo are trade marks of Gracenote BLUETOOTH STREAMING AUDIO if so equipped If you have
125. to do so may cause transmission damage e For manual transmission M T models never try to start the vehicle by towing it When the engine starts the forward surge could cause the vehicle to collide with the tow vehicle IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS If your vehicle is overheating indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading or if you feel a lack of engine power detect abnormal noise etc take the following steps AWARNING Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire e To avoid the danger of being scalded never remove the radiator cap while the engine is still hot When the radiator cap is removed pressurized hot water will spurt out possibly causing serious injury e Do not open the hood if steam is com ing out 1 Move the vehicle safely off the road apply the parking brake and move the shift selector to N Neutral manual transmission or to P Park CVT Do not stop the engine 2 Turn off the air conditioner Open all the windows move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed 3 Get out of the vehicle Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood If steam or cool ant is escaping turn off the engine Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen 4 Open the engine hood AWARNING If steam or wat
126. to show the Music Box Menu Bluetooth Audio Tilt up down for less than 1 5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number 4 90 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems AUX e Press the ENTER button to show the AUX Menu ANTENNA Window antenna The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear window ACAUTION e Do not place metalized film near the rear window glass or attach any metal parts to it This may cause poor recep tion or noise When cleaning the inside of the rear window be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window antenna Lightly wipe along the antenna with a dampened soft cloth CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO When installing a CB ham radio or car phone in your NISSAN be sure to observe the following precautions otherwise the new equipment may adversely affect the engine control system and other electronic parts AWARNING Acellular telephone should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation Some juris dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele phones while driving If you must make a call while your ve hicle is in motion the hands free cellu lar phone operational mode if so equipped is highly recommended Ex ercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone pull off the road t
127. to the desired level You can also use the TUNE FF REW button to adjust Fade and Balance mode Fade adjusts the sound level be tween the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speaker To turn the Beep sound off or on press the AUDIO button until Beep is displayed Press the TUNE FF REW button 4 or Y until the desired mode is displayed This turns on or turns off the beep sound when audio buttons are pressed Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level press the AUDIO button repeatedly until the radio or CD display reappears Other wise the radio or CD display will automatically reappear after about 10 seconds DISP display button Pressing the DISP display button will show text about CD information in the audio display If the text information is to long to fully be dis played on the screen press and hold the DISP button for longer than 1 5 seconds to scroll through the rest of the text CD display mode To change the text displayed while playing a CD with text press the DISP button The DISP button will allow you to scroll through CD text as follows Track number and Track time Album title Song title Track number displays the track number se lected on the disc Track time displays the amount of time the track has played e Album title displays the title of the CD being played e Song title displays the title of the selected CD t
128. v TUNE FF REW tuning button Press the TUNE FF REW button 4 or Y for manual tuning To move quickly through the channels hold the tuning buttons down A VW SEEK tuning button Press the SEEK TRACK button 4 or to tune from high to low or low to high frequen cies and stop at the next broadcasting station SCAN tuning button Press the SCAN button SCAN illuminates in the display window Scan tuning begins from low to high frequencies Scan tuning stops for 5 sec onds at each broadcasting station that has suffi cient signal strength When scanning SCAN blinks in the display Pressing the SCAN button again during this 5 second period stops scan tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station Station memory operations 18 stations can be set for the FM and AM radio to the A B and C preset button in any combination of AM or FM stations 1 Press the PRESET A B C button to change between storage banks The radio displays the icon A B or C to indicate which set of presets are active 2 Tune to the desired station using manual TUNE or SEEK tuning Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons 1 6 until a beep sound is heard The radio mutes when the select button is pressed 3 The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume Programming is now complete 4 Other buttons can be set in the same man ner If the battery cable is disconnecte
129. vehicle during a tire change 6 6 In case of emergency ore de ge WCE0160 Jack up point sedan e Use the correct jack up points Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary e Never use blocks on or under the jack e Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack It may cause the vehicle to move This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials e Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack Never run the engine with a wheel s off the ground It may cause the vehicle to move by hand Raise the vehicle LCE0020 WCE0056 Always refer to the proper illustrations for the correct placement and jack up points for your specific vehicle model and jack type Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instruc tions 1 Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground 2 Place the jack directly under the jack up point as illustrated so the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack up point Align the jack head between the two notches in the front or the rear as shown Also fit the groove of the jack head between the notches as shown The jack should be used on firm and level ground 3 To lift t
130. voice recognition systems Information gt User Guide 8 00 Getting Started Let s Practice Using the Address Book Finding a Street Address Placing Calls Help on Speaking LHA1343 Information gt User Guide 8 00 Using the Address Book Finding a Street Address Placing Calls Help on Speaking Voice Recognition Settings Adapting the System to Your Voice LHA1344 Displaying user guide You can confirm how to use voice commands by accessing a simplified User Guide which con tains basic instructions and tutorials for several voice commands 1 Press the INFO button on the instrument panel 2 Select the Voice Recognition key 3 Select the User Guide key 4 Select an item Available items e Getting Started Describes the basics of how to operate the Voice Recognition system Let s Practice Initiates a practice session that demon strates how to improve recognition by the system e Using the Address Book Tutorial for using the Address Book Finding a Street Address Tutorial for Finding a Street Address Placing Calls Tutorial for making a phone call by voice command operation Help on Speaking Displays useful tips for how to correctly speak commands in order for them to be properly recognized by the system Voice Recognition Settings Describes the available Voice Recognition settings
131. warning The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings When a disc brake pad requires replacement it makes a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is depressed Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard Key reminder chime A chime sounds if the driver s door is opened while the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or OFF position or placed in the OFF or LOCK position with the Intelligent Key left in the Intelli gent Key port Make sure the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK position and take the Intel ligent Key with you when leaving the vehicle Light reminder chime With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi tion a chime sounds when the driver s door is opened if the headlights or parking lights are on Turn the headlight control switch off before leav ing the vehicle NISSAN Intelligent Key door buzzer The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if the Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle when locking the doors When the buzzer sounds be sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key See NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Pre driving checks and adjustments section VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY WIC1102 LIC1103 The vehicle information display is located on the bottom of the speedometer It displays such items as Intelligent Key operation information some indica
132. 10 Rear power window switch sedan only The rear power window switches open or close only the corresponding windows To open the window push the switch and hold it down To close the window pull the switch up Locking passengers windows When the window lock button is depressed only the driver s side window can be opened or closed Push it again to cancel the window lock function Automatic operation To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation press the window switch down only driver s side shown to the second detent and release it it need not be held The window auto matically opens all the way To stop the window lift the switch up while the window is opening To fully close a window equipped with automatic operation pull the switch up to the second detent and release it it need not be held To stop the window press the switch down while the window is closing Auto reverse function If the control unit detects something caught in the window as it is closing the window will be imme diately lowered The auto reverse function can be activated when the window is closed by automatic operation when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position Depending on the environment or driving conditions the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window
133. 18 1 Speedometer 2 Change button 3 Odometer twin trip odometer SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Speedometer The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in miles per hour MPH and kilometers per hour km h 2 4 Instruments and controls Odometer Twin trip odometer The odometer twin trip odometer is displayed when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position The odometer records the total distance the ve hicle has been driven The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips Bos E o 3395 3 WIC1261 Changing the display Pushing the change button changes the display as follows Trip A gt Trip B gt Trip A Resetting the trip odometer Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec ond resets the currently displayed trip odometer to zero RPMx1000 LIC1058 H7 Z lt I n lt i LIC1386 TACHOMETER The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo lutions per minute rpm Do not rev engine into the red zone Q A CAUTION When engine speed approaches the red zone shift to a higher gear or reduce en gine speed Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera ture The engine coolant temperature is within the normal range when the gauge needle points within the zone shown in the illus
134. 3 19 The interior light illuminates for 15 seconds when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position The light can be turned off without waiting for 15 seconds by performing one of the following op erations e Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi tion Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key Switching the room light switch to the OFF position 3 20 Pre driving checks and adjustments WPD0364 WPD0361 Releasing the trunk lid Press the button for longer than 0 5 sec onds to open the trunk lid The trunk release button will not operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position or when the trunk cancel switch is in the OFF position See Cancel switch in this section Using the panic alarm If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pressing and holding the 21 button on the Intelligent Key for longer than 0 5 seconds The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25 seconds The panic alarm stops when e lt has run for 25 seconds or Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key WPD0362 Silencing the horn beep feature If desired the horn beep feature can be deacti vated using the Intelligent Key To deactivate Press and hold the and a buttons for at least 2 seconds The hazard warning lights will f
135. 5 70D16 9 8 Technical and consumer information WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY When planning to drive your NISSAN ve hicle in another country you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi cle s engine Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline There fore avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country state province or district it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis sion control and safety standards vary according to the country state province or district there fore vehicle specifications may differ When any vehicle is to be taken into an other country state province or district and registered its modifications transpor tation and registration are the responsibil ity of the user NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION LTI0025 WT10037 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VIN PLATE The vehicle identification number VIN plate is attached as shown This number is the identifica tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER chassis number The v
136. 9 10 Emission control information label 9 11 Engine serialnumber 9 10 F M V S S certification label 2 2 9 10 Tire and Loading Information label 9 11 Vehicle identification number VIN plate 9 9 Warning labels for SRS 1 56 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren SYStCM hee ee aom ai eda ed a 1 25 License plate Installing the license plate 9 12 Light Air bag warning light 2 2 1 57 2 14 Brake light See stop light 8 30 Bulb check instrument panel 2 10 Bulb replacement 8 30 Charge warning light 2 11 Console light es s ei e wa ae 2 50 Fog lightswitch saas 24 sant ia ee 4 2 34 Headlight and turn signal switch 2 29 Headlight control switch 2 31 Headlights gcnere idea ead Ace e 8 28 Intetiorlight lt 2 2 2 220 ak te ae ae 2 49 Lightbulbs e038 Se ae ea ew 8 28 Low tire pressure warning light 2 12 Low windshield washer fluid warning light s 4 2 es be eh gaa Sea we aoe 2 24 Passenger air bag and status light 1 51 Personal lights 2 50 Security indicator light 2 16 Spotlights See map light 2 50 TURK IGHE se poe dnd bt oh ey ocd 2 51 Warning indicator lights and audible reminders 2 ce ee 2 10 Lights Mapilights seo seai da 3 Gut data i 2 50 10 4 Lock Child safety rear doorlock 3 6 DOOr lOCKS s 22a Soe aces oe
137. A1319 ENDING A CALL To finish the call perform one of the following procedures Select the Hang up key on the Call in Progress display e Push the f wheel switch on the steering PHONE SETTINGS To set up the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System to your preferred settings press the SET TING button on the instrument panel and select the Phone key on the display Edit Vehicle Phonebook See Vehicle Phonebook in this section for add ing editing and deleting contacts in the vehicle phonebook Delete Phonebook Delete a phonebook stored on the system Download Handset Phonebook See Handset Phonebook in this section for adding editing and deleting contacts in the handset phonebook Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 115 Settings gt Volume amp Ringto Bg Tui 8 00 aac J osecesceneg O Jorcoccccceeg DO Outgoing Call lt CITS Automatic Hold Ringtone Incoming Call Vehicle Ringtone l i 175 LHA1325 Settings gt Bluetooth Sod Yu 8 00 Gozack Bluetooth Connect Bluetooth Connected Devices Edit Bluetooth Info Replace Connected Phone LHA1316 Volume amp Ringtone Adjust the volume level of the ringtone incoming call sound and outgoing call sound When the
138. After adjustment gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls Unattended children could become involved in seri ous accidents 1 2 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system e The seatback should not be reclined any more than needed for comfort Seat belts are most effective when the pas senger sits well back and straight up in the seat If the seatback is reclined the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased ACAUTION When adjusting the seat positions be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and or damage FRONT MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT if so equipped WRS0738 WRS0739 WRS0740 Forward and backward Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position Release the bar to lock the seat in position Reclining To recline the seatback pull the lever up and lean back To bring the seatback forward pull the lever up and lean your body forward Release the lever to lock the seatback in position The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit See Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section Also the seatback can be reclined
139. After the tone sounds and the icon on the Edit the user name using the keypad displayed on Navigation the screen screen changes from 2 to Gy speak Information the command that the system requested Reset Result e Audio 9 When the system has recognized the voice Resets the user s voice that the Voice Recogni e Help command the voice of the user is learned tion system has learned The voice commands in the category are Press the switch or select the Back key Continuous Learning displayed to return to the previous screen When this item is turned to ON you can have the 6 Select a voice command to train If the system has learned the command correctly system learn the voice commands in succession the voice command indicator on the screen turns Without selecting commands one by one The Voice Recognition system starts on Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 139 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty If problems are en countered follow the solutions given in this guide for the appropriate error Where the solutions are listed by number try each solution in turn starting with number one until the problem is resolved Displays COMMAND NOT RECOG Ensure that the command format is valid see Standard Mode command list or Alternate Command Mode command list in this NIZED or the system fails to interpret section
140. Com mand Mode User Guide The user guide provides basic instructions for using Voice Recognition and accessing some voice commands NOTE The user guide can also be accessed from within the INFO menu after pressing the INFO button Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 137 Speaker Adaptation Starts a system training procedure to learn the specific sounds of your voice See Speaker ad aptation function in this section Alternate Command Mode For advanced operation an Alternate Command Mode is provided This setting enables control of the Audio and Climate Control systems in addi tion to additional commands for the Phone and Navigation systems With this setting active the system does not announce or display the avail able commands at each step When this mode is activated the Voice Recognition Settings will change to show more options Minimize Voice Feedback Reduces the amount of the information spoken for each voice instruction Settings gt Voice Recognition 8 00 Command List User Guide Speaker Adaptation Alternate Command Mode Minimize Voice Feedback Change the mode of Voice Recognition LHA1341 8 00 e Settings gt Speaker Adaptation User 1 None User 2 None User 3 None S 1 3 Learning result can be stored deleted edited L
141. Delay Select to change the duration of the automatic headlight off timer After select ing the item touch the or key to change the setting The available delays are 0 30 45 60 90 120 150 and 180 seconds Speed Sensing Wiper Interval Select to turn on or turn off the wiper interval adjusted automati cally according to the vehicle speed Selective Door Unlock When this item is turned on only the driver s door is unlocked first after the door unlock operation When the door handle request switch on the driver s or front passenger s side door is pushed to be unlocked only the corresponding door is unlocked first All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within one minute When this item is turned to off all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once Intelligent Key Lock Unlock Select to turn on or turn off the door lock unlock function by pushing the door handle request switch Return All Settings to Default Select to change all the comfort and convenience systems to their default settings Settings gt Language amp Units 8 00 Select Language English Select Units US LHA1250 Settings gt Select Language 8 00 English Frangais Espanol LHA1251 Language amp Units Select the Language amp Units
142. ENT It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter e A scraper and stiff bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades e A sturdy flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield washer fluid reservoir DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE AWARNING e Wet ice 32 F 0 C and freezing rain very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on The vehicle will have much less traction or grip under these conditions Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded Whatever the condition drive with cau tion Accelerate and slow down with care If accelerating or downshifting too fast the drive wheels will lose even more traction Allow more stopping distance under these conditions Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement Allow greater following distances on slippery roads Watch for slippery spots glare ice These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas If a patch of ice is seen ahead brake before reach ing it Try not to brake while on the ice and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers Do not use the cruise control on slip pery roads Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle ENGINE BLOCK HEATER
143. Enter Dutton ses Gets oe Be ee 4 2 Setting button s cs eee pe eae na 4 6 Controls Heater and air conditioner CORIOLIS je eae dere a ae 4 19 4 26 Coolant Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants 2 2 2 0 2 000 9 2 Changing engine coolant 8 9 10 2 Checking engine coolant level 8 9 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 5 Corrosion protection 00 7 6 Cruise control es ara i e iee bs wee 5 20 Cupiholders e soi cues o poai n E O E eas 2 40 D Daytime running light system Canada only 2 32 Defroster switch Rear window and outside mirror defroster SWitGhi s s oci oe p na ew RD E 2 29 Digital Versatile Disc DVD player 4 63 Dimensions and weights 9 8 Dimmer switch for instrument panel 2 33 Display controls see control panel buttons 4 2 DOOMIOCKS s s niorse raea a a a E a 3 4 Drive belts sos soc sa araar ontang 8 18 Driving Cold weather driving 5 28 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission CVT aaa aaa aa 5 11 Driving with manual transmission 5 17 Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 E Economy fuel 2 0 00 00 e eee 5 22 Emission control information label 9 11 Emission control system warranty 9 25 Engine Before starting the engine 5 10 Block heater s aomas bear eed wi ete se ed 5 29 Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants 2 2 eee 9 2 Cha
144. Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as out lined in this manual should not cause the passen ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF For small adults it may be turned OFF however if the occupant does not sit in the seat properly for example by not sitting upright by sitting on an edge of the seat or by otherwise being out of position this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effec tive protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag 1 51 NISSAN recommends that pre teens and chil dren be properly restrained in a rear seat NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat If this is not possible the occupant classification sensor is designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger air bag OFF for specified child restraints as required by the regulations Failing to properly secure child restraints and to use the ALR mode child restraint mode may allow the restraint to tip or move in an accident or sudden stop This can also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF See Child re straints earlier in this section for proper use and installation If the front passenger seat is not occupied the passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a crash However heavy obj
145. HA1346 SPEAKER ADAPTATION FUNCTION The Voice Recognition system has a function to learn the user s voice for better voice recognition performance The system can memorize the voices of up to three persons Having the system learn the user s voice 1 Press the SETTING button on the instru ment panel select the Others key on the display 2 Select the Voice Recognition key 3 Select the Speaker Adaptation key 4 138 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 Select the user whose voice is to be memo rized by the system Settings gt Speaker Adaptation 8 00 Settings gt Speaker Adaptation 8 00 Settings gt Speaker Adaptation 8 00 Ko Setting User 1 Edit Name User 1 Start Speaker Adaptation Learning Reset Result Music Box Changes the source of the audio system to the 1S Music Box Continuous Learning ON S 1 2 Alternate Command Mode ON 1 3 Push the ENTER switch to select To exit hold the TALK switch User Name can be edited LHA1347 LHA1348 LHA1349 5 Select a category to be learned by the sys 7 The system requests that you repeat a com Speaker Adaptation function settings tem from the following list mand after a tone This command is also Edit N i it Name Phone displayed on the screen l l on 8
146. ICATOR LIGHTS For additional information on warnings and indi cators see Vehicle information display later in this section Ea Continuously Variable Transmission CVT position indicator light if so equipped When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position this indicator light shows the shift selec tor position See Driving the vehicle in the Starting and driving section of this manual CRUISE Cruise main switch indicator light The light comes on when the cruise control main switch is pushed The light goes out when the main switch is pushed again When the cruise main switch indicator light comes on the cruise control system is operational SET Cruise set switch indicator light The light comes on while the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise control system If the light blinks while the engine is running it may indicate the cruise control system is not functioning prop erly Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer OFF re The front passenger air bag status light will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be OFF depending on how the front passenger seat is being used Front passenger air bag status light For front passenger air bag status light operation see Front passenger air bag and status light in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual High beam in
147. If you decide not to change the language do not press either button After 5 seconds the VR session will end and the language will not be changed Connecting procedure NOTE The connecting procedure must be per formed when the vehicle is stationary If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure the procedure will be cancelled Main Menu Connect phone Add phone Initiate from handset Name phone 1 Press the button on the steering wheel The system announces the available commands 2 Say Connect phone The system ac knowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands 3 Say Add phone The system acknowl edges the command and asks you to initiate connecting from the phone handset The connecting procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone model See the cellular phone Own er s Manual for details You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for instruc tions on connecting NISSAN recommended cellular phones When prompted for a Passkey code enter 1234 from the handset The Passkey code 1234 has been assigned by NISSAN and cannot be changed 4 The system asks you to say a name for the phone If the name is too long or too short the system tells you then prompts you for a name again Also if more than one phone is connected and the name sounds too much like a name already used th
148. In dustry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interfer ence and 2 This device must accept any interfer ence include interference that may cause undesired operation of the de vice AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER AWARNING Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident Be alert and drive defensively at all times Obey all traffic regulations Avoid excessive speed high speed cornering or sudden steering ma neuvers because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle As with any vehicle loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects or cause the vehicle to roll over particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways Be attentive at all times and avoid driving when tired Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs including pre scription or over the counter drugs which may cause drowsiness Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual and also instruct your passengers to do so Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions and rollovers In a rollover crash an unbelted or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly wearing a seat belt Starting and
149. MS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Con tact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS A CAUTION e The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular tire pressure check Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less than 16 MPH 25 km h the TPMS may not operate correctly Be sure to install the specified size of tires to the 4 wheels correctly Master warning light This light comes on when various vehicle infor mation display warnings appear Instruments and controls 2 13 amp Seat belt warning light and or R chime The light and chime remind you to fasten your seat belts The light illuminates whenever the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position and remains illuminated until the driver s seat belt is fastened At the same time the chime sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver s seat belt is securely fastened The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if the front passenger s seat belt is not fastened when the front passenger s seat is occupied For 7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the system does not activate the warning light for the fro
150. NING To avoid potential pedal interference that may result in a collision or injury e NEVER place a floor mat on top of an other floor mat in the driver front position e Use only genuine NISSAN floor mats specifically designed for use in your ve hicle model See your NISSAN dealer for more information Properly position the mats in the floor well using the floor mat positioning aid See Floor mat positioning aid in this section The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior Mats should be main tained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn NSZ LPD0477 Floor mat positioning aid This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket to act as a floor mat positioning aid Genuine NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed for your vehicle model The driver s and passen ger s side floor mats have a grommet hole incor porated in them Position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in the floorwell Periodically check to make certain the mats are properly positioned Appearance and care 7 5 SEAT BELTS The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them See Seat belt maintenance in the Safety Seats seat
151. NING e Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle Pets should also not be left alone They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle Also on hot sunny days temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals e Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously in jured Keep the car locked with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use and prevent children s access to car keys EXHAUST GAS carbon monoxide AWARNING Do not breathe exhaust gases they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide Carbon monoxide is danger ous It can cause unconsciousness or death 5 2 Starting and driving If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle drive with all win dows fully open and have the vehicle inspected immediately e Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage e Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time Keep the trunk lid closed while driving otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compart ment If you must drive with the trunk lid open follow these precautions 1 Open all the windows 2 Set the
152. Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck use the shoulder belt without the booster seat 1 22 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system AWARNING Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo area The child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision CHILD RESTRAINTS ARS1098 WRS0256 PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS AWARNING e Failure to follow the warnings and in structions for proper use and installa tion of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision The child restraint must be used and installed properly Always follow all of the child restraint manufacturer s instructions for installation and use Infants and children should never be held on anyone s lap Even the stron gest adult cannot resist the forces of a collision Do not put a seat belt around both a child and another passenger NISSAN recommends that all child restraints be installed in the rear seat Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat If you must install a forward facing child restraint in the front seat see Forward facing child restraint in stallation using the seat belts later in this section Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag
153. Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components such as buckles tongues retractors flexible wires and anchors work properly If loose parts deterioration cuts or other damage on the webbing is found the entire seat belt as sembly should be replaced CHILD SAFETY Children need adults to help protect them They need to be properly restrained In addition to the general information in this manual child safety information is available from many other sources including doctors teachers government traffic safety offices and community organizations Every child is different so be sure to learn the best way to transport your child There are three basic types of child restraint systems Rear facing child restraint Forward facing child restraint Booster seat The proper restraint depends on the child s size Generally infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 Ibs 9 kg should be placed in rear facing child restraints Forward facing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a forward facing child restraint Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system AWARNING Infants and children need special protec tion The vehicle s seat belts may not fit them properly The shoulder belt may come too close t
154. RATION Pull the lever all the way toward you and adjust the steering wheel forward or backward in direction to the desired position Lock the wheel by releasing the lever and ensure that the lever has returned to its original position A WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort The driv er s air bag inflates with great force If you are unrestrained leaning forward sitting sideways or out of position in any way you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up against it when it inflates Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel Always use the seat belts SUN VISORS WPD0435 Coupe shown sedan similar To block glare from the front swing down the main sun visor To block glare from the side remove the sun visor from the center mount and swing the sun visor to the side Slide the extension sun visor if so equipped in or out as needed A CAUTION Do not store the sun visor before returning the extension to its original position MIRRORS LPD0400 Coupe shown sedan similar VANITY MIRRORS if so equipped To access the vanity mirror pull the sun visor down and flip open the mirror cover Some vanity mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the mirro
155. SAN does not recommend the use of tire dressings Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub ber If a tire dressing is applied to the tires it may react with the coating and form a compound This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint If you choose to use a tire dressing take the following precautions e Use a water based tire dressing The coat ing on the tire dissolves more easily than with an oil based tire dressing 7 4 Appearance and care Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread grooves where it would be difficult to remove Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel Make sure the tire dressing is com pletely removed from the tire tread grooves Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom mended by the tire dressing manufacturer CLEANING INTERIOR Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean soft cloth damp ened in mild soap solution then wipe clean with a dry soft cloth Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the leather Before using any fabric protector read the manu facturer s recommendations Some fabric pro tectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material Use a cloth dampened on
156. SB and Up date Gracenote from HDD options can be used to update the titles of songs in the Music Library Visit www nissanusa com gracenote for detailed instructions on how to update the Gracenote database Music Box gt Play Mode 8 00 Music Box gt Edit Music Information 8 00 Normal Edit Information of Current Song 1 Album Repeat Edit Information by Album 1 Track Repeat Update Gracenote from USB Device 1 Album Random Transfer Missing Titles to USB All Random Update Gracenote from HDD L J 1 5 LHA1288 LHA1289 e Play Mode e Edit Music Information Alters the play mode of the playlist Touch Edits the information of the songs in the the key of the mode you wish to apply The Music Library modes change the play pattern as follows Edit Information of Current Song Normal no play pattern is applied Edit Information by Album 1 Album Repeat the songs in the current album are repeated Update Gracenote from USB Device 1 Track Repeat the current track is re Transfer Missing Titles to USB peated Update Gracenote from HDD 1 Album Random the songs in the cur rent album are played randomly All Random all songs are played ran domly Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 81 Music Box gt Music Box Settings 8 00 Music Box Used Free
157. Security sys tems later in this section R Slip indicator light This indicator will blink when the VDC system or the traction control system is operating thus alerting that the vehicle is nearing its traction limits The road surface may be slippery 2 16 Instruments and controls Turn signal hazard indicator lights The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal switch is activated Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned on 8 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC OFF indicator light This indicator light comes on when the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF This indicates the Vehicle Dynamic Control has been turned off Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch again or restart the engine and the system will be reactivated See Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system in the Starting and driving sec tion of this manual The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes on when you push the push button ignition switch to the ON position The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational If the light stays on or comes on along with the R indi cator light while you are driving have the Vehicle Dynamic Control system checked by a NISSAN dealer While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is operating you might feel slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or accelerating but this is normal AUDIBLE REMINDERS Brake pad wear
158. See Cancel switch in this section Using the panic alarm If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pressing and holding the 21 button on the Intelligent Key for longer than 0 5 seconds The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25 seconds The panic alarm stops when lt has run for 25 seconds or Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key Pushing the request switch on the driver or passenger door with the Intelligent Key in range of the door handle WPD0362 Silencing the horn beep feature If desired the horn beep feature can be deacti vated using the Intelligent Key To deactivate Press and hold the and a buttons for at least 2 seconds The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to confirm that the horn beep feature has been deactivated To activate Press and hold the and a buttons for at least 2 seconds once more The hazard warning lights will flash once and the horn will sound once to confirm that the horn beep feature has been reactivated Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si lence the horn if the alarm is triggered WARNING SIGNALS To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in the instru
159. T 1 TRACK RPT OFF 1 TRACK RPT the current track will be repeated 1 FOLDER RPT the current folder will be re peated OFF No repeat play pattern is applied The indi cator on the display will turn off The current play pattern of the USB device is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is applied TUNE SCROLL knob If there are multiple folders with audio files on the USB device turn the TUNE SCROLL knob to change folders Turn the knob to the left to skip back a folder Turn the knob to the right to skip ahead a folder If there is only one folder of audio files on the USB device turning the TUNE SCROLL knob in either direction will re turn to the first track on the USB device 4 68 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems ec WHA1530 USB INTERFACE models with Navigation System Connecting a device to the USB input jack The USB input jack is located in the center con sole Open the protective cover on the USB jack then insert the USB device into the jack When a compatible storage device is plugged into the jack compatible audio and video files on the storage device can be played through the vehicle s audio system and center display screen This USB device contains multisession contents Please select item to play Play Movie Contents Play Audio Contents
160. Transceiver e Will operate most Radio Frequency RF devices such as garage doors gates home and office lighting entry door locks and se curity systems Is powered by your vehicle s battery No separate batteries are required If the vehi cle s battery is discharged or is discon nected HomeLink will retain all program ming Once the HomeLink Universal Transceiver is programmed retain the original trans mitter for future programming procedures Example new vehicle purchases Upon sale of the vehicle the programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes For additional information refer to Program ming HomeLink later in this section AWARNING Do not use the HomeLink Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and re verse features as required by federal safety standards These standards be came effective for opener models manufactured after April 1 1982 A ga rage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse does not meet current federal safety standards Using a garage door opener without these features in creases the risk of serious injury or death During the programming procedure your garage door or security gate will open and close if the transmitter is within range Make sure that people or objects are clear of the garage door gate
161. USTOMERS Prior to 1992 D O C regulations required hand held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec onds To program your hand held transmitter to HomeLink continue to press and hold the HomeLink button see steps 2 4 under Pro gramming HomeLink while you press and re press cycle your hand held transmitters every 2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly indicating successful programming NOTE When programming a garage door opener etc it is advised to unplug the device dur ing the cycling process to prevent pos sible damage to the garage door opener components OPERATING THE HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER The HomeLink Universal Transceiver once pro grammed may now be used to activate the ga rage door etc To operate simply press the ap propriate programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver button The red indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted PROGRAMMING TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS If the HomeLink does not quickly learn the hand held transmitter information replace the hand held transmitter batteries with new batteries position the hand held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the HomeLink surface press and hold both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons without inter ruption position the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 26 76 mm away from the HomeLink surface Hold the t
162. VEHICLE FROM CORROSION Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation Check the underbody for accumulation of sand dirt or salt If present wash with water as soon as possible ACAUTION e NEVER remove dirt sand or other de bris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic compo nents inside the vehicle as this may damage them Chemicals used for road surface de icing are extremely corrosive They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system fuel and brake lines brake cables floor pan and fenders In winter the underbody must be cleaned periodically For additional protection against rust and corro sion which may be required in some areas con sult a NISSAN dealer Appearance and care 7 7 8 Maintenance and do it yourself Maintenance requirements 0 c cee eee eee 8 2 General maintenance 00 e eee eee ee 8 2 Explanation of general maintenance items 8 2 Maintenance precautions 0 e cece 8 5 Engine compartment check locations 8 6 Engine cooling system 000 e seen eee 8 8 Checking
163. WDI0721 VQ35DE engine Power steering fluid pump pulley Idler pulley Generator Air conditioner Idler pulley Crankshaft pulley Drive belt Automatic tensioner a Ee SDI1895 REPLACING SPARK PLUGS Platinum tipped spark plugs It is not necessary to replace platinum tipped spark plugs as frequently as conventional type spark plugs because they last much longer Fol low the maintenance log shown in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide Do not service platinum tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re gapping e Always replace spark plugs with rec ommended or equivalent ones Maintenance and do it yourself 8 19 AWARNING Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely A CAUTION Be sure to use the correct socket to re move the spark plugs An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs 8 20 Maintenance and do it yourself AIR CLEANER LDI0563 QR25DE NOTE The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and reused Replace the air cleaner filter according to the maintenance log shown in the Warranty Informa tion and Maintenance Booklet To remove the air cleaner filter Unlatch the clips and move the air cleaner cover upward Remove the air cleaner filter LD10562 VQ35DE Wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter hous ing and the cover with a damp cloth NOTE After installing a new ai
164. a ture is extremely high or low Decrease increase the temperature before use e Do not expose the CD to direct sun light e CDs that are in poor condition or are dirty scratched or covered with finger prints may not work properly The following CDs may not work prop erly e Copy control compact discs CCCD e Recordable compact discs CD R e Rewritable compact discs CD RW Do not use the following CDs as they may cause the CD player to malfunc tion e 3 1 in 8 cm discs with an adapter e CDs that are not round e CDs with a paper label e CDs that are warped scratched or have abnormal edges This audio system can only play pre CHECK DISC e Confirm that the CD is inserted cor rectly the label side is facing up etc e Confirm that the CD is not bent or warped and it is free of scratches PRESS EJECT This is an error due to excessive tem perature inside the player Remove the CD by pressing the EJECT button After a short time reinsert the CD The CD can be played when the temperature of the player returns to normal UNPLAYABLE The file is unplayable in this audio sys tem only MP3 or WMA if so equipped CD During cold weather or rainy days the player may malfunction due to the hu midity If this occurs remove the CD DVD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely The player may skip while driving on rough roads The CD DVD player sometimes cannot function when
165. a NISSAN dealer The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS mal function For additional information see Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving section and Tire pressure in the Main tenance and do it yourself section AWARNING If the light does not illuminate with the ignition switch placed in the ON posi tion have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible If the light illuminates while driving avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking reduce vehicle speed pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible Driving with under inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and in crease the likelihood of tire failure Se rious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could re sult in serious personal injury Check the tire pressure for all four tires Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver s door opening to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure a tire may be flat If you have a flat tire re place it with a spare tire as soon as possible When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be in dicated the TP
166. a 3 4 Fuel filler door lock opener lever 3 25 Glove box lock ica ieee aw sa 2 41 Power door locks 2 005 3 5 Trunk lid lock opener lever 3 23 Loose fuel cap warning 2 25 3 25 Low fuel warning light 2 13 2 24 Low tire pressure warning light 2 12 Low windshield washer fluid warning light Luggage See vehicle loading information 9 13 M Maintenance General maintenance 8 2 Inside the vehicle 8 3 Maintenance precautions 8 5 Outside the vehicle 8 2 Seat belt maintenance 1 20 Under the hood and vehicle 8 4 Malfunction indicator light 2 15 Manual front seat adjustment 1 2 Ma plight s ica ce Se a pie tee Pe aes 2 50 Map pocket s s os arios eee eee a 2 37 Meters and gauges 0 0 2 3 Instrument brightness control 2 33 Mirror Automatic anti glare inside mirror 3 30 Inside M T ccs see oraa d i aos a 3 29 Outside mirrors 2 eee 3 31 VanityMintor 3 ace ee a eae 3 29 MOOnroot si iis eee a i 3a e ag al ae ale 2 46 Music Box hard disk drive audio system 4 77 N NISSAN Intelligent Key 0 0 3 17 NISSAN vehicle immobilizer SYSIEM cic ce a p EA RR we da 2 27 3 3 5 9 NISSAN voice recognition system 4 117 o Octane rating See fuel octane rating 9 4 Odometet seen a eke wees eis a 2 4 Oil Capacities and
167. a gov hazardouswaste perchlorate BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by e Bluetooth SIG Inc Bluetooth U S A and licensed to Visteon and Clarion XM Radio requires subscription sold separately Not available in Alaska Hawaii or Guam For om more information visit www xmradio com 2010 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA INC All rights reserved No part of this Owner s Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of Nissan North America Inc NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM NISSAN CARES Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs However if there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions please contact the NISSAN Con sumer Affairs Department using our toll free number For U S customers 1 800 NISSAN 1 1 800 647 7261 For Canadian customers 1 800 387 0122 The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information Your name address and telephone number Vehicle identification number attached to the top of the
168. abase is not fully guaran teed The service of the Gracenote Database on the Internet may be stopped without prior notice for maintenance e gracenote _ End User License Agreement USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEP TANCE OF THE TERMS BELOW Gracenote MusicID Terms of Use This device contains software from Gracenote Inc of Emeryville California Gracenote The software from Gracenote the Gracenote Soft ware enables this application to do online disc identification and obtain music related informa tion including name artist track and title infor mation Gracenote Data from online servers Gracenote Servers and to perform other func tions You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End User functions of this device You agree that you will use Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non commercial use only You agree not to assign copy transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMIT TED HEREIN You agree that your non exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you vio late these restrictions If your license terminates you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data the Gracenote S
169. able in this section can be played Bit rate Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital video files The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file 4 42 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Requirements for Supporting Video Playback Media CD CD R CD RW DVD DVD R DVD RW DVD RW DL USB 2 0 Memory CD CD R CD RW DVD ISO9660 LEVEL1 ISO9660 LEVEL2 Romeo Joliet UDF Bridge UDF1 02 ISO9660 UDF1 5 UDF2 0 DVD R DVD RW DVD RW__ ISO9660 Level 3 packet writing is not supported File Systems DL Files saved using the Live File System component on a Windows Vista based computer are not supported VDF1 5 VDF2 0 packet writing is not supported USB Memory FAT16 FAT32 divx avi Video Codecs DivX3 DivX4 DivX5 DivX6 Audio Codecs MP3 MPEG2 5 Audio Layer3 AC3 LPCM File Types 7 as 7 Video Codec ISO MPEG4 Audio Codec G 726 i oi a 4 Mbps Bit Rat Bermes O ca 8 Mbps oa 32x32 720x480 Resolution aa 32x92 720x876 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 43 2 CAT CH 1 a 3 SEEK TUNE TRACK FF REW v b AUDO I 5 15 ABC 1 6 DISP cD RADIO RDM scan AUXIN crock H6 a ol 14 43 12 11 10 9 8 7 LHA0728 SEEK TRACK button CLOCK button
170. able of contents 0 3 Sedan 1 Power windows P 2 43 2 Windshield P 8 21 3 Windshield wiper and washer switch P 2 28 4 Engine hood P 3 23 KP a 5 Tie down P 6 14 6 Fog light switch if so equipped 4 P 2 34 DN 7 Headlight and turn signal switch ZA P 2 29 A 8 Replacing bulbs P 8 28 9 Tire pressure P 8 38 10 Flat tire P 6 2 N 11 Tire chains P 8 46 f 12 Mirrors P 3 29 NN A 13 Door locks NISSAN Intelligent Key eS LZ J l a LZ keys P 3 4 3 6 3 2 See the page number indicated in paren 13 12 theses for operating details iy LII0094 0 4 Illustrated table of contents EXTERIOR REAR CH NG LAG Coupe 1 Rear window and outside mirror if so equipped defroster switch P 2 29 Interior trunk lid release P 3 24 Trunk lid P 3 23 Vehicle loading P 9 13 Opener operation P 3 23 Replacing bulbs P 8 28 Fuel filler cap fuel recommendation P 3 25 P 9 3 Fuel filler door P 3 25 NOaRWN WII0125 Illustrated table of contents 0 5 LII0095 0 6 Illustrated table of contents Sedan 1 NOaR ON Rear window and outside mirror if so equipped defroster switch P 2 29 Interior trunk lid release P 3 24 Trunk lid P 3 23 Vehicle loading P 9 13 Opener operation P 3 23 Replacing bulbs P 8 28 Fuel filler cap fuel recommend
171. activate the display LHA1242 Display settings Select the Display key On the screen above select the Display Adjustment key The Display Adjustment screen will appear Brightness contrast Select the Brightness key or the Contrast key to adjust the brightness or contrast of the display background Touch the or key to adjust the brightness to darker or brighter and the contrast to lower or higher The new settings are automatically saved when you exit the setting screen by selecting the Back key or any other mode button Display off Select the Display ON key The indicator of the Display ON turns off and the message above will be displayed briefly When the audio HVAC Heater and air conditioner or any mode button on the control panel is operated the display turns on for that operation If one of the control panel buttons is pressed the display will not automati cally turn off until that operation is finished Oth erwise the screen turns off automatically after 5 seconds Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 7 To turn the screen on e Press the SETTING button and select the Display key and then select the Display ON key or e Press the 2 button and the message resuming display will appear and the Dis play ON key will be automatically turned on no amber indicator Background color
172. ades Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly Inside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis such as when per forming periodic maintenance cleaning the ve hicle etc Additional information on the following items with an is found later in this sec tion Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not bind or require uneven effort Keep the floor mat away from the pedal Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera tion If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur ther than normal the pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop see a NISSAN dealer immediately Keep the floor mat away from the pedal Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied Continuously Variable Transmission CVT P Park position mechanism On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the shift selector in the P Park position without applying any brakes Parking brake Check the parking brake opera tion regularly The vehicle should be securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied If the parking brake needs adjustment see a NISSAN dealer Seats Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters seatback recliner etc to ensure they operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every position Check that the head restraints move
173. afety and Child Restraint sections before in stalling a child restraint Follow these steps to install a rear facing child restraint using the LATCH system 1 Ifthe rear seat cushion has a flap pull the flap down to allow access to the anchors 2 Position the child restraint on the seat Al ways follow the child restraint manufactur er s instructions Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0801 Rear facing web mounted step 3 1 27 WRS0802 Rear facing rigid mounted step 3 3 Secure the child restraint anchor attach ments to the LATCH lower anchors Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop erly attached to the lower anchors LRS0673 Rear facing step 4 4 For child restraints that are equipped with webbing mounted attachments remove any additional slack from the anchor attach ments Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments 1 28 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0674 Rear facing step 5 5 After attaching the child restraint test it be fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path The child re straint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from
174. ailure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS mal function indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approxi mately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the mal function exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alter nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly Starting and driving 5 3 Additional information The TPMS does not monitor the ti
175. ain within 5 sec onds to unlock all doors All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pressing the Opening any doors tl button Pushing the ignition switch Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 13 The interior light illuminates for 15 seconds when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position The light can be turned off without waiting for 15 seconds by performing one of the following op erations e Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi tion Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key Switching the room light switch to the OFF position Opening windows if so equipped The Intelligent Key allows you to open windows equipped with automatic operation simultane ously To open the windows press the A but ton on the Intelligent Key longer than 3 seconds after all doors are unlocked The door windows will open while pressing the button on the Intelligent Key The door windows cannot be closed by using the Intelligent Key 3 14 Pre driving checks and adjustments WPD0364 WPD0361 Releasing the trunk lid Press the button for longer than 0 5 sec onds to open the trunk lid The trunk release button will not operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position or when the trunk cancel switch is in the OFF position
176. aint near the seat belt path The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm from side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the seat belt as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles 9 Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the seat belt is not locked repeat steps 2 through 8 ce To WRS0475 Forward facing step 10 10 If the child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat place the ignition switch in the ON position The front passenger air bag status light should illuminate If this light is not illuminated see Front passenger air bag and status light in this section Move the child restraint to another seating position Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted the ALR mode child re straint mode is canceled Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 37 LRSO798 INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP First secure the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchors rear outboard seat positions only or the seat belt as applicable 1 Flip up the anchor cover Q from the anchor point which is located directly b
177. al injury Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the vehicle s warranty MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle When the vehicle is loaded drive to ascale and weigh the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads Individual axle loads should not ex ceed either of the gross axle weight rat ings GAWR The total of the axle loads should not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label If weight ratings are exceeded move or re move items to bring all weights below the ratings Technical and consumer information 9 15 TOWING A TRAILER AWARNING Overloading or improper loading of a trailer and its cargo can adversely affect vehicle handling braking and perfor mance and may lead to accidents ACAUTION Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load for the first 500 miles 800 km Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged e For the first 500 miles 800 km that you tow a trailer do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri marily to carry passengers and cargo Remember that towing a trailer places additional loads on your vehicle s engine drive train steering brak ing and other
178. all When you hear the ring tone press the amp button on the steering wheel Once the call has ended press the button on the steering wheel NOTE If you do not wish to take the call when you hear the ring tone press the button on the steering wheel For additional command options see List of voice commands later in this section Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 97 LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS Main Menu Call Phonebook Recent Calls Connect Phone When you press and release the amp buttonon the steering wheel you can choose from the commands on the Main Menu The following pages describe these commands and the com mands in each sub menu Remember to wait for the tone before speaking After the main menu you can say Help to hear the list of commands currently available any time the system is waiting for a response If you want to end an action without completing it you can say Cancel or Quit at any time the system is waiting for a response The system will end the VR session Whenever the VR session is cancelled a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system If you want to go back to the previous command you can say Go back or Correction any time the system is waiting for a response Call Main Menu Call Speak name Phone Number Speak Digits Specia
179. also displayed in this list screen and enables you to switch to the movie playback mode Play Mode Choose the preferred play mode using the touchscreen 4 70 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems LHA1379 Movie file operation Park the vehicle in a safe location for the front seat occupants to operate the USB memory while watching the images DISC AUX button When the DISC AUX button is pushed with the system off and the USB memory inserted the system will turn on If another audio source is playing and the USB memory is inserted press the DISC AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the USB memory mode jq Previous Chapter Rewind Operation keys USB gt Settings To operate the USB memory select the desired key displayed on the display screen Select the Ma key to skip the chapter s odo Fle Pey Beck Pase of the disc backward The chapters will go l back the number of times the key is selected Play Mode Normal Press and hold the key to rewind the chap 10Key Search Selectthe Il key to pause the movie file ter Display To resume playing the movie file use List DRC ist the gt key f o Audio Select the List key on the movie file operation gt Play screen to display the file list Select the gt key to start playing the movie file or r
180. and Booster Seats sections before installing a child restraint Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the rear seat or in the front passenger seat re WRS0699 1 If you must install a booster seat in the front seat move the seat to the rear most position 2 Position the booster seat on the seat Only place it in a front facing direction Always follow the booster seat manufacturer s in structions 1 40 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0454 Front passenger position 3 The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable If necessary adjust or remove the head re straint to obtain the correct booster seat fit If the head restraint is removed store it in a secure place Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the booster seat is removed See Head restraints in this sec tion for head restraint adjustment removal and installation information If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit try another seating position or a different booster seat Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child s hips Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer s in structions for adjusting the seat belt routing Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack Be sure the
181. and push the ignition switch to the OFF position DRIVING THE VEHICLE CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION CVT if so equipped Starting and driving 5 11 WSD0247 5 12 Starting and driving AWARNING e Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P Park or N Neu tral to R Reverse D Drive Ds Drive Sport or M Manual shift mode Al ways depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident e Cold engine idle speed is high so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up e Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads This may cause a loss of control e Never shift to P Park or R Reverse while the vehicle is moving This could cause an accident ACAUTION When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade do not hold the vehicle by depress ing the accelerator pedal The foot brake should be used for this purpose The CVT in your vehicle is electronically con trolled to produce maximum power and smooth operation The CVT can operate in two different automatic drive modes D Drive mode Move the shift selector to D Drive the transmission is in the normal forward automatic driving mode The posi tion indicator in the meter shows a D The D Drive mode does not produce a gear change sensation like a traditional automatic transmissio
182. andling the bulb Never touch the glass envelope Touching the glass could significantly affect bulb life and or headlight performance e High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped e Use the same number and wattage as shown in the chart Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog This is not a malfunction If large drops of water collect inside the lens contact a NISSAN dealer FRONT PARK TURN SIDEMARKER LIGHT Bulb replacement requires the removal of the headlight assembly If replacement is required see your NISSAN dealer Maintenance and do it yourself 8 29 EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS ltem Wattage W Bulb No Headlight assembly Low Halogen H11 Low Xenon High Park Park Turn 3457NAK Sidemarker Sedan WY5W Coupe W5W Front fog light if so equipped H11 Step light i 194 Rear combination light Tail Stop 3157K Turn 3156 Backup reversing Sedan 921LF Coupe 912 License plate light W5W High mounted stop light Inside coupe Inside sedan Spoiler if so equipped Front map light Rear personal light Trunk light Vanity mirror light Glove box light Console light 1 Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts infor
183. announcement Repeat the command in a clear voice o Press the amp switch on the steering wheel to return to the previous screen f you want to cancel the command press and hold the switch The message Voice cancelled will be announced If you want to adjust the volume of the sys tem feedback push the volume control switch on the steering wheel or use the audio system volume knob while the system is making an announcement How to speak numbers Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers when giving voice commands Refer to the following examples General rule Only single digits O zero to 9 can be used 4 122 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems When saying the phone number 800 662 6200 the system will accept eight hundred in addition to eight zero zero or eight oh oh 500 700 and 900 are also supported Examples 1 800 662 6200 One eight zero zero six six two six two zero zero One eight hundred six six two six two zero zero Improving Recognition of Phone numbers You can improve the recognition of phone numbers by saying the phone number in three groups of numbers For example when you try to call 800 662 6200 say eight zero zero first and the sys tem will then ask you for the next three digits Then say six six two After recognition the system will then ask for the last four digits Sa
184. antenna are installed and an XM satellite radio service subscription is active Satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam If a compact disc is playing when the AUX button is pressed the compact disc will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on SCROLL TUNE knob Tuning Turn the SCROLL TUNE knob to the left or right for manual tuning lt lt Press the SEEK CATEGORY button M4 or PI to tune from low to high or high to low frequencies and to stop at the next broadcasting station gt Pl SEEK tuning SCAN tuning Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad casting station for 5 seconds SCAN will appear on the screen while the radio is scan tuning Pressing the button again during this 5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station If the SCAN button is not pressed within 5 seconds SCAN tuning moves to the next station 1 to 6 Station memory operations Twelve stations can be set for the FM band 6 for FM1 6 for FM2 and six stations can be set for the AM band 1 Choose the radio band AM FM1 or FM2 using the AM FM select button 2 Tune to the desired station using manual SEEK or SCAN tuning Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons 1 6 until a beep sound is heard 3 The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume Programming is now complete 4 Other
185. appropriate percentage for that region Aftermarket fuel additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives for example fuel injec tor cleaner octane booster intake valve deposit removers etc which are sold commercially Many of these additives intended for gum varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine Octane rating tips Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended can cause persistent heavy spark knock Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise If se vere this can lead to engine damage If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level 9 4 Technical and consumer information roads have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle for which NISSAN is not responsible Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock after run and or overheating which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine damage If any of the above symptoms are en countered have your vehicle checked at a NISSAN dealer However now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills This is not a cause for concern because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there
186. ard or backward If the moonroof does not close Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the moonroof 2 48 Instruments and controls ON DOOR OFF M O49 gt Type A 7 WIC1550 ll J Type B Je WIC1267 INTERIOR LIGHT The interior light has a three position switch and operates regardless of ignition switch position When the switch is in the ON position the interior light illuminates regardless of door position The light will go off after 15 minutes unless the ignition switch is placed in the ON position When the switch is in the center DOOR position the front and rear personal lights will illuminate when the driver s door is opened Lights remain on for a maximum of 30 seconds after driver s door is closed The lights will go off when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or the driver s door is closed and locked The lights will also go off after 15 minutes when the doors are open When the switch is in the OFF position the interior light does not illuminate regard less of door position NOTE The doorstep lights illuminate when the driver and passenger doors are opened re gardless of the interior light switch posi tion These lights will turn off automatically after 15 minutes while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming dis charged A CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with t
187. ars in the vehicle information display If the fuel filler cap is loose or missing tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle The F light should turn off after a few driving trips If the F light does not turn off after a few driving trips have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer Malfunction Indicator Light blinking An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system To re duce or avoid emission control system dam age do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH 72 km h avoid hard acceleration or deceleration avoid steep uphill grades if possible reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed Instruments and controls 2 15 The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinking and come on steady Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer ACAUTION Continued vehicle operation without hav ing the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability reduced fuel economy and possible damage to the emission con trol system Security indicator light This light blinks when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF LOCK or ACC position The blinking security indicator light indicates that the security systems equipped on the vehicle are operational For additional information see
188. ation P 3 25 P 9 3 Fuel filler door P 3 25 Child safety rear door lock P 3 6 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT aoRON gt 7 8 9 10 11 WII0126 Interior trunk access P 1 8 Moonroof if so equipped P 2 46 Sun visors P 3 28 Interior lights illuminated entry P 2 49 HomeLink universal transceiver if so equipped P 2 51 Automatic anti glare rearview mirror if so equipped P 3 29 Glove box P 2 41 Front cup holders P 2 40 Front console P 2 41 Front seat P 1 2 Rear seat P 1 8 See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details Illustrated table of contents 0 7 INSTRUMENT PANEL 11 1 fo a LEO sae esles 22 21 20 19 181417 16 15 14 13 12 omm WIC1598 1 Vents P 4 18 3 Steering wheel switch for audio control 2 Headlight fog light if so equipped turn if so equipped Bluetooth Hands free signal switch P 2 29 Phone System if so equipped P 4 95 P 4 91 P 4 106 4 Meters and gauges P 2 3 0 8 Illustrated table of contents Ii 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Driver supplemental air bag horn P 1 41 P 2 35 Cruise control main set switch P 5 20 Windshield wiper and washer switch P 2 28 Ignition switch P 5 7 Hazard warning flasher s
189. ation about the digital music file such as song title artist album title encoding bit rate track time duration etc ID3 tag information is displayed on the Album Artist Track title line on the display Windows Windows Media and Windows Vista are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States of America and or other countries Playback order ROOT Music playback order of a CD DVD or USB device with compressed audio files is as illus trated The folder names of folders not containing compressed audio files are not shown in the display If there is a file in the top level of the disc USB Root Folder is displayed The playback order is the order in which the j files were written by the writing software so the files might not play in the desired order J FOLDER IO COMPRESSED AUDIO FILES WHA1374 Playback order chart Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 39 Specification chart Supported media CD CD R CD RW DVD ROM DVD R DVD RW DVDR DL USB 2 0 CD CD R CD RW DVD ROM DVD R DVD RW DVD R DL ISO9660 LEVEL1 ISO9660 LEVEL2 Romeo Joliet ISO9660 Level 3 packet writing is not supported Files saved using the Live File System component on a Windows Vista operating system based computer are not Supported file systems supported UDF Bridge UDF 1 02 ISO9660 UDF 1 5 UDF 2 0 VDF 1 5 VDF 2 0 pa
190. ature control dial to the de sired position Dehumidified defogging This mode is used to defog the windows and dehumidify the air 1 Press the GY 2 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion air flow control button 3 Press the A C comes on button The indicator light When the SY or 7 are selected the air conditioner automatically turns on the indicator light will illuminate if the outside temperature is more than 36 F 2 C This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield The amp gt mode automatically turns off allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance 4 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position Operating tips Keep the windows and moonroof closed while the air conditioner is in operation After parking in the sun drive for 2 or 3 minutes with the windows open to vent hot air from the passenger compartment Then close the windows This allows the air con ditioner to cool the interior more quickly e The air conditioning system should be operated for approximately 10 minutes at least once a month This helps pre vent damage to the system due to lack of lubrication e A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly This does not indicate a malfunction 4 22 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition syst
191. aves may affect air craft navigation and communication sys tems Do not operate the Intelligent Key while on an airplane Make sure the but tons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored for a flight The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locks using the remote controller function The operat ing environment and or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key operation Be sure to read the following before using the Intelligent Key A CAUTION Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when operating the vehicle e Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle when you leave the vehicle The Intelligent Key is always communicating with the vehicle as it receives radio waves The Intel ligent Key transmits weak radio waves Environ mental conditions may interfere with the opera tion of the Intelligent Key under the following operating conditions When operating near a location where strong radio waves are transmitted such as a TV tower power station and broadcasting station When in possession of wireless equipment such as a cellular telephone transceiver and CB radio When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or covered by metallic materials When any type of radio wave remote control is used nearby When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal com puter When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter In such cases correct
192. ay a between words Press and release the w switch locate command from the displayed list or say Help on the steering wheel to show all commands 3 After the tone sounds and the icon on the screen changes from to Ly speak a command 4 Once a command is recognized the system will announce the recognized command and perform the requested action If the command is not recognized the sys tem repeats the announcement Repeat the command in a clear voice after the tone 4 136 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Operating tips Say a command after the tone Voice com mands cannot be accepted when the icon IS If the command is not recognized the sys tem repeats the announcement Repeat the command in a clear voice Press the amp switch on the steering wheel to return to the previous screen If you want to cancel the command press and hold the switch The message Voice cancelled will be announced If you want to adjust the volume of the sys tem feedback push the volume control switch on the steering wheel or use the audio system volume knob while the system is making an announcement To minimize the amount of prompts spoken by the system in Alternate Command Mode use the Minimize Voice Feedback function To access the Minimize Voice Feedback function press the SETTING button then select the Others key Then select the Voice Recognit
193. been lifted by a tow truck ACAUTION When towing make sure that the trans mission axles steering system and powertrain are in working condition If any of these conditions apply dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be used e Always attach safety chains before towing In case of emergency 6 11 For information about towing your vehicle behind a recreational vehicle RV refer to Flat towing in the Technical and consumer information sec tion of this manual 6 12 Incase of emergency WCE0194 CVT M T TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving front wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated A CAUTION e Observe the following restricted towing speeds and distances for manual trans e Never tow Continuously Variable Trans missions M T only mission CVT models with the front wheels on the ground or four wheels on Speed Below 50 MPH 80 km h the ground forward or backward as Distance Less than 50 miles 80 km this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission If it is nec essary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised always use towing dollies under the front wheels e When towing Continuously Variable Transmission CVT models with the front wheels on towing dollies or when towing manual transmission M T models with the front wheels
194. belts and supplemen tal restraint system section of this manual AWARNING Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor NEVER use bleach dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing 7 6 Appearance and care CORROSION PROTECTION MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION The accumulation of moisture retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections cavities and other areas Damage to paint and other protective coat ings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION Moisture Accumulation of sand dirt and water on the ve hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion Relative humidity Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used Temperature High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro sion to those parts which are not well ventilated Air pollution Industrial pollution the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas or heavy road salt use acceler ates the corrosion process Road salt also accel erates the disintegration of paint surfaces TO PROTECT YOUR
195. c CD player coua idea wapa ee 4 44 FM AM SAT radio with CD DVD player 4 54 FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD player ee 4 48 Readiness for inspection maintenance M test 0 256 ee ee ee 9 26 Rear parcel shelf Refitting covers 00004 8 37 Removing covers 0 004 8 37 Rear power windows 2 45 Real SGat e ee bee ey Sal ee ae eb 1 8 RearView Monitor 000 4 13 Rear window and outside mirror defroster SWICK k 3 4 oud aa tak 2 AEE oe 2 29 Recorders Event data s ies chee ee el 9 26 Refrigerant recommendation 9 6 Registering your vehicle in another country 9 9 Reporting safety defects US only 9 25 S Safety Child safety rear doorlock 3 6 Child seat belts 1 23 1 29 1 34 1 38 Reporting safety defects US only 9 25 Seat adjustment Front manual seat adjustment 1 2 Front power seat adjustment 1 4 Rear seat adjustment 1 8 Seatback pockets 000 2 37 Seat belt ChildiSatety anno 28 eee sare atte a 1 21 Infants and small children 1 22 Injured Person 2 2 0 2 2 a ee 1 17 Larger childrens lt e s aod a aa 1 22 Precautions on seat belt usage 1 14 Pregnant WOMEN a s sa aasa aap a 1717 Seat belt extenders 1 20 Seat belt maintenance 1 20 Seat belts a cs cana ada ea sans 1 14 Shoulder belt height adjustment 1 19 Three point type with retract
196. c Otherwise the seat may become overheated Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object This may result in damage to the heater Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth When cleaning the seat never use gasoline benzine thinner or any simi lar materials If any abnormalities are found or the heated seat does not operate turn the switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running Instruments and controls 2 35 VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL VDC OFF SWITCH POWER OUTLET m OFF e LIC1548 The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system on for most driv ing conditions If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle turn the VDC system off To turn off the VDC system push the VDC OFF switch The 8 indicator will come on Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn on the system See Vehicle Dy namic Control VDC system in the Starting and driving section 2 36 Instruments and controls LIC1070 Instrument panel The p
197. cause overrich fuel flow into the three way catalyst causing it to overheat Do not keep driv ing if the engine misfires or if notice able loss of performance or other un usual operating conditions are detected Have the vehicle inspected promptly by a NISSAN dealer Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire damaging the three way catalyst e Do not race the engine while warming it up Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and in flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check all 4 tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a signifi cantly under inflated tire causes the tire to over heat and can lead to tire f
198. causes of either condition e Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving Keep the cargo load as low as possible in the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity low Load the trailer so approximately 60 of the trailer load is in the front half and 40 is in the back half Also make sure the load is balanced side to side Check your hitch trailer tire pressure ve hicle tire pressure trailer light operation and trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a trailer to the vehicle Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to all federal state or local regulations If not install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle Determine the overall height of the vehicle and trailer so the required clearance is known Trailer towing tips In order to gain skill and an understanding of the vehicle s behavior you should practice turning stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic Steering stability and braking perfor mance will be somewhat different than under normal driving conditions e Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or lock to prevent the coupler from inadver tently becoming unlatched e Avoid abrupt starts acceleration or stops Avoid sharp turns or lane changes e Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed When backing up hold the bot
199. ce commands The manual control mode does not allow dialing a phone number by digits The user may select an entry from the Phonebook or Re cent Calls lists To re activate voice recognition exit the manual control mode by pressing and holding the PHONE END 4 _ button At that time pressing the PHONE SEND AF button will start the Hands Free Phone System Operating tips To enter manual control mode start the voice recognition system and tilt the tuning switch up or down The system will speak Showing Manual Options when manual controls are initially activated To browse the menu options tilt the tuning switch up or down The system will always speak the current menu option De pending on the audio display it will also show the current menu option To select the current menu option press the PHONE SEND button To go back to the previous menu press the PHONE END button If the current menu is the Main Menu pressing the PHONE END button will exit the Phone system To exit the manual control mode press and hold the PHONE END button for 5 seconds 4 104 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty If problems are en countered try the following solutions Where the solutions are listed by number try each solution in turn starting w
200. ceiver 2 51 Hood release 2 ee ee 3 23 HOM sonara eg Ra RR ee Ree RS 2 35 l Ignition Switch Push Button Ignition Switch a 5 7 Immobilizer system 2 27 3 3 5 9 Important vehicle information label 9 10 In cabin microfilter 2 0 0000 8 21 Increasing fuel economy 5 22 Indicator lights and audible reminders See warning indicator lights and audible reminders 0 0 eee ee ee ee 9 10 Inside automatic anti glare mirror 3 30 Inside Mino 2 2520 Gat wae Poe ee 3 29 Instrument brightness control 2 33 Instrument panel 2 2 2 0 00 0 8 2 2 Instrument panel dimmer switch 2 33 Intelligent Key system Key operating range 3 8 3 18 Key operation 00004 3 9 Mechanical key 0 0 3 3 Remote keyless entry operation 3 12 3 18 Troubleshooting guide 3 16 3 22 Warning signals 3 16 3 22 Interiorlight ses 2624 ee6ee ee ee ee 2 49 Interior trunk lid release 2 02 00 3 24 iPode Players doe 2G aed bs date 4 72 4 74 ISOFIX child restraints 1 25 J Jump starting 2 2 4 23 see eae ee eee 6 8 K Keyfob battery replacement 8 27 Keyless entry With Intelligent Key system See Intelligent Key system 3 12 3 18 Keys For Intelligent Key system 3 2 L Labels Air conditioner specification label 9 12 C M V S S certification label
201. cement and or system resetting Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors ACAUTION Do not place metalized film or any metal parts antenna etc on the windows This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors and the TPMS will not function properly Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu minate Some examples are Facilities or electric devices using similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle If a computer or similar equipment or a DC AC converter is being used in or near the vehicle FCC Notice For USA This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the fol lowing two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful in terference and 2 This device must accept any interfer ence received including interference that may cause undesired operation Note Changes or modification not ex pressly approved by the party respon sible for compliance could void the us ers authority to operate the equipment For Canada This device complies with RSS 210 of
202. cket writing is not supported USB memory FAT16 FAT32 MPEGT MPEG2 MPEG2 MP3 Sampling frequency 8 kHz 48 kHz Kops lt 820 Kops VERA suononea MAP WMA7 WMA WMAS upporte Sampling frequency 32 kHz 48 kHz versions 1 32 Kops 182 Kops VERA AAC Sampling frequency 8 kHz 96 kHz Bit rate 16 kbps 320 kbps VBR 4 Version ATRAC3 ATRACS Plus ID3 tag VER1 0 VER1 1 VER2 2 VER2 3 VER 2 4 MP3 only WMA tag WMA only Folder levels Folder levels 8 Folders 255 including root folder Files 512 Max 255 files for one folder Text character number limitation 128 characters Digplayable character codes 3 01 ASCII 02 ISO 8859 1 03 UNICODE UTF 16 BOM Big Endian 04 UNICODE UTF 16 Non BOM Big Endian play 05 UNICODE UTF 8 06 UNICODE Non UTF 16 BOM Little Endian 07 SHIFT JIS 1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played 2 Protected WMA files DRM cannot be played 3 Available codes depend on what kind of media versions and information are going to be displayed Tag information Song title and artist name 4 When VBR files are played the playback time may not be displayed correctly 4 40 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Troubleshooting guide Symptom Cause and Countermeasure Check if the CD DVD USB device was inserted correctly Check if the CD DVD is scratched or dirty Check if there is condensation ins
203. commended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action dam age to the fenders or underbody If possible avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains In addition drive at a reduced speed Otherwise your vehicle may be damaged and or vehicle handling and performance may be ad versely affected Tire chains must be installed only on the front wheels and not on the rear wheels Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire Do not use tire chains on dry roads Driving with tire chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress WDI0258 CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES Tire rotation NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every 7 500 miles 12 000 km See Flat tire in the In case of emer gency section of this manual for tire re placing procedures As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench Wheel nut tightening torque 83 ft lb 113 N m The wheel nuts must be kept tight ened to specifications at all times It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval AWARNING e After rotating the tires check and adjust the tire pressure e Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles 1 000
204. compatible device connected to the aux iliary input jacks press the DISC AUX button repeatedly until the AUX mode appears in the display The output from the device will be played through the display when the vehicle is in the P Park position and the parking brake engaged and audio system 4 62 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems F AUX WHA1393 AUX settings Select the Settings key The display mode can be set to Normal Wide or Cinema The volume setting can be set to Low Medium or High Additional features For more information about the iPod player available with this system see iPod player op eration with Navigation System in this section For more information about the USB interface available with this system see USB interface models with Navigation System in this section AUX gt Menu 8 00 Display Mode Volume Setting Display LHA1394 For more information about the Music Box fea ture available with this system see Music Box in this section For more information about the Bluetooth streaming audio feature available with this sys tem see Bluetooth streaming audio in this section DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC DVD PLAYER OPERATION models with Navigation System Precautions Start the engine when using the DVD entertain ment system Movies will not be
205. completed and the sys tem is ready The SA mode will stop if The button is pressed for more than 5 seconds in SA mode The vehicle begins moving during SA mode The ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK position Training phrases During the SA mode the system instructs the trainer to say the following phrases The system will prompt you for each phrase phonebook transfer entry dial three oh four two nine delete call back number incoming transfer entry eight pause nine three two pause seven delete all entries call seven two four zero nine phonebook delete entry next entry dial star two one seven oh yes no select missed dial eight five six nine two Bluetooth on outgoing call three one nine oh two nine seven pause pause three oh eight cancel call back number call star two zero nine five delete phone dial eight three zero five one record name four three pause two nine pause zero delete redial number phonebook list names call eight oh five four one correction connect phone dial seven four oh one eight previous entry delete dial nine seven two six six call seven six three oh one go back call five six two eight zero dial six six four three seven Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 103 MANUAL CONTROL While using the voice recognition system it is possible to select menu options by using the steering wheel controls instead of speaking voi
206. condi tioner Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system See Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual ANISSAN dealer is able to service your environ mentally friendly air conditioning system AWARNING The air conditioner system contains re frigerant under high pressure To avoid personal injury any air conditioner ser vice should be done only by an experi enced technician with proper equipment AUDIO SYSTEM if so equipped RADIO With the ignition placed in the ACC or ON posi tion press the PWR power VOL volume knob to turn the radio on If you listen to the radio with the engine not running the ignition should be placed in the ACC position Radio reception is affected by station signal strength distance from radio transmitter build ings bridges mountains and other external influ ences Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences Using a cellular phone in or near the ve hicle may influence radio reception quality Radio reception Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with state of the art electronic circuits to enhance ra dio reception These circuits are designed to extend reception range and to enhance the qual ity of that reception However there are some general characteristics of both FM an
207. condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud it may be difficult to hear the other person s voice dur ing a call Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connection the bat tery power of the cellular phone may dis charge quicker than usual The Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones If the hands free phone system seems to be malfunctioning see Troubleshooting guide in this section You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for trouble shooting help Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers Stor ing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise Refer to the cellular phone Owner s Manual regarding the telephone charges cellular phone antenna and body etc REGULATORY INFORMATION FCC Regulatory information CAUTION To maintain compliance with FCC s RF exposure guidelines use only the supplied antenna Unauthorized antenna modification or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FOC regula tions Operation is subject to the following two con ditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any i
208. cs of how to operate the Voice Recognition system Let s Practice Initiates a practice session that demon strates how to improve voice recognition by the system Using the Address Book Tutorial for using the Address Book Finding a Street Address Tutorial for entering a destination by street address Placing Calls Tutorial for making a phone call by voice command operation Help on Speaking Displays useful tips of speaking for correct command recognition by the system 8 00 Information gt User Guide Using Voice Recognition With voice recognition you can use voice commands to control navigation audio phone and other functions To start the voice recognition system push the TALK switch on the steering wheel Then say a command after the tone switch LHA1329 Getting started Before using the Voice Recognition system for the first time you can confirm how to use com mands by viewing the Getting Started section of the User Guide 1 Select the Getting Started key 2 You can confirm the page by scrolling the screen Tutorials on the operation of the Voice Rec ognition system If you choose Finding a Street Address Using the Address Book or Placing Calls you can view tutorials on how to perform these operations using Voice Recognition Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 119 8 00 Information gt User Guid
209. ct an iPod to the vehicle so that the iPod can be controlled with the audio system controls and display screen use the USB jack located in the center console Open the protec tive cover on the USB jack in the center console Then connect the iPod specific end of the cable to the iPod and the USB end of the cable to the USB jack on the vehicle If your iPod supports charging via a USB connection its bat 4 72 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems tery will be charged while connected to the ve hicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position While connected to the vehicle the iPod can only be operated by the vehicle audio controls To disconnect the iPod from the vehicle remove the USB end of the cable from the USB jack on the vehicle then remove the cable from the iPod iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries Compatibility The following models are compatible iPod 5th Generation version 1 2 3 iPod Classic version 1 1 iPod Touch version 2 1 iPod Nano 1st generation version 1 3 1 iPod Nano 2nd generation version 1 1 3 iPod Nano 3rd generation version 1 0 2 iPod Nano 4th generation version 1 0 4 iPod Nano 5th generation version 1 0 1 Some features of this iPod may not be fully functional Make sure that your iPod firmware is updated to the version indicated above Audio main operation
210. ctivation The vehicle security system will give the following alarm The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently The alarm automatically turns off after ap proximately 50 seconds However the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again The alarm can be shut off by unlocking the driver s door or trunk lid with the key or by pressing the M button on the Intelli gent Key The alarm is activated by opening the door or trunk lid without using the key or Intelligent Key even if the door is unlocked by releasing the door inside lock switch How to stop an activated alarm The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver s door or the trunk lid with the key pressing the button on the Intelligent Key or press ing the request switch if so equipped on the driver s or passenger s door with the Intelligent Key in range of the door handle NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of a registered key Never leave these keys in the vehicle Statement related to Section 15 of FCC Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys tem This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the follow ing two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful in terference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including inter ference t
211. ctor to the D Drive position The transmission returns to the normal driving mode OSOSOS Oae WSD0249 Manual shift mode if so equipped When the shift selector is in the Ds Drive Sport position the transmission is ready for the manual shift mode Shift ranges can be selected manu ally by moving the shift selector up or down To cancel the Ds mode return shift selector to the D Drive position The transmission returns to automatic driving mode When the shift selector is shifted from D Drive to the manual shift gate with the vehicle stopped or while driving the transmission enters the manual shift mode Shift ranges can be se lected manually In the manual shift mode the shift range is displayed on the position indicator in the meter When shifting the shift selector to the manual shift gate the position indicator dis plays 1 first up to 6 sixth depending on vehicle speed Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows 16263646566 M6 6th Use this position for all normal forward driving at highway speeds M5 5th Use this position when driving up long slopes or for engine braking when driving down long slopes M4 4th M3 3rd and M2 2nd Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades M1 1st Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow sand or mud or for maximum engine braking on steep down
212. current track on the iPod will be played When the M4 or PPI side of the seeking button is pressed for more than 1 5 seconds while the iPod is playing the iPod will play while fast forwarding or rewinding When the button is released the iPod will return to the normal play speed 4 76 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems iPod gt Artists 8 00 LHA1399 Scrolling menus While navigating long lists of artists albums or songs in the music menu it is possible to scroll the list by the first letter To activate letter index ing touch and hold the page up down arrows on the touchscreen To exit the scrolling by letter mode perform one of the following Push the ENTER switch on the steering wheel Do not touch the controls for 2 seconds MUSIC BOX if so equipped The Music Box system can store songs from CDs being played The system has a 9 3 gigabyte GB storage capacity The following CDs can be recorded in the Music Box system e CDs without MP3 WMA files e Hybrid Compact Disc Digital Audio Hybrid CD DA specification in Super Audio CDs Compact Disc Digital Audio CD DA speci fication in CD Extras First session of multisession disc Extreme temperature conditions below 4 F 20 C and above 158 F 70 C could affect the performance of the hard disk NOTE If the hard drive needs to be replaced due t
213. d or if the fuse opens the radio memory will be canceled In that case reset the desired stations 4 46 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Compact disc CD player operation Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and carefully insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side up The compact disc is automatically pulled into the slot and starts to play If the radio is already operating it automatically turns off and the compact disc begins to play CD button When the CD button is pressed with a compact disc loaded and the radio playing the radio turns off and the last used compact disc starts to play A TUNE FF REW Fast Forward Rewind button When the TUNE FF REW button 4 or Y is pressed while the compact disc is playing the compact disc plays at an increased speed while fast forwarding or rewinding When the button is released the compact disc returns to normal play speed A When 4 _ is pressed while the compact disc is playing the next track following the present one starts to play from the beginning Press amp several times to skip several tracks Each time the button is pressed the CD ad vances 1 additional track The track number ap pears in the display window When the last track on the compact disc is skipped the first track is played When is pressed the track being played returns to the beginning Press severa
214. d AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle even when the finest equipment is used These char acteristics are completely normal in a given re ception area and do not indicate any malfunction in your NISSAN radio system Reception conditions will constantly change be cause of vehicle movement Buildings terrain signal distance and interference from other ve hicles can work against ideal reception De scribed below are some of the factors that can affect your radio reception Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers Storing the de vice in a different location may reduce or elimi nate the noise FM RADIO RECEPTION Range FM range is normally limited to 25 30 mi 40 48 km with monaural single channel FM having slightly more range than stereo FM Exter nal influences may sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is within 25 mi 40 km The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver FM signals follow a line of sight path exhibiting many of the same char acteristics as light For example they will reflect off objects Fade and drift As your vehicle moves away from a station transmitter the signals will tend to fade and or drift Static and flutter During signal interference from buildings large hills or due to a
215. d damage the battery To maintain maxi mum efficiency the battery should be checked regularly For details see Battery in the Main tenance and do it yourself section of this manual 5 28 Starting and driving DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti freeze drain the cooling system including the engine block Refill before operating the vehicle For details see Changing engine coolant in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual TIRE EQUIPMENT 1 SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide superior performance on dry pave ment However the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions If you operate your ve hicle on snowy or icy roads NISSAN recom mends the use of MUD amp SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four wheels Please consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type size speed rating and availability informa tion 2 For additional traction on icy roads studded tires may be used However some U S states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use Check local state and provincial laws before installing studded tires Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded snow tires 3 Tire chains may be used For details see Tire chains in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPM
216. d for driver s seat The lumbar support feature provides lower back support to the driver Push the switch Type A forward or backward or move the lever Type B up or down to adjust the seat lumbar area 1 6 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0739 Entry to the rear seat from outside of the vehicle if so equipped for Coupe models Pull the seat recliner lever to the uppermost po sition folding the seatback forward releasing the seat track Slide the entire seat forward for access to the rear seat To return the seat to a locked position Push the upper seatback rearward until the seat back and track are locked Operating tips The seatback and track will not lock until the seatback is returned rearward The seatback will return to the first locking notch when using the seat recliner lever WRS0791 Exiting from the rear seat on the passenger s side using the upper seatback release lever if so equipped for Coupe models Pull the upper seatback release lever to the uppermost position folding the seatback forward releasing the seat track Slide the entire seat forward to exit from the rear seat To return the seat to a locked position Push the upper seatback rearward until the seat back and track are locked Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 7 Operating tips 1 Open the access cover on the rea
217. d quality to the desired level press the AUDIO control knob re peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears If the control knob is not pressed for approxi mately 10 seconds the radio or CD display will automatically reappear Settings 8 00 Navigation Volume amp Beeps Audio Display Clock mone Bluetooth Adjust navigation settings Others LHA1236 Settings gt Audio 8 00 Saco DO Bass C KLELLITTITTS Treble C ccccccceeg gt Balance cccccccceg R gt Fade Q LO coccccceeg F gt Speed Sensitive Vol lt e OFF ecoeeg Adjust bass 1 7 LHA1256 Speed Sensitive Volume SSV To change the SSV mode from OFF to 5 press the SETTING button Select the Audio key to display the audio settings screen Select the key or key to change the SSV level While in this screen you can also adjust the other audio settings by selecting the corresponding key Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level select the Back key Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 55 Settings gt Audio 8 00 Balance LO coccccceeg RS Fade R f cccccccces F gt Speed Sensitive Vol teeeeen gt DivX Registration Code Di
218. d result in personal injury In case of emergency 6 3 LCE0137 Sedan Getting the spare tire and tools Open the trunk Lift the trunk floor carpeting and spare tire cover Remove the jack 1 and wheel nut wrench from the tool box 6 4 In case of emergency Coupe WCE0200 WCE0193 WCE0201 Coupe Turn the clamp to remove the spare tire Remove the spare tire LCE0183 Removing the bolt on wheel cover if so equipped ACAUTION Do not use your hands to pry off wheel caps or wheel covers Doing so could re sult in personal injury The wheel covers are held on by the wheel nuts The wheel cover will be removed along with the wheel when the nuts are removed To remove the wheel cover use the jack rod as illustrated Apply cloth between the wheel and jack rod to prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover or wheel surface In case of emergency 6 5 OO ita pn WCE0147 Jack up point coupe Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire AWARNING Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack If it is nec essary to work under the vehicle sup port it with safety stands e Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles The jack is designed for lifting only your
219. dentification 9 9 Vehicle identification number VIN Chassis number 0 00 0008 9 9 Vehicle identification number VIN plate 9 9 Vehicle loading information 9 13 Vehicle recovery 2 0 02 0000005 6 14 Vehicle security system 5 2 26 Vehicle security system NISSAN vehicle immobi lizer system engine start 2 27 3 3 5 9 Ventilators cy se i toari e ede teed 4 18 VISOS ka eR ae ae ee A 3 28 Voice recognition system 4 117 Ww Warning Air bag warning light 2 2 1 57 2 14 Anti lock brake warning light 2 11 Battery charge warning light 2 11 Brake warning light 0 2 11 Engine oil pressure warning light 2 12 Hazard warning flasher switch 2 34 Low fuel warning light 2 13 2 24 Low tire pressure warning light 2 12 Low windshield washer fluid warning IGM co ayaan ayant Gaver he Retna Y 2 24 Passenger air bag and status light 1 51 Seat belt warning light 2 14 Vehicle security system 2 26 Warning indicator lights and audible rominderss yoi ea Ree ee aE 2 10 Warning labels for SRS 1 56 Warning lights so ra soe ganse ne be es 2 10 Washer switch Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 28 Weights See dimensions and weights 9 8 Wheels andtires 2 2 2 2000 4 8 38 Wheel tire size 2 ee ee 9 8 When traveling or registering your vehicl
220. der Shows the path used to get to the current screen for example press the SETTING button gt then select the Comfort key Menu Selections Shows the options to choose within that menu screen for example Auto Interior Illu mination etc Up Down Movement Indicator Shows that the arrows on the touch screen may be used to move up or down on the screen and select more options Screen Count Shows the number of menu selections avail able for the current menu even if they are on multiple pages for example 1 7 Footer Information Line Provides more information if available about the menu selection currently high lighted for example Cabin lighting when unlocking doors 8 00 Information Where am 1 Navigation Version Traffic Info GPS Position Weather Info Voice Recognition Map Update Displays the city nearest cross streets and GPS position LHA1402 HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTON Press the INFO button the display screen shows vehicle and navigation information for your con venience Where am Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual for information regarding this item Traffic Info Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual for information regarding this item Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 5 Weather Info Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er
221. deral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle s seat and seat belt system Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Make sure the child s head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat The seatback must be at or above the center of the child s ears For example if a low back booster seat Q is chosen the vehicle seatback must be at or above the center of the child s ears If the seatback is lower than the center of the child s ears a high back booster seat 2 should be used f the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle place the child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with the child Always follow all recommended pro cedures All U S states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats or the front passenger seat 1 39 Booster seat installation ACAUTION Do not use the lap shoulder belt in the Automatic Locking Retractor mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety Child Restraint
222. dicator light blue This blue light comes on when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when the low beams are selected The high beam indicator light also comes on when the passing signal is activated ENaine Malfunction Indicator Light SOON MIG If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction SERVICE The Malfunction Indicator Light may also come on steady if the fuel filler cap is loose or missing or if the vehicle runs out of fuel Check to make sure the fuel filler cap is installed and closed tightly and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons 11 4 liters of fuel in the fuel tank After a few driving trips the 88F light should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control sys tem inspection maintenance test See Readi ness for inspection maintenance I M test in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual Operation The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on in one of two ways Malfunction Indicator Light on steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected Check the fuel filler cap if the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appe
223. displayed on the screen if necessary Refer to the following information for each item e Now Playing Lists the tracks stored in the Music Box system Touch the name of the track to begin playing that track e Music Library Lists the songs in the Music Library Tracks can be searched by Album Artist or Genre Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 79 Music Box gt Music Library 8 00 Albums Artists Genres All Songs Music Box gt My Playlists 8 00 PlayList1 PlayList2 PlayList3 PlayList4 PlayList5 Music Box gt My Playlists 8 00 Add Current Song Add Songs by Album Add Songs by Artist Edit Song Order Edit Name Delete Songs LHA1285 LHA1286 LHA1287 My Playlists aaa changes the name of the Displays the playlists stored in the system i Touch the Edit key next to a playlist to Delete Songs deletes songs from the perform the following operations for that playlist playlist Add Current Song adds the song cur rently playing to the playlist Add Songs by Album adds songs to the playlist by album Add Songs by Artist adds songs to the playlist by artist Edit Song Order edits the order of the songs in the playlist 4 80 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems The Transfer Missing Titles to U
224. e This test will analyze your speech The system will prompt you to say a phone number After you say the number the system will provide feedback to Improve voice recongnition When you are ready push the TALK switch When you are ready push the Talk switch LHA1327 8 00 Information gt User Guide Digits were not recognized correctly Please check analysis of your speech for possible improvements Soft Good Loud 836 623 Volume of voice Slow Good Fast Speed Start of speaking Fone seeds ke Try Again Done LHA1328 Information gt User Guide 8 00 Tips on Speaking Commands Say commands when there are minimal background sounds Say voice commands clearly Avoid talking slow or with long pauses Say commands after the tone LHA1330 Let s Practice The system is equipped with a tutorial that allows you to practice saying commands and receive feedback on the volume speed and timing of your speech To initiate a practice session access the User Guide and select the Let s Practice key Follow the on screen prompts until the session is com plete After the session is completed a screen will be displayed that shows an analysis of differ ent elements of your speech Select the Try Again to repeat the session if improvement is needed Select the Done key to return to the
225. e in another country 0000 4 9 9 Windows Locking passengers windows 2 45 Power rear windows 2 45 Power windows 2 43 Rear power windows 2 45 Windshield washer fluid 8 15 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 28 Wiper Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 28 Wiper blades 00 0 8 21 10 7 GAS STATION INFORMATION RECOMMENDED FUEL Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI Anti Knock Index num ber Research octane number 91 ACAUTION e Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system and may also affect the warranty coverage e Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used because this will damage the three way catalyst e Do not use E 85 fuel in your vehicle Your vehicle is not designed to run on E 85 fuel Using E 85 fuel can damage the fuel system components and is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim ited warranty For additional information see Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants in the Technical and consumer information section RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL Engine oil with API Certification Mark e Viscosity SAE 5W 30 See Engine oil and oil filter recommendations in the Technical and consumer information sec tion of this manual COLD TIRE PRESSURE See Tire and Loading Information label
226. e RPT button while a track is playing to change the play pattern as follows 1 TRK RPT ALL RPT RPT OFF 1 TRK RPT the current track will be repeated ALL RPT all songs in the current list are re peated RPT OFF no repeat play pattern is applied RDM button Press the RDM button while a track is playing to change the play pattern as follows TRK SHUFFLE ALBUM SHUFFLE SHUFFLE OFF TRK SHUFFLE the tracks in the current list will be played randomly ALBUM SHUFFLE the albums in the current list will be played randomly SHUFFLE OFF no random play pattern is ap plied Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 73 ee WHA1530 iPod PLAYER OPERATION WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM if so equipped Connecting iPod To connect an iPod to the vehicle so that the iPod can be controlled with the audio system controls and display screen use the USB jack located in the center console Open the protec tive cover on the USB jack in the center console Then connect the iPod specific end of the cable to the iPod and the USB end of the cable to the USB jack on the vehicle If your iPod supports charging via a USB connection its bat tery will be charged while connected to the ve hicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position While connected to the vehicle the iPod can only be operated by the
227. e Weight GAW The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR shown on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label The GVW equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle passengers luggage hitch trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment In addition front or rear GAW must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR shown on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label Technical and consumer information 9 17 Towing capacities are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating Additional passengers cargo and or optional equipment such as the trailer hitch will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle s maximum towing capacity and trailer tongue load The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR Front GAWR Rear GAWR Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR and Towing capacity All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured using platform type scales commonly found at truck stops highway weigh stations building supply centers or salvage yards To determine the available payload capacity for tongue load use the following procedure 1 Locate the GVWR on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label 2 Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of the passengers and cargo that are normally in the vehicle when towing a trailer 3 Subtract the actual vehicle weight
228. e front original tires Maintenance and do it yourself 8 49 Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the standard tire Replace the spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear e Do not use the spare tire on other vehicles Do not use more than one spare tire at the same time e Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed ACAUTION e Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO RARY USE ONLY spare tire Tire chains will not fit properly and may cause dam age to the vehicle e Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is smaller than the original tire ground clearance is reduced To avoid damage to the vehicle do not drive over obstacles Also do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it may get caught 8 50 Maintenance and do it yourself 9 Technical and consumer information Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants 9 2 Fuel recommendation 00 eeeeeeee eres 9 3 Engine oil and oil filter recommendations 9 5 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations ecceeee eee eee eee 9 6 SPechications ys airinn a he ESA 9 7 ENGINE ei csos aba dere eira aid cant a mrnieaidice aA 9 7 Wheels and tires i620 sasc 202 uattensebeea near es 9 8 Dimensions and weights ce eee 9 8 When traveling or registering your vehicle in Another COUM o rnEeE EEEE EEr OEE GA
229. e highest setting and the temperature control to the full HOT position When the Oy position is selected the air conditioner automatically turns on the indi cator light onthe A C button will come on if the outside temperature is more than 36 F 2 C This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield The mode au tomatically turns off allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging perfor mance Bi level heating The bi level mode directs warmed air to the side and center vents and to the front and rear floor outlets 1 Press the VS button to the OFF position 2 Press the 74 air flow control button 3 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion 4 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position Heating and defogging This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind shield D 1 Pressthe airflow control button 2 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion 3 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position between the middle and the hot position Whenthe position is selected the air conditioner automatically turns on if the out side temperature is more than 36 F 2 C The indicator light on the A C button will come on This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield The VS mode automatically turns off allowing out side air to be drawn into the passenger compar
230. e installed in the engine com partment and passenger compartment fuse boxes If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse pocket as shown in the illustration This will not affect the performance of the fuse Make sure the fuse is installed in the fuse box securely Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under hood fuse boxes Only use type A fuses in the underhood fuse boxes Maintenance and do it yourself 8 23 LDIO560 ENGINE COMPARTMENT ACAUTION Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire If any electrical equipment does not come on check for an open fuse 1 Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF 2 Open the engine hood 8 24 Maintenance and do it yourself Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the tab and lifting the cover up Remove the fuse with the fuse puller The fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse block in the passenger compartment WDI0452 5 If the fuse is open replace it with a new fuse 6 If a new fuse also opens have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer Fusible links If the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition check the fusible links If any of these fusible links are melted replace w
231. e keyless function of the Intelligent Key The remote keyless function can operate at a distance of 33 ft 10 m away from the vehicle The operating distance de pends upon the conditions around the vehicle The remote keyless entry function will not func tion under the following conditions When the Intelligent Key is not within the operational range When the doors or the trunk are open or not closed securely When the Intelligent Key battery is dis charged A CAUTION When locking the doors using the Intelli gent Key be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle WPD0359 Locking doors 1 Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi tion Close all doors Press the button on the Intelligent Key The hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn beeps once All doors will be locked ACAUTION After locking the doors using the Intelli gent Key be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles a ci WPD0360 Unlocking doors 1 Press the button on the Intelligent Key 2 The hazard warning lights flash once 3 Press the button again within 5 sec onds to unlock all doors All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pressing the Opening any doors tl button Pushing the ignition switch Pre driving checks and adjustments
232. e life expectancy of the factory fill coolant Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for more details If the cooling system frequently requires coolant have it checked by a NISSAN dealer CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant The service procedure can be found in the NISSAN Service Manual Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheat ing AWARNING To avoid the danger of being scalded never change the coolant when the en gine is hot e Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant If skin contact is made wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible e Keep coolant out of the reach of chil dren and pets Engine coolant must be disposed of properly Check your local regulations Maintenance and do it yourself 8 9 ENGINE OIL LDIO555 QR25DE engine CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL 1 Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake 2 Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature 3 Turn off the engine Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan 4 Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean Re insert it all the way 8 10 Maintenance and do it yourself VQ35DE engine
233. e loss in quality The compression re duces certain parts of sound that seem in audible to most people WMA Windows Media Audio WMA is a compressed audio format created by Micro soft as an alternative to MP3 The WMA codec offers greater file compression than the MP8 codec enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the same amount of space when compared to MP3s at the same level of quality AAC M4A Advanced Audio Coding AAC is a lossy audio compression format Audio files that have been encoded with AAC are generally smaller in size and deliver a higher quality of sound than MP3 ATRAC3 ATRAC3 Plus Adaptive Trans form Acoustic Coding ATRAC is a lossy audio compression format developed by Sony Bit rate Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital music file The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file Sampling frequency Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital A D conversion per second Multisession Multisession is one of the methods for writing data to media Writing data once to the media is called a single session and writing more than once is called a multisession 4 38 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems e D3 WMA Tag The ID3 WMA tag is the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that contains inform
234. e may be re quired to be in what is called the ready condi tion for an Inspection Maintenance I M test of the emission control system The vehicle is set to the ready condition when it is driven through certain driving patterns Usually the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected the vehicle may be reset to a not ready condition Before taking the I M test check the vehicle s inspection maintenance test readiness condition Place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine If the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds the I M test condition is not ready If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds the I M test condition is ready Contact a NISSAN dealer to set the ready condition or to prepare the vehicle for testing EVENT DATA RECORDERS EDR This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re corder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situa tions such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understand ing how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such
235. e of the seeking button to tune from high to low frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting station Press the P side of the seeking button to tune from low to high frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting station For XM Press the 44 or PP side of the seeking button to go to the first channel of the previous or next category gt Seeking button 1 to 6 Station memory operations Six stations can be set for the AM band Twelve stations can be set for the FM band 6 for FM1 6 for FM2 Eighteen channels can be set for the XM radio 6 for XM1 6 for XM2 6 for XMS if so equipped 1 Choose the radio band AM FM1 or FM2 using the FM AM select button or choose the satellite band XM1 XM2 or XM3 using the XM button 2 Tune to the desired station the M4 PP seeking button Press and hold any of the desired station memory but tons 1 6 until the preset number is up dated on the display and the sound is briefly muted using 3 The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume Programming is now complete 4 Other buttons can be set in the same man ner If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens the radio memory will be canceled In that case reset the desired stations List AM and FM Select the List key to see a list of the presets in the AM FM1 or FM2 preset banks Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 57
236. e or driving position it is not possible to properly fit the lap shoulder belt and fasten it an extender that is compatible with the installed seat belts is available that can be purchased The extender adds approximately 8 in 200 mm of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position 1 20 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with pur chasing an extender if an extender is required AWARNING e Only NISSAN seat belt extenders made by the same company which made the original equipment seat belts should be used with NISSAN seat belts e Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident e Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints If the child restraint is not secured properly the child could be seriously injured in a collision or a sud den stop SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE e To clean the seat belt webbing apply a mild soap solution or any solution recom mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry e If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors the seat belts may retract slowly Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean dry cloth e
237. e system tells you then prompts you for a name again Making a call by entering a phone number Main Menu Call Phone Number Speak the digits Dial 1 Press the button on the steering wheel A tone will sound 2 Say Call The system acknowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands Say Special Dialing to dial more than 10 digits or any special characters 3 Say Phone Number The system ac knowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands 4 Say the number you wish to call starting with the area code in single digit format If the system has trouble recognizing the correct phone number try entering the number in the following groups 3 digit area code 3 digit prefix and the last 4 digits For ex ample 555 121 3354 can be said as five five five as the 1st group then one two one as the 2nd group and three three five four as the 3rd group For dialing more than 10 digits or any special characters say Special Dialing See How to say num bers in this section for more information 5 When you have finished speaking the phone number the system repeats it back and an nounces the available commands 6 Say Dial The system acknowledges the command and makes the call For additional command options see List of voice commands in this section Receiving a c
238. e system to improve rec ognition accuracy By repeating a number of commands the users can create a voice model of their own voice that is stored in the system The system is capable of storing a different speaker adaptation model for each connected phone Training procedure The procedure for training a voice is as follows 1 Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet outdoor location 2 Sit in the driver s seat with the engine run ning the parking brake on and the transmis sion in P Park 3 Press and hold the l button for more than 5 seconds 4 The system announces Press the PHONE SEND button for the hands free phone system to enter the speaker adaptation mode or press the PHONE END _ button to select a dif ferent language 10 Press the l button For information on selecting a different lan guage see Choosing a language in this section Voice memory A or memory B is selected automatically If both memory locations are already in use the system will prompt you to overwrite one Follow the instructions pro vided by the system When preparation is complete and you are ready to begin press the amp F button The SA mode will be explained Follow the instructions provided by the system When training is finished the system will tell you an adequate number of phrases have been recorded The system will announce that speaker ad aptation has been
239. e than 5 seconds Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 5 4 When activated the hazard indicator will flash twice When deactivated the hazard indicator will flash once 5 The ignition switch must be placed in the OFF and ON position again between each setting change When the automatic door unlock system is deac tivated the doors do not unlock when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position To unlock the door manually use the inside lock knob or the power door lock switch driver s or front passen ger s side 3 6 Pre driving checks and adjustments R LIC0716 CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK Sedan only Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors from being opened accidentally especially when small children are in the vehicle The child safety lock levers are located on the edge of the rear doors When the lever is in the unlock position Q the door can be opened from the outside or the inside When the lever is in the LOCK position the door can be opened only from the out side NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY WITH DOOR AND TRUNK REQUEST SWITCHES AWARNING e Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufac turer for the possible influences before use The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pressed The FAA advises the radio waves may affect aircra
240. each plastic finisher at the location mark small dimple using a 0 39 in 10 mm drill To avoid damaging the threads behind the finisher apply only light pressure to the drill Mount the license plate bracket using two 10 mm slotted Phillip head screws VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION AWARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly TERMS It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle Curb Weight actual weight of your vehicle vehicle weight including standard and optional equipment flu ids emergency tools and spare tire assembly This weight does not in clude passengers and cargo GVW Gross Vehicle Weight curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rat ing maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle pas sengers luggage hitch trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment This information is lo cated on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating maximum weight load limit specified for the front or rear axle This information is
241. eaded gasoline be used because this will damage the three way catalyst Do not use E 85 fuel in your vehicle Your vehicle is not designed to run on E 85 fuel Using E 85 fuel can damage the fuel system components and is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim ited warranty Gasoline specifications NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets the World Wide Fuel Charter WWEC specifi cations where it is available Many of the automo bile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission control system and vehicle performance Ask your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications Reformulated gasoline Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu lated gasolines These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug gests that you use reformulated gasoline when available Gasoline containing oxygenates Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy genates such as ethanol MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel com patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de termined If in doubt ask your service station manager If you use oxygenate blend gasoline please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and or fuel system damage e The fuel sho
242. ear speakers Speed Sensitive Volume if so equipped To change the Speed Sensitive Volume SSV evel from 1 to 5 or to turn the feature off entirely choose the Speed Sensitive Volume SSV set ting with the SETTING button and then adjust the evel with the SCROLL TUNE knob Speed Sen sitive Volume SSV adjusts the volume of the audio system as the vehicle s driving speed changes Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 49 Setting Display 8 00 BRIGHTNESS 2 MIN MAX soo iw 48 LHA1272 Setting clock 8 00 On screen Clock LHA1273 Setting Clock Clock Adjust 11 29 LHA1274 Display settings To adjust the brightness or contrast of the display screen press the SETTING button until the cho sen setting is displayed Use the SCROLL TUNE knob to adjust the display to the desired level On screen Clock The clock is shown in the upper right corner of the screen To turn this feature off or to re enable the clock display after it has been turned off press the SETTING button until the On screen Clock mode is displayed Use the SCROLL TUNE knob to toggle the feature on or off 4 50 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Clock adjust To adjust the time perform the following steps 1 Press the SETTING button repeatedly until the Clock Adjust mode is displayed on the screen 2 The hours will beg
243. ear noise may be heard Transmission damage may occur Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd 3rd 4th and 5th up to 6th gear in sequence according to vehicle speed 5 18 Starting and driving To back up lift up on the shift selector ring and then move it to the R Reverse position after stopping the vehicle completely The shift selector ring returns to its original position when the shift selector is moved to the N Neutral position If it is difficult to move the shift selector into R Reverse or 1 1st shift into N Neutral then release the clutch pedal Depress the clutch pedal again and shift into R Reverse or 1 1st Suggested up shift speeds The following are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear These suggestions relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions the weather and individual driving habits For normal acceleration in low altitude areas less than 4 000 ft 1219 ml For QR25DE GEAR CHANGE MPH km h 1st to 2nd 8 24 2nd to 3rd 17 27 8rd to 4th 25 40 Ath to 5th 36 58 5th to 6th 51 82 For VOQ35DE GEAR CHANGE MPH km h 1st to 2nd 9 14 2nd to 3rd 19 30 3rd to 4th 26 42 4th to 5th 31 50 5th to 6th 37 59 For acceleration in high altitude areas over 4 000 ft 1219 ml For QR25DE Gear change MPH km h 1st to 2nd 8 13 2nd to 3rd 17 27 3rd to 4th 25 40 4th to 5
244. ear window and outside mirror if so equipped defroster SWitCh iss cine cee don tagew reed wae eaaes 2 29 Headlight and turn signal switch 0 008 2 29 Xenon headlights if so equipped 2 29 Headlight control switch sees eae 2 31 Daytime running light system Canada only 2 32 Instrument brightness control 005 2 33 Turn sigmal SWitCh ya 2 200 cans case wise ateameaen te ieee 2 33 Fog light switch if so equipped 2 34 Hazard warning flasher switch 0 008 2 34 MOM siciw tease etelidat ences eeetaee e eena ia 2 35 Heated seat if so equipped cece eee eee 2 35 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC off switch 2 36 Power Outlets dadec cdedsiaeienwiuke tasers ees 2 36 SIOMAGE sack usededneeiie a AEEA wae was 2 37 Map pockets ceca died cele ead hat Pee ada 2 37 Seatback pockets if so equipped 2 37 Storage pouch if so equipped 05 2 38 Sunglasses holder 0 00 eee ee kiai 2 38 Cup holders reserare eeror Ernia A 2 40 GIGVE BOX REE E EEE A E 2 41 CONSE DOR darot cnaitiies prne anaE dnece 2 41 Storage box if so equipped ee eee 2 42 Covered storage box e eee eee eae 2 42 Grocery hookS 2cci ec cioeversadeiaaenasdeags 2 42 Cargo net if so equipped cere eee 2 43 WIRdOWSi22s 532 4 cn eae t eannan BAW Babe Siew bees 2 43 Power WNAOWS nst iiu
245. ear window defroster indicator light on the switch comes on Push the switch again to turn the defroster off The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes A CAUTION When cleaning the inner side of the rear window be careful not to scratch or dam age the rear window defroster NOTE RR GY O Type B WIC1460 The top and bottom few rows of wires on the rear window are not part of the rear window defroster system These wires make up the antenna for the audio system HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH XENON HEADLIGHTS if so equipped AWARNING ZNHIGH VOLTAGE e When xenon headlights are on they produce a high voltage To prevent an electric shock never attempt to modify or disassemble Always have your xe non headlights replaced at a NISSAN dealer e Xenon headlights provide considerably more light than conventional head lights If they are not correctly aimed they might temporarily blind an oncom ing driver or the driver ahead of you and cause a serious accident If headlights are not aimed correctly immediately take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer and have the headlights adjusted correctly When the xenon headlight is initially turned on its brightness or color varies slightly However the color and brightness will soon stabilize Instruments and controls 2 29 e The life of xenon headlights will be shortened by frequent on off opera tion It
246. ecified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS e Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors CHANGING A FLAT TIRE If you have a flat tire follow the instructions be low Stopping the vehicle 1 Safely move the vehicle off the road and away from traffic 2 Turn on the hazard warning flashers 3 Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake Shift the manual transmission into R Reverse or the CVT into P Park 4 Turn off the engine 5 Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to signal professional road assistance person nel that you need assistance 6 Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place away from traffic and clear of the vehicle AWARNING e Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the manual transmission is shifted into R Reverse or the CVT is shifted into P Park Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope ice or slippery areas This is hazardous e Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle Wait for profes sional road assistance Gre Q wv WCE0044 Blocking wheels Place suitable blocks at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up AWARNING Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move an
247. ection is not shown follow this procedure 1 With the display turned on press and hold the switch for about 9 seconds The display will read C 2 Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at a maximum speed of 5 MPH 8 km h 3 After completing the circles the display should return to normal f the compass deviates from the correct indication soon after repeated adjustment have the compass checked at an authorized NISSAN dealer The compass may not indicate the correct compass point in tunnels or while driving up or down a steep hill The compass returns to the correct compass point when the ve hicle moves to an area where the geomag netism is stabilized ACAUTION e Do not install a ski rack antenna etc which are attached to the vehicle by means of a magnet They affect the op eration of the compass When cleaning the mirror use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as it may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing Instruments and controls 2 9 WARNING INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light Brake warning light Charge warning light A Lm ry Seat belt warning light and chime Supplemental air bag warning light Continuously Variable Transmission CVT position indicator ligh
248. ects placed on the seat could result in air bag inflation because of the object being detected by the occupant clas sification sensor Other conditions could also result in air bag inflation such as if a child is standing on the seat or if two children are on the seat contrary to the instructions in this manual Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly Using the passenger air bag status light you can monitor when the front passenger air bag is au tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied The light will not illuminate when the front pas senger seat is unoccupied If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen ger air bag status light is illuminated indicating that the air bag is OFF it could be that the person is a small adult or is not sitting on the seat properly If a child restraint must be used in the front seat the passenger air bag status light may or may not be illuminated depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used If the air bag status light is not illuminated indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash it could be that the child restraint or seat belt is not being used properly Make sure that the child restraint is installed properly the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly If the air bag status light is not illuminated reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat
249. ed To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously variable transmission an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle s drive wheels Always follow the dolly manufac turer s recommendations when using their prod uct Technical and consumer information 9 23 UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING DOT Department of Transportation Quality Grades All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov ernment test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B and C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea sured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and con crete A tire ma
250. ed with an occupant classification sensor pattern sensor that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under some Sit upright and well back conditions This sensor is only used in ARS1133 this seat Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an acci dent See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section e Keep hands on the outside of the steer ing wheel Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the front air bag inflates Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 43 ARS1041 ARS1042 ARS1043 AWARNING Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations 1 44 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system ARS1044 ARS1045 ARS1046 AWARNING Children may be severely injured or killed when the front air bags side air bags or curtain air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained Pre teens and children should be properly re strained in the rear seat if possible Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat An in flating front air bag could seriously
251. eed will be faster 2 28 Instruments and controls Low continuous low speed operation High continuous high speed operation Push the lever up to have one sweep opera tion of the wiper Pull the lever toward you to operate the washer The wiper will also operate several times AWARNING In freezing temperatures the washer solu tion may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield ACAUTION e Do not operate the washer continu ously for more than 30 seconds Do not operate the washer if the windshield washer fluid reservoir is empty Do not fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir with washer fluid concen trates at full strength Some methyl al cohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield washer fluid reservoir e Pre mix windshield washer fluid con centrates with water to the manufactur er s recommended levels before pour ing the fluid into the windshield washer fluid reservoir Do not use the windshield washer fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR if so equipped DEFROSTER SWITCH RR G3 O LIC2030 Type A To defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors if so equipped start the engine and push the rear window defroster switch on The r
252. ehicle identification number is located as shown Technical and consumer information 9 9 WTI0096 QR25DE VQ35DE ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER The number is stamped on the engine as shown 9 10 Technical and consumer information WTI10049 LTI0197 F M V S S C M V S S CERTIFICATION LABEL The Federal Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard F M V S S C M V S S certification la bel is affixed as shown This label contains valu able vehicle information such as Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR month and year of manufacture Vehicle Identification Number VIN etc Review it carefully A i g L t A Q 2 WT10189 LT10224 LT10225 EMISSION CONTROL Sedan Coupe INFORMATION LABEL TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION oh LABEL The emission control information label is at tached to the underside of the hood as shown The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and Loading Information label The label is located as shown Technical and consumer information 9 11 o_O EY WT10178 AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL The air conditioner specification label is affixed to the underside of the hood as shown 9 12 Technical and consumer information INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE WTI0179 Use the following steps to mount the front license plate Make a shallow hole in
253. ehind the child seat 2 Position the top tether strap over the top of the seatback 3 Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point on the rear parcel shelf 4 Refer to the appropriate child restraint in stallation procedure steps in this section before tightening the tether strap To remove or reinstall the tether anchor covers see Upper tether anchor key cylinder covers in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap consult your NISSAN dealer for details BOOSTER SEATS Precautions on booster seats AWARNING If a booster seat and seat belt are not used properly the risk of a child being injured ina sudden stop or collision greatly increases Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the child s face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the stomach Make sure the shoulder belt is not behind the child or under the child s arm A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that has a lap shoulder belt 1 38 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0455 LRS0453 LRS0464 Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers When selecting any booster seat keep the following points in mind e Choose only a booster seat with a label certifying that it complies with Fe
254. elect and Power on switch 2 Menu control switch ENTER button 3 Volume control switch STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR AUDIO CONTROL if so equipped POWER on switch With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON posi tion push the SOURCE switch to turn the audio system on SOURCE select switch Push the source select switch to change the mode in the following sequence Type A Switch PRESET BANK A PRESET BANK B PRE SET BANK C gt CD AUX PRESET BANK A These modes are only available when compat ible media storage is inserted into the device While in one of the preset radio station banks A Bor C use the tuning switch Y or 4 to select one of the preset radio stations 1 6 Type B Switch AM FM XM satellite radio if so equipped CD USB iPod AUX AM When using the SOURCE switch the audio mode switches to the FM preset bank FM1 or FM2 or XM preset bank XM1 or XM2 that was last active To switch between the FM1 and FM2 preset banks or the XM1 and XM2 preset banks use the controls on the audio system These modes are only available when compat ible media is connected to the system Type C Switch AM FM1 FM2 XM1 XM2 XM3 satellite radio if so equipped gt CD DVD Music Box USB iPod Bluetooth Au dio AUX AM These modes are only available when compat ible media storage is inserted into the device
255. ell back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0738 Manual front seat shown Fastening the seat belts 1 Adjust the seat See Seats earlier in this section 1 17 LRS0594 LRS0595 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage e The retractor is designed to lock dur ing a sudden stop or on impact A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat Ifthe seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position firmly pull the belt and release it Then smoothly pull the belt out of the re tractor Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest The front passenger seat and the rear seating positions three point seat belts have two modes of operation Emergency Locking Retractor ELR Automatic Locking Retractor ALR 1 18 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system The Emergency Locking Retractor ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement in the seat The ELR
256. em Oil Type S or equivalent 7 Windshield washer fluid oe NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner amp Antifreeze fluid or equivalent 1 For further details see Engine oil and oil filter recommendations in this section 2 NISSAN recommends for the VQ35DE engine Genuine NISSAN Ester Engine Oil available at a NISSAN dealer 3 If Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid MTF Multi 75W 85 is hard to obtain API GL 4 Viscosity SAE 75W 85 may be used as a temporary replacement However use Genuine NISSAN gear oil as soon as it is available 4 Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 2 Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 2 will damage the CVT which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty 5 DEXRON VI type ATF may also be used 6 Available in mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer 7 For further details see Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations in this section 8 For further details see Engine Oil in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual 9 2 Technical and consumer information FUEL RECOMMENDATION Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI Anti Knock Index num ber Research octane number 91 A CAUTION Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system and may also affect the warranty coverage e Under no circumstances should a l
257. emely inclined sur faces such as higher banked corners the VDC system may not operate prop erly and the indicator may flash or both the ft and indicator lights may illuminate Do not drive on these types of roads When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable ferry elevator or ramp the R indicator may flash or both the and indicator lights may illuminate This is not a mal function Restart the engine after driv ing onto a stable surface If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN recommended ones are used the VDC system may not operate properly and the ft indicator may flash or both the ff and 2 indicator lights may illuminate The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road Starting and driving 5 27 COLD WEATHER DRIVING FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK To prevent a door lock from freezing apply de icer through the key hole If the lock becomes frozen heat the key before inserting it into the key hole or use the remote keyless entry function on the Intelligent Key ANTI FREEZE In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem perature will drop below 32 F 0 C check the anti freeze to assure proper winter protection For details see Engine cooling system in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual BATTERY If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions the battery fluid may freeze an
258. ems e If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates engine coolant tem perature over the normal range turn the air conditioner off See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section of this manual AIR FLOW CHARTS The following charts show the button and dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating cooling or defrosting The air recirculation button should always be in the OFF posi tion for heating and defrosting Defrosting Air passed Defogging Fan control dial through heater core Temperature control dial tae oe Air recirculation button recirculation Air conditioner button Temp Air flow control control RIGHT WHA1408 Bi level Heating Fan control dial Air a button Fan Air recirculation control button Ss Air flow modes nwo conditioner button A C Temp button control HOT RIGHT Air passed through heater core Temperature control dial Air flow control WHA1409 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 23 Heating Air recirculation button Fan r recirculation control button Air passed through heater core Temperature modes control dial Air conditioner button A C Temp Air flow button control control HOT FF LHA2034 Heating amp Defrosting Defogging Fan Air flow modes
259. ence including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This Class B digital apparatus meets all re quirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth Bluetooth SIG Inc U S A and licensed to Clarion VOICE COMMANDS You can use voice commands to operate various Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System features using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system For more details see NISSAN Voice Recognition System in this section 4 108 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Settings 8 00 Navigation Volume amp Beeps Audio Display mone Bluetooth Adjust navigation settings Others LHA1236 CONNECTING PROCEDURE 1 Press the SETTING button on the instru ment panel and select the Bluetooth key on the display Settings gt Bluetooth So dm Yu 8 00 sac Bluetooth Connect Bluetooth Connected Devices Edit Bluetooth Info Replace Connected Phone LHA1316 Settings gt Bluetooth Sod Yu 8 00 sac E q Are you connecting a Bluetooth device to use with the handsfree phone system q For audio devices please select No B R l Yes _ No Cancel ics 2 5 LHA1317 Connecis a phone using Bluetooth 8 00 T
260. engine unplug and prop erly store the cord to keep it away from moving parts Starting and driving 5 29 MEMO 5 30 Starting and driving 6 In case of emergency Emergency engine shut off 0 sees 6 2 FAG eneret sete te eneciweret tisi traipi taies 6 2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 6 2 Changing a flat tire eee eee 6 3 Jump STANTS ie sce Saralst eed ins maid e r saan es 6 8 Push starting csicsas eroresrenreirisrisni emisii 6 10 If your vehicle overheatS 00 0c cece eee 6 10 Towing your vehicle 0 0s cece eee eae 6 11 Towing recommended by NISSAN 6 12 Vehicle recovery freeing a stuck vehicle 6 14 EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving perform the following procedure Rapidly push the push button ignition switch 3 consecutive times or Push and hold the push button ignition switch for more than 2 seconds 6 2 Incase of emergency FLAT TIRE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS It monitors tire pres sure of all tires except the spare When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning appears in the vehicle information display one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure the TPMS will acti
261. engine coolant level 8 9 Changing engine coolant 0 085 8 9 Engine Oil dsiceeeen eito rks Hee e ead ESNE R 8 10 Checking engine oil level 0 0 8 10 Changing engine oil 20 0 000s 8 11 Changing engine oil filter 0 0 8 12 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT fluid if so equipped 0 6 8 13 Power steering fluid 0 06 00 c cece eee eee eee 8 14 Brake and clutch if so equipped fluid 8 14 Brake Aid vi ccctcsiiinias ee renadete ited were 8 15 Clutch fluid if so equipped eee eee 8 15 Windshield washer fluid 0 0 0 c eee eee 8 15 Windshield washer fluid reservoir 8 15 BALLON Y islet ster wa ad crate thanas teat bate esas pan Get aad 8 16 JUMP StAMING wc sceneries weecrdiw eset ene anes 8 17 Variable voltage control system 00 eae 8 18 Drive belt i deco cee cg hinices wade weeelngen ean 8 18 Sparkplugs siri seuavivines orena ea ai 8 19 Replacing spark plugs 0 0 csc eee eee 8 19 Aireleang soere esoe eE areas aia ude 8 20 In CabiIN microfiltor ssis alee aten nana tinerii 8 21 Windshield wiper blades cece eee 8 21 Cleanings wtiscacs Conia ean Geeta angaae wes Gne 8 21 Replacing v4 cnctewudsewan nade ntete tseo kasika 8 21 Brakes issie tan deeneniens uae koroen easa niian 8 22 Self adjusting brakes 0005 8 22 Brake pad wear indica
262. ent or driving conditions the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the moonroof occurs AWARNING There are some small distances immedi ately before the closed position which cannot be detected Make sure that all passengers have their hands etc inside the vehicle before closing the moonroof When closing If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it moves to the front the moonroof will immediately open backward When tilting down If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it tilts down the moonroof will im mediately tilt up If the auto reverse function malfunctions and re peats opening or tilting up the moonroof keep pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds after it happens the moonroof will fully close gradually Make sure nothing is caught in the moonroof Instruments and controls 2 47 AWARNING e In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open moonroof Always use seat belts and child restraints Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the moonroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the moonroof is closing ACAUTION e Remove water drops snow ice or sand from the moonroof before opening e Do not place heavy objects on the moonroof or surrounding area Sunshade Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for w
263. er The required hitch ball size is stamped on most trailer couplers Most hitch balls also have the size printed on the top of the ball Choose the proper class hitch ball based on the trailer weight The diameter of the threaded shank of the hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount hole diameter The hitch ball shank should be no more than 1 16 smaller than the hole in the ball mount The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be long enough to be properly secured to the ball mount There should be at least 2 threads showing beyond the lock washer and nut Ball mount The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver Choose a proper class ball mount based on the trailer weight Additionally the ball mount should be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the ground Sway control device Sudden maneuvers wind gusts and buffeting caused by other vehicles can affect trailer han dling Sway control devices may be used to help control these affects If you choose to use one contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway control device will work with the vehicle hitch trailer and the trailer s brake sys tem Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installing and using the sway control device Class hitch Class trailer hitch equipment receiver ball mount and hitch ball can be used to tow trailers of a maxim
264. er vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet or it is lost you may obtain a replace ment by writing to Nissan North America Inc Consumer Affairs Department P O Box 685003 Franklin TN 37068 5003 For Canada Emission Control System Warranty Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet or it is lost you may obtain a replace ment by writing to Nissan Canada Inc 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga Ontario L4W 4Z5 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS For USA If you believe that your vehicle has a de fect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immedi ately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addi tion to notifying NISSAN If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot be come involved in individual problems be tween you your dealer or NISSAN To contact NHTSA you may call the Ve hicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washingto
265. er is coming from the en gine stand clear to prevent getting burned 5 Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness Also check if the cooling fan is running The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water If coolant is leaking the water pump belt is missing or loose or the cooling fan does not run stop the en gine AWARNING Be careful not to allow your hands hair jewelry or clothing to come into contact with or get caught in engine belts or the engine cooling fan The engine cooling fan can start at any time 6 After the engine cools down check the cool ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank with the engine running Add coolant to the engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN dealer TOWING YOUR VEHICLE When towing your vehicle all State Provincial in Canada and local regulations for towing must be followed Incorrect towing equipment could dam age your vehicle Towing instructions are avail able from a NISSAN dealer Local service opera tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions AWARNING Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed e Never get under your vehicle after it has
266. eral maintenance is performed As the vehicle owner you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives proper maintenance You are a vital link in the mainte nance chain Scheduled maintenance For your convenience both required and optional scheduled maintenance items are described and listed in your NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide You must refer to that guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is performed on your NISSAN at regular intervals General maintenance General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day to day op eration They are essential for proper vehicle op eration It is your responsibility to perform these maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed 8 2 Maintenance and do it yourself Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools These checks or inspections can be done by you a qualified technician or if you prefer a NISSAN dealer Where to go for service If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction have the systems checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer NISSAN technicians are well trained specialists who are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins service tips and in dealership training programs They are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve hicles before they work on your vehicle rathe
267. erior trunk lid release cece eee eee 3 24 Fuel filer door sens uire ae ming 3 25 Opener operation 0 cee eee eee eee 3 25 Ue PIS cap od css ana xicrsthitsiandteracsteain at topea eaa 3 25 Tilt telescopic steering 0 0 cee eee eee 3 28 Tilt Operation lt 2 c0dccevewtsesew cena genta 3 28 Telescopic operation 020 cece eee eee 3 28 SUM VISONS ics ng dcue weed vedi Wied Hates each welds 3 28 Vanity mirrors if so equipped 000 3 29 MINOS scsi Serre oeitjanien eerie KETENS yeaa AEDE 3 29 Rearview mirror if so equipped 0005 3 29 Automatic anti glare rearview mirror if so equipped 0 eee eee eee eee 3 30 Outside Minors ressis terinin sede eee 3 31 KEYS WPD0363 1 Two Intelligent Keys 2 Mechanical keys inside Intelligent Keys 3 Key number plate NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent Key which are registered to your vehicle s Intelli gent Key components and NISSAN Vehicle Im mobilizer System components Never leave these keys in the vehicle As many as four Intelligent Keys can be regis tered and used with one vehicle The new keys must be registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to 3 2 Pre driving checks and adjustments use with the Intelligent Key and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of your vehicle Since the registration process requires erasing all memory in the Intel
268. ers When the playback of the list is complete the system goes back to the main menu You can stop the playback of the list at any time by pressing the button on the steering wheel The system ends the VR session 4 100 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Phonebook phones with automatic phonebook download function NOTE The Transfer Entry command is not avail able when the vehicle is moving Main Menu Phonebook List Names Transfer Entry Delete Entry Record Name For phones that support automatic download of the phonebook PBAP Bluetooth profile the Phonebook command is used to manage entries in the vehicle phonebook You can say the name of an entry at this menu to initiate dialing of that entry The phonebook stores up to 1000 names for each phone connected to the system When a phone is connected to the system the phonebook is automatically downloaded to the vehicle This feature allows you to access your phonebook from the Bluetooth system and call contacts by name You can record a custom voice tag for contact names that the system has difficulty recognizing For more information see Record name in this section NOTE Each phone has its own separate phone book You cannot access Phone A s phone book if you are currently connected with Phone B List Names Use the List Names command to hear al
269. erse or fast forward the track being played The track plays at an increased speed while reversing or fast for warding When the button is released the audio file returns to normal play speed aa gt Pl SEEK CAT buttons Press the SEEK CAT button M4 while an au dio file on the USB device is playing to return to the beginning of the current track Press the SEEK CAT button M4 several times to skip backward several tracks Press the SEEK CAT button while an au dio file on the USB device is playing to advance one track Press the SEEK CAT button P several times to skip forward several tracks If the last track in a folder on the USB device is skipped the first track of the next folder is played Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 67 RDM button When the RDM button is pressed while an audio file on the USB device is playing the play pattern can be changed as follows ALL RDM 1 FOLDER RDM OFF ALL RDM all tracks on the USB device will be played randomly 1 FOLDER RDM all tracks in the current folder will be played randomly OFF No random play pattern is applied The indicator on the display will turn off The current play pattern of the USB device is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is applied RPT button When the RPT button is pressed while an audio file on the USB device is playing the play pattern can be changed as follows 1 FOLDER RP
270. es quicker and easier 1 Locate the training button on the garage door opener motor unit Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand If there is difficulty locating the training button reference the garage door opener Owner s Manual 2 54 Instruments and controls 2 Press the training button on the garage door opener motor unit which may activate a training light NOTE Following step 2 there are 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3 3 Firmly press and release the programmed HomeLink button a second time to com plete the training process Some garage door openers may require you to do this procedure a third time to complete the train ing The garage door opener should now recognize the HomeLink Universal Transceiver and acti vate when the HomeLink button is pressed The remaining two buttons may now be programmed if not yet programmed follow steps 2 through 4 in the Programming HomeLink procedures earlier in this section REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HOMELINK BUTTON To reprogram a HomeLink Universal Transceiver button complete the following 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink but ton Do not release the button until step 4 has been completed 2 When the indicator light begins to flash slowly after 20 seconds position the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 26 76 mm away from the HomeLink surface 3 Press and hold the hand held transmi
271. es skin or clothing immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat reduce bat tery life and in some cases lead to an explosion When working on or near a battery al ways wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry Battery posts terminals and related ac cessories contain lead and lead com pounds Wash hands after handling Keep battery out of the reach of children Do not tip the battery Keep the vent caps tight and the battery level WDI0224 ik Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as shown Use a cloth to protect the battery case WDI0529 2 Check the fluid level in each cell If it is necessary to add fluid add only distilled water to bring the level up to the bottom of the filler opening Do not overfill Reinstall the vent caps Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level JUMP STARTING If jump starting is necessary see Jump starting in the In case of emergency section of this manual If the engine does not start by jump starting the battery may have to be replaced Contact a NISSAN dealer Maintenance and do it yourself 8 17 VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM LDI0694 8 18 Maintena
272. es for about 1 second and turns off Low tire pressure warning If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure the warning light will illuminate A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning also appears in the vehicle information display When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates you should stop and adjust the tire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom mended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver s door opening The low tire pressure warning light does not automati cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad justed After the tire is inflated to the rec ommended pressure the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light Use a tire pres sure gauge to check the tire pressure The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning is active as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated For additional information see Vehicle informa tion display in the Instruments and controls section and Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving section and in the In case of emergency section TPMS malfunction If the TPMS is not functioning properly the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position The light will remain on after the 1 minute Have the system checked by
273. ess of the head restraints This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision 4 a 2 3 5 LRS0893 WRS0921 The illustration shows the seating positions Components equipped with head restraints All of the head restraints are adjustable A Indicates the seating position is equipped with a head restraint 1 10 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Head restraint Adjustment notches Lock knob Stalks Release knob a fF ON 4 ka v WRS0134 LRS0888 LRS0889 Adjustment To raise the head restraint pull it up To lower push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down Adjust the head restraint so the center is level with the center of the seat occupant s ears Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 11 ap WRS0922 Removal Use the following procedure to remove the ad justable head restraints il Pull the head restraint up to the highest position Push and hold the lock knob and release knob 3 Remove the head restraint from the seat 4 Store the head restraint properly so it is not loose in the vehicle 5 Reinstall and properly adjust the head re straint before an occupant uses the seating position 1 12 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS2026 Install 1 Align the head restra
274. esume the movie file if it has LHA1380 been paused Settings e EE Stop Select the Settings key to adjust the following settings Select the W key to stop playing the e Audio File Playback movie file Switch to the audio playback mode This item is displayed only when the USB gt p Next Chapter Fast Forward memory ake Audio ie Select the P key to skip the chapter s ed pi the N or 1 Track of the disc forward The chapters will ad ee AREE a n vance the number of times the key is se Repeat play modes lected Press and hold the key to fast for ward the chapter Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 71 10 Key Search Select the 10 Key Search key to open the number entry screen Input the number you want to search for and the specified file or folder will be played e Display Adjust the image quality of the screen e DRC DRC Dynamic Range Compression auto matically adjusts the soundtrack volume level to maintain a more even sound to the speakers e Audio Choose the preferred language of the audio Subtitle Choose the preferred language of the sub titles e Display Mode Choose between the Normal Wide Cinema or Full display modes te WHA1530 iPod PLAYER OPERATION WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM if so equipped Connecting iPod To conne
275. etc that you are programming Your vehicle s engine should be turned off while programming the HomeLink Universal Transceiver Instruments and controls 2 51 WIC0986 WIC0987 PROGRAMMING HOMELINK 1 To begin press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons to clear the memory until the indicator light blinks after 20 seconds Release both buttons 2 Position the end of the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 26 76 mm away from the HomeLink surface 2 52 Instruments and controls Using both hands simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink button you want to program and the hand held transmitter but ton DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has been completed Hold down both buttons until the indicator light on the HomeLink flashes changing from a slow blink to a rapidly flashing blink This could take up to 90 seconds When the indicator light flashes rapidly both buttons may be released The rapidly flash ing light indicates successful programming To activate the garage door or other pro grammed device press and hold the pro grammed HomeLink button releasing when the device begins to activate 5 If the indicator light on the HomeLink blinks rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid HomeLink has picked up a rolling code garage door opener signal You will need to proceed with the next steps to train the Ho
276. ey When all doors are locked and the trunk lid is closed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk the outside buzzer will sound and the trunk will open HOW TO USE THE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION The remote keyless entry function can operate all door locks using the remote keyless function of the Intelligent Key The remote keyless function can operate at a distance of 33 ft 10 m away from the vehicle The operating distance de pends upon the conditions around the vehicle The remote keyless entry function will not func tion under the following conditions When the Intelligent Key is not within the operational range When the doors or the trunk are open or not closed securely When the Intelligent Key battery is dis charged A CAUTION When locking the doors using the Intelli gent Key be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle WPD0359 Locking doors 1 Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi tion Close all doors Press the button on the Intelligent Key The hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn beeps once All doors will be locked ACAUTION After locking the doors using the Intelli gent Key be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles a ci WPD0360 Unlocking doors 1 Press the button on the Intelligent Key 2 The hazard warning lights flash once 3 Press the button ag
277. f 8 37 LDI2012 LDI2013 2 With the first pin in position align the 3 Close the cover second pin with its hinge slot and push down on the cover to completely engage it A snap sound will be heard 8 38 Maintenance and do it yourself WHEELS AND TIRES If you have a flat tire see Flat tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual TIRE PRESSURE Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning appears in the ve hicle information display one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h Also this system may not de tect a sudden drop in tire pressure for example a flat tire while driving For more details refer to Low tire pres sure warning light in the Instruments and controls section Tire Pressure Monitor ing System TPMS in the Starting and driving section and Flat tire in the In case of emergency section Tire inflation pressure Check the tire pressures including the spare often and always prior to long dis tance trips The recommended tire pres sure specif
278. f you should need further information visit us at www nissanusa com for U S customers or www nissan ca for Canadian customers 9 28 Technical and consumer information 10 Index A Air bag See supplemental restraint System e rena raaa ye ee ee 1 41 Air bag system Front See supplemental front impact air bag system ooa aaa 1 50 Air bag warning light 1 57 2 14 Air cleaner housing filter aaua 8 20 Air conditioner Air conditioner operation 4 21 Air conditioner service 4 28 Air conditioner specification label 9 12 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations 9 6 Heater and air conditioner CONOS a ere oe See Spe ae vs 4 19 4 26 Servicing air conditioner 4 28 Air flow charts 000 4 22 Alarm system See vehicle security system 2 26 Anchor point locations 1 27 Antennas sce ee ae ee a a 4 90 Anti lock brake warning light 2 11 Anti lock Braking System ABS 5 25 Ammrests soa a ss ee ee ee 1 9 Audible reminders 2 16 Audio system 2 0 000000 4 29 Bluetooth audio 4 84 Compact disc CD player 2 aa 4 46 4 52 4 58 4 64 FM AM radio with compact disc CD player its ee eee aaa read 4 44 FM AM SAT radio with CD DVD player 4 54 FM AM SAT radio with compact disc CD player 2 ee eee 4 48 Audio System iPod Playe
279. for mation is displayed on the Artist song title line on the display Windows and Windows Media are regis tered trademarks and trademarks in the United States of America and other countries of Micro soft Corporation of the USA FJ FOLDER 1 MP3 or WMA WHA1078 Playback order chart Playback order Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA files is as illustrated The names of folders not containing MP3 or WMA files are not shown in the display If there is a file in the top level of the disc Root Folder is displayed The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software Therefore the files might not play in the desired order Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 35 Specification chart Supported le systems MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2 5 MP3 8 kHz 48 kHz Supported 8 kbps 320 kbps VBR versions 1 WMA WMA7 WMA8 WMAQ Sampling frequency 32 kHz 48 kHz 48 kops 102 Kops VBR Tag information ID3 tag VER1 0 VER1 1 VER2 2 VER2 3 MP3 only Folder levels Folder levels 8 Max folders 255 including root folder Files 512 Max 255 files for one folder Text character number limitation 128 characters 01 ASCII 02 ISO 8859 1 03 UNICODE UTF 16 BOM Big Endian 04 UNICODE UTF 16 Non BOM Big Endian 05 Di playable character codes 2 UNICODE UTF 8 06 UNICODE Non UTF 16 BOM Little Endian 1 Files crea
280. fore opening any door always look for and avoid oncoming traffic Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle They could unknowingly ac tivate switches or controls Unattended children could become involved in seri ous accidents 3 4 Pre driving checks and adjustments WPD0444 Driver s side LOCKING WITH KEY The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors at the same time Turning the key toward the front Q of the vehicle locks all doors Turning the key one time toward the rear 2 of the vehicle unlocks that door From that position returning the key to neutral where the key can only be removed and inserted and turning it toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors Opening and closing windows if so equipped The driver s door key operation allows you to open and close windows equipped with auto matic operation at the same time To open the windows turn the driver s door key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is unlocked To close the windows turn the driver s door key toward the front of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is locked Windows stop when the key cylinder is released WPD0291 Inside lock LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB To lock the door without the key move the inside lock knob to the lock position then close the door To unlock the doo
281. ft navigation and communi cation systems Do not operate the In telligent Key while on an airplane Make sure the buttons are not operated unin tentionally when the unit is stored for a flight The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locks using the remote controller function or pushing the request switch on the vehicle without taking the key out from a pocket or purse The operating environment and or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key operation Be sure to read the following before using the Intelligent Key ACAUTION e Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when operating the vehicle e Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle when you leave the vehicle The Intelligent Key is always communicating with the vehicle as it receives radio waves The Intel ligent Key transmits weak radio waves Environ mental conditions may interfere with the opera tion of the Intelligent Key under the following operating conditions When operating near a location where strong radio waves are transmitted such as a TV tower power station and broadcasting station When in possession of wireless equipment such as a cellular telephone transceiver and CB radio When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or covered by metallic materials When any type of radio wave remote control is used nearby When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal com puter When
282. g LHA1381 VEHICLE PHONEBOOK This vehicle has two phonebooks available for your use Depending on your phone the system may automatically download your entire cell phone s phonebook into the Handset Phone book For the details on downloading your phonebook see Handset phonebook in this section If your phonebook does not automati cally download you may set up the vehicle phonebook for up to 40 entries This phonebook allows you to record a name to speak while using voice recognition 1 Press the f wheel button on the steering 2 Select the Vehicle Phonebook key 3 Select the Add New key at the top of the screen Choose the method for entering the phone book entry For this example select Enter Number by Keypad Enter the digits and select the OK key For more information see How to use the touch screen in this section 4 110 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Select the Voicetag key to record a name to speak when using the Voice Recognition system Select the Store key and prepare to speak the name after the tone When the voicetag is successfully saved select the OK key to save the phonebook entry After the phonebook entry is saved it will show a screen that is ready to call the num ber Select the Back key to return to the Vehicle Phoneboo
283. ge Number To exit hold the TALK switch LHA1336 4 Say Dial Number 5 Say 800 4 126 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 6 The system announces Please say the next three digits or dial or say change number 7 Say 662 Voice Recognition gt Dial Num Yal 8 00 47 Change Number 800 662 Help Manual Controls Please say the last 4 digits or say Change Number To exit hold the TALK switch LHA1337 Voice Recognition gt Dial Num Yal 8 00 4 Dial 47 Change Number 800 662 6200 Manual Controls Please say Dial or say Change Number To exit hold the TALK switch LHA1338 8 The system announces Please say the last four digits or say change number 9 Say 6200 10 11 12 The system announces Dial or Change Number Say Dial The system makes a call to 800 662 6200 NOTE You can also speak 800 662 6200 10 continuous digits or 662 6200 7 con tinuous digits if the area code is not nec essary However the 3 3 4 digit grouping is recommended for improved recognition See How to speak numbers in this section You can only say a phone number using the 3 3 4 grouping 7 digits and 10 digits using this command Please use the Internatio
284. genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail able See Owner s Manual Service Manual or der information in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions and could affect warranty coverage If in doubt about any servicing have it done by a NISSAN dealer Maintenance and do it yourself 8 5 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS 3 4 y To Soot Wy J SS S JOCOR W Y a too L y i MUSEN fi i poe UFR CA c9 r g LDI0553 8 6 Maintenance and do it yourself QR25DE engine 12 Power steering fluid reservoir Engine oil filler cap Brake fluid reservoir Clutch fluid reservoir M T model Air cleaner Fuse block Battery Fuse Fusible link box Engine oil dipstick Radiator cap Drive belt location Engine coolant reservoir Windshield washer fluid reservoir VQ35DE engine 1 Power steering fluid reservoir 2 Engine oil filler cap 3 Brake fluid reservoir Clutch fluid reservoir M T model 4 Air cleaner 5 Fuse block 6 Battery 7 8 Fuse Fusible link box 7 fis SS Engine oil dipstick 9 Radiator cap 10 Drive belt location 11 Engine coolant reservoir 12 Windshield washer fluid reservoir
285. ggle between the two functions For more information about the USB input jack see USB interface in this section A EJECT button When the button is pressed with a com pact disc loaded the compact disc will eject and the last source will be played When the button is pressed twice with a compact disc loaded the compact disc will be ejected further for easier CD removal If the disc is not removed within 20 seconds the disc will reload Additional features For more information about the USB interface available with this system see USB interface models without Navigation System in this sec tion Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 53 2 1 OPEN TILT 41 _ ID 10 FM AM 9 XM 8 DISC aux SETTING 3 VOL TUNE FOLDER 7 4 O pusHON OFF LA PH j 1 2 3 4 5 6 j PUSH AUDIO 6 5 LHA1391 1 OPEN TILT button Screen tilts downto 6 4 P gt Seeking button expose CD DVD insert slot 7 VOL ON OFF control knob 2 Display screen 8 DISC AUX button 3 SETTING button 9 XM button 4 AUDIO button control knob 10 FM AM button 5 Station select 1 6 buttons 4 54 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 11 lt 4 D button No satellite radio reception is a
286. gt audio Player o MN Yul 8 00 Gsack Device Name XXXXXXXX Select Device Address CO XXXXXXXX Delete LHA1298 LHA0049 6 The Device Name and Device Address are displayed on the screen Select the Select key to make this device the active Bluetooth audio player Select the Edit key to edit the details of the player such as Device Name Select the Delete key to delete the device CD CARE AND CLEANING e Handle a CD by its edges Do not bend the disc Never touch the surface of the disc Always place the discs in the storage case when they are not being used To clean a disc wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge using a clean soft cloth Do not wipe the disc using a circular motion Do not use a conventional record cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges Remove the rough edges by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 87 2 2 3 Dp 3 DrD LHA0752 LHA0753 Type A Type B 1 Source select and Power on switch 1 Source select and Power on switch 2 Tuning switch 2 Tuning switch 3 Volume control switch 3 Volume control switch 4 88 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems LHA0754 Type C 1 Source s
287. hat may cause undesired opera tion of the device CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD VOID THE USER S AUTHORITY TO OPER ATE THE EQUIPMENT LICO474 Security indicator light The security indicator light blinks whenever the ignition switch is placed in the OFF LOCK or ACC position This function indicates the NISSAN Ve hicle Immobilizer System is operational If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal functioning the light will remain on while the ignition switch is placed in the ON position If the light still remains on and or the en gine will not start see a NISSAN dealer for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser vice as soon as possible Please bring all registered keys that you have when visiting your NISSAN dealer for service Instruments and controls 2 27 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH LIC1061 SWITCH OPERATION The windshield wiper and washer switch oper ates when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed Intermittent intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the switch toward Slower or Faster Also for vehicles equipped with speed dependent wipers the intermittent operation speed varies in accor dance with the vehicle speed For example when the vehicle speed is high the intermit tent operation sp
288. he NO KEY warning appears on the display the outside chime sounds 3 times and the inside warning chime sounds for When closing the door after getting out of approximately 3 seconds the vehicle The NO KEY warning appears on the dis play and the outside chime sounds continuously The shift selector is not in the P position Shift the shift selector to the P position The ignition switch is in the ACC position Place tha ignition switoh inthe OFF position The Intelligent Key is in the Intelligent Key Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelli port gent Key port The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position The ignition switch is in the ACC position and the shift selector is not in the P Park position Place the ignition switch in the OFF position Move the shift selector to the P Park posi tion and place the ignition switch in the OFF position When closing the door with the inside lock The outside chime sounds for approximately The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or Carry the Intelligent Key with you knob turned to LOCK 3 seconds and all the doors unlock trunk When closing the trunk lid The outside chime sounds for approximately The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk Carry the Intelligent Key with you 10 seconds and the trunk lid opens 3 22 Pre driving checks and adjustments HOOD TRUNK LID C lee Ne
289. he engine stopped This could result in a discharged battery Instruments and controls 2 49 PERSONAL LIGHTS MAP LIGHTS w 0 m 0 or i WIC1476 LIC1083 WIC1494 CONSOLE LIGHT if so equipped The console light will turn on whenever the park ing lights or headlights are illuminated The console light brightness can be adjusted with the instrument brightness control 2 50 Instruments and controls Rear personal lights sedan only To turn the rear personal lights on press the switch To turn them off press the switch again Front map lights To turn the map lights on press the light lens To turn them off press the lens again ACAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped This could result in a discharged battery TRUNK LIGHT The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened When the trunk lid is closed the light goes off The light will go off after about 15 minutes if the trunk lid is left open unless the ignition switch is placed in the ON position For bulb replacement procedures refer to Exte rior and interior lights in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER if so equipped The HomeLink Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand held transmitters into one built in device HomeLink Universal
290. he hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic Turn signals do not work when the haz ard warning flasher lights are on The flashers will operate with the ignition switch placed in any position Some state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving HORN HEATED SEAT if so equipped LIC1069 ES LIC1543 To sound the horn push the center pad area of the steering wheel A WARNING Do not disassemble the horn Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system Tam pering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury The front seats are warmed by built in heaters 1 Start the engine 2 Push the low or high position of the switch as desired depending on the temperature The indicator light in the switch will illumi nate The heater is controlled by a thermostat automatically turning the heater on and off The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on 3 When the seat is warmed or before you leave the vehicle be sure to turn the switch off A CAUTION Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat such as a blanket cush ion seat cover et
291. he passen ger and cargo load in the vehicle Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be tween 10 15 of the trailer weight or within the trailer tongue load specification recommended by the trailer manufacturer If the tongue load becomes excessive rearrange the cargo to ob tain the proper tongue load Do not exceed the maximum tongue weight specification shown in the Towing load specification chart even if the calculated available tongue weight is greater than 15 If the calculated tongue weight is less than 10 reduce the total trailer weight to match the available tongue weight Always verify that available capacities are within the required ratings TOWING LOAD SPECIFICATION TOWING LOAD SPECIFICATION UNIT Ib kg MAXIMUM TOWING LOAD 1 000 454 100 45 LOAD TOWING SAFETY Trailer hitch Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle to help avoid personal injury or prop erty damage due to sway caused by crosswinds rough road surfaces or passing trucks AWARNING Trailer hitch components have specific weight ratings Your vehicle may be ca pable of towing a trailer heavier than the weight rating of the hitch components Never exceed the weight rating of the hitch components Doing so can cause serious personal injury or property damage Hitch ball Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight rating for your trail
292. he same way as conventional seat belts When a pretensioner activates smoke is re leased and a loud noise may be heard This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire Care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly After pretensioner activation load limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing if necessary to reduce forces against the chest If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner sys tem the supplemental air bag warning light AF will not come on will flash intermit tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on after the ignition switch has been placed in the ON or START position In this case the preten sioner system may not function properly It must be checked and repaired Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer When selling your vehicle we request that you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner s Manual 1 56 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0895 1 SRS Air Bag Warning Labels located on the sun visors SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS Warning labels about the supplemental front impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration PY LRSO100 SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT The supplemental air bag warning ligh
293. he system is searching for your phone Using your handset look for a Bluetooth device called MY CAR When requested by the handset enter the PIN 1234 Exiting screen cancels search LHA1318 2 Select the Connect Bluetooth key 3 A popup box will appear on the screen prompting you to confirm that the connec tion is for the phone system Select the Yes key 4 When a PIN code appears on the screen operate the Bluetooth cellular phone to enter the PIN code The connecting procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone See the cellular phone Owner s Manual for details You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth or call the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for instructions on connecting recommended cellular phones When the connecting is complete the screen will return to the Bluetooth settings screen Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 109 Phone gt Vehicle Phonebook Bo HH Ful 8 00 rack Add New LHA1320 S ettings gt Edit Vehicle Pho Ro M Y 8 00 Back Copy from Call History Copy from the Handset Enter Number by Keypad LHA1321 Phone gt Vehicle Phonebook o ME Yul Back U Entry Name Number XXX XXXX Type H Voiceta
294. he vehicle securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground Re move the wheel nuts and then remove the tire Installing the spare tire The spare tire is designed for emergency use See specific instructions under the heading Wheels and tires in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section of this manual 1 Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be tween the wheel and hub 2 Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight 3 With the wheel nut wrench tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until they are tight In case of emergency 6 7 4 Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground Then with the wheel nut wrench tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence illustrated Lower the vehicle completely AWARNING Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off This could cause an accident e Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts This could cause the nuts to become loose Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve hicle has been driven for 600 miles 1 000 km also in cases of a flat tire etc As soon as possible tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench Wheel nut tightening torque 83 ft lb 113 N m The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to s
295. he volume control switches or on the steering wheel while being provided with feedback You can also use the radio volume control knob In most cases you can interrupt the voice feedback to speak the next command by pressing the 4 button on the steering wheel 4 94 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems To use the system faster you may speak the second level commands with the main menu command on the main menu For example press the amp button and after the tone say Call Redial NOTE The combined command of Call and a Name cannot be used How to say numbers NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers in voice commands Refer to the following rules and examples Either zero or oh can be used for 0 Example 1 800 662 6200 One eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh or One eight zero zero six six two six two oh oh Words can be used for the first 4 digits places only Example 1 800 662 6200 One eight hundred six six two six two oh oh NOT One eight hundred six six two sixty two hundred and NOT One eight oh oh six six two sixty two hundred Numbers can be spoken in small groups The system will prompt you to continue en tering digits if desired Example 1 800 662 6200 One eight zero zero The system repeats the numbers and prompts you to enter more
296. hill grades Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time in lower than 6 range This reduces fuel economy When shifting up Move the shift selector to the up side Shifts to higher range When shifting down Move the shift selector to the down side Shifts to lower range The transmission will automatically down shift the gears For example if you select the 3rd range the transmission will shift down between the 3rd and 1st gears Moving the shift selector rapidly to the same side twice will shift the ranges in succession When canceling the manual shift mode Return the shift selector to the D Drive position to return the transmission to the normal driving mode Inthe manual shift mode the transmis sion may not shift to the selected gear This helps maintain driving perfor mance and reduces the chance of ve hicle damage or loss of control Starting and driving 5 15 Inthe manual shift mode the transmis sion may shift up automatically to a higher range than selected if the en gine speed is too high When the ve hicle speed decreases the transmis sion automatically shifts down and shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle comes to a stop CVT operation is limited to automatic drive mode when CVT fluid temperature is ex tremely low even if manual shift mode is selected This is not a malfunction When CVT fluid warms up manual mode can be selec
297. hin 31 50 in 80 cm from each request switch If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass handle or rear bumper the request switches may not function When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range it is possible for anyone even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key to push the request switch to lock unlock the doors To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you and then lock the doors Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch The door will be unlocked but will not open Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door WPD0375 WPD0432 DOOR LOCKS UNLOCKS Coupe shown Sedan similar PRECAUTION NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION Do not push the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as You can lock or unlock the doors without taking illustrated The close distance to the door the key out of your pocket or bag handle will cause the Intelligent Key system When you carry the Intelligent Key with you you to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door gent Key is outside the vehicle handle request switch within the range of opera e After locking with the door handle request ton switch verify the doors are securely locked by testing them Pre driving checks and adj
298. hone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle Once your cellular phone is connected to the in vehicle phone module no other phone connecting procedure is required Your phone is automatically connected with the in vehicle phone module when 4 92 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with the previously connected cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle You can connect up to 5 different Bluetooth cellular phones to the in vehicle phone module However you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time Before using the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System refer to the following notes e Set up the wireless connection between a compatible cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module before using the hands free phone system Some Bluetooth enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in vehicle phone mod ule Please visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for a recommended phone list and connecting instructions You will not be able to use a hands free phone under the following conditions Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser vice area Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive a cellular signal such as in a tunnel in an underground parking garage near a tall building or in a moun tainous area Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed When the radio wave
299. hone via the Bluetooth communication link The transfer procedure varies according to each cellular phone See the cellular phone Owner s Manual for details You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for instructions on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN recommended cellular phones The system repeats the number and prompts you for the next command When you have finished entering numbers or transferring an entry choose Store The system confirms the name location and number Delete Entry Use the Delete Entry command to erase one entry from the phonebook After the system rec ognizes the command speak the name to delete or say List Names to choose an entry Record Name The system allows you to record custom voice tags for contact names in the phonebook that the vehicle has difficulty recognizing This feature can also be used to record voice tags to directly dial an entry with multiple numbers Up to 40 voice tags can be recorded to the system Recent Calls Main Menu Recent Calls Outgoing Incoming Missed Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 101 Use the Recent Calls command to access out going incoming or missed calls Outgoing Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoing calls made from the vehicle Incoming Use the Incoming command to list the incoming calls made to the vehicle
300. ial vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean lukewarm never hot water 7 2 Appearance and care ACAUTION e Do not use car washes that use acid in the detergent Some car washes espe cially brushless ones use some acid for cleaning The acid may react with some plastic vehicle components causing them to crack This could affect their appearance and also could cause them not to function properly Always check with your car wash to confirm that acid is not used e Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap strong chemical deter gents gasoline or solvents e Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun light or while the vehicle body is hot as the surface may become water spotied e Avoid using tight napped or rough cloths such as washing mitts Care must be taken when removing caked on dirt or other foreign sub stances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean water Inside flanges seams and folds on the doors hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt Therefore these areas must be cleaned regularly Take care that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots WAXING Regular waxing protects the paint surface and he
301. ications are shown on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label or the Tire and Loading Information label under the Cold Tire Pressure heading The Tire and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar Tire pressures should be checked regularly because Most tires naturally lose air over time Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km at moderate speeds Incorrect tire pressure including un der inflation may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling AWARNING Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident e The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR is located on the F M V S S C M V S S certifica tion label The vehicle weight ca pacity is indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity Overloading your ve hicle may result in reduced tire life unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure or unfavorable handling character istics and could also lead to a serious accident Loading be yond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other ve hicle components e Before taking a long trip or whenever you heavily load y
302. ice Recognition Speed Sensing Wiper Interval ON Intelligent Key Lock Unlock ON j Selective Door Unlock ON j Return All Settings to Default 1 7 3 7 Adjust comfort amp convenience settings Cabin lighting when unlocking doors Adjust head lamp on time after shut off LHA1403 WHA1404 LHA1405 Others settings Select the Others key Comfort settings lan guage and units and Voice Recognition settings will be displayed Comfort settings Select the Others key then select the Com fort key The Comfort settings screen will be displayed You can set the following operating conditions by selecting the key for the desired item The indica tor light box at the right of the selected item alternately turns on and off each time the item is touched Indicator light is illuminated ON Indicator light is not illuminated OFF 4 10 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Auto Interior Illumination Select to turn on or turn off the illumination of the interior lights when any door is unlocked Light Sensitivity Select to adjust the sensitivity of the automatic headlights higher right or lower left After selecting the item touch the or key to change the setting Light Off
303. ich may prevent the system from recognizing voice commands correctly Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a command Otherwise the command will not be received properly e Start speaking a command within 5 seconds after the tone sounds e Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words Giving voice commands To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition press and release the amp button located on the steering wheel After the tone sounds speak a command The command given is picked up by the micro phone and voice feedback is given when the command is accepted If you need to hear the available commands for the current menu again say Help and the system will repeat them Ifa command is not recognized the system announces Command not recognized Please try again Repeat the command ina clear voice If you want to go back to the previous com mand you can say Go back or Correc tion any time the system is waiting for a response You can cancel a command when the sys tem is waiting for a response by saying Cancel or Quit The system announces Cancel and ends the VR session You can also press and hold the button on the steering wheel for 5 seconds at any time to end the VR session Whenever the VR ses sion is cancelled a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system Ifyou want to adjust the volume of the voice feedback press t
304. ide the player If there is wait until the condensation is gone about 1 hour before using the player If there is a temperature increase error the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature If there is a mixture of music CD files CD DA data and compressed audio files on a CD only the music CD files CD DA data will be played Cannot play Files with extensions other than MP3 WMA AAC M4A or AA3 cannot be played In addition the character codes and number of charac ters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications Check if the disc or file is generated in an irregular format This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of the compressed audio file writ ing application or other text editing applications Check if the finalization process such as session close and disc close is done for the disc Check if the CD DVD USB device is protected by copyright Poor sound quality Check if the CD DVD is scratched or dirty It takes a relatively long time If there are many folders or file levels on the CD DVD USB device or if it is a multisession disc some time may be required before the music starts before the music starts playing playing The writing software and hardware combination might not match or the writing speed writing depth writing width etc might not match the specifications Try using the slowest writing speed
305. ift selector in neutral and the parking brake on This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the ignition switch with the clutch and the brake pedal depressed NISSAN Intelligent Key insertion indica tor This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key needs to be inserted into the Intelligent Key port For example the Intelligent Key battery is dis charged If this indicator illuminates insert the Intelligent Key into the Intelligent Key port in the correct direction See Push button ignition switch in the Starting and driving section NISSAN Intelligent Key removal indica tor This indicator illuminates when the driver s door is opened with the ignition switch placed in the OFF position and the Intelligent Key placed in the Intelligent Key port A key reminder chime also sounds If this indicator illuminates remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelligent Key port and take it with you when leaving the vehicle NISSAN Intelligent Key battery dis charge indicator This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power If this indicator illuminates replace the battery with a new one See NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Maintenance and do it yourself section Loose fuel cap warning This warning appears when the fuel filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled See Fuel filler cap in the Pre d
306. ight To access the bulbs in the rear combination light Remove the fasteners Carefully push back the carpet Remove the 2 nuts and pull out the rear combination light Rotate the bulb s counterclockwise and pull out to remove Turn signal light Sidemarker light Tail stop light Backup light WDI0635 Maintenance and do it yourself 8 35 WDI0343 Trunk light 8 36 Maintenance and do it yourself WDI0320 High mounted stoplight rear window UPPER TETHER ANCHOR KEY CYLINDER COVERS ACAUTION Never force the covers into place because the hinge pins can be damaged Follow the removal and installation instructions to prevent inoperability of the covers LDI2009 LDI2010 LDI2011 REMOVING COVERS FROM REAR 2 Rotate the cover in the direction shown INSTALLING COVERS TO REAR PARCEL SHELF disengaging the hinge at and slide the PARCEL SHELF second pin from the hinge 2 and remove Remove the top tether anchor cover or key cylin the cover der cover as follows ACAUTION 1 Lift the cover to the full open position Make sure that the hinge is completely aligned with the pin If the pin is forced into position it may break Install the top tether anchor cover or key cylinder cover as follows 1 With the pin on one end kept free of its hinge align the pin of the other end and slide it into the hinge Maintenance and do it yoursel
307. ight control switch is in the AUTO or 2 Turn the control left or right to adjust the bright ness of the instrument panel lights when driving at night position TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Turn signal Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction When the turn is com pleted the turn signals cancel automatically Lane change signal To signal a lane change move the lever up or down to the point where the indicator light begins to flash but the lever does not latch Instruments and controls 2 33 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH LIC1089 r LIC0394 FOG LIGHT SWITCH if so equipped To turn the fog lights on turn the headlight switch to the 2 position then turn the fog light switch to the 0 position To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch in the AUTO position if so equipped the head lights must be on then turn the fog light switch to the 4D position To turn the fog lights off turn the fog light switch to the OFF position The headlights must be on and the low beams selected for the fog lights to operate The fog lights automatically turn off when the high beam headlights are selected 2 34 Instruments and controls Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency condi tions All turn signal lights flash AWARNING e If stopping for an emergency be sure to move the vehicle well off the road Do not use t
308. ile lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes Do this until the brakes return to normal Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly ANTI LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM ABS AWARNING e The Anti lock Braking System ABS is a sophisticated device but it cannot pre vent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces Remem ber that stopping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS Stopping dis tances may also be longer on rough gravel or snow covered roads or if you are using tire chains Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you Ultimately the driver is respon sible for safety e Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness When replacing tires install the specified size of tires on all four wheels When installing a spare tire make sure that it is the proper size and type as specified on the Tire and Loading Information label See Tire and Loading Information label in the Technical and consumer informa tion section of this manual For detailed information see Wheels and tires in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section of this manual The Anti lock Braking System ABS controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when braking on slippery s
309. iler To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers Always place the container on the ground when filling Do not use electronic devices when filling Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are fill ing it Use only approved portable fuel con tainers for flammable liquid A CAUTION The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will ap pear if the fuel filler cap is not properly tightened Failure to tighten the fuel filler cap properly after the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears may cause the ENGINE Malfunction Indicator Light MIL to illuminate 3 26 Pre driving checks and adjustments Failure to tighten the fuel filler cap SERVICE properly may cause the ENGINE Mal function Indicator Light MIL to illumi nate If the ENGINE light illuminates be cause the fuel filler cap is loose or missing tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle SERVICE The ENGINE light should turn off after a few driving trips If the ENGINE light does not turn off after a few driving trips have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer For additional information see the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL in the Instruments and Controls section in this manual If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body flush it away with water to avoid paint damage LPD0448 Coupe To remove the fuel filler cap 1 Turn the fuel filler cap co
310. in jure or kill your child See Child re straints earlier in this section for details Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 45 Do not lean against the door SSS0101 A WARNING Front seat mounted side impact supple mental air bags and roof mounted curtain side impact supplemental air bags The side air bags and curtain air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact rear impact rollover or lower severity side collision Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents A WARNING The seat belts the side air bags and curtain air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor The side air bag and curtain air bag inflate with great force Do not allow anyone to place their hand leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations 1 46 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0032 AWARNING When sitting in the rear seat do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat If the side air bag inflates you may be serio
311. in air bag system components will be hot Do not touch them you may severely burn yourself No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems This is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain air bag or damage to the side air bag and curtain air bag systems Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle s electrical system sus pension system or side panel This could affect proper operation of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems Tampering with the side air bag system may result in serious personal injury For example do not change the front seats by placing material near the seat backs or by installing additional trim material such as seat covers around the side air bag Work around and on the side air bag and curtain air bag system should be done by a NISSAN dealer Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer The SRS wir ing harnesses should not be modified or disconnected Unauthorized electri cal test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag or curtain air bag system The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification When selling your vehicle we request that you inform the buyer about the side air bag and curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner s Manual Sea
312. in blinking Adjust the hours by turning the SCROLL TUNE knob left or right and press the ENTER button 3 The minutes will begin blinking Adjust the minutes by turning the SCROLL TUNE knob left or right and press the ENTER button iPod MENU button This button can only be used for iPod opera tions See iPod player operation without Navi gation System later in this section for details about the function of this button FM AM SAT radio operation AM FM button Press the AM FM button to change the band as follows AM FM1 FM2 AM If another audio source is playing when the AM FM button is pressed the audio source play ing will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will begin playing The FM stereo indicator STEREO is shown on the screen during FM stereo reception When the stereo broadcast signal is weak the radio auto matically changes from stereo to monaural re ception SAT band select Pressing the AUX button will change the band as follows AUX XM1 XM2 AUX satellite if so equipped When the AUX button is pressed while the igni tion switch is in the ACC or ON position the radio will come on at the station last played The last station played will also come on when the VOL ON OFF control knob is pressed to turn the radio on When the AUX button is pressed the satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an optional satellite receiver and
313. in serious accidents The power windows operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position If the driver s or passenger s door is opened during this period of about 45 seconds power to the windows is canceled Instruments and controls 2 43 WIC1124 2 44 Window lock button Power door lock switch Front passenger side automatic switch if so equipped Right rear passenger side sedan only Left rear passenger side sedan only Driver side automatic switch Instruments and controls Driver s side power window switch The driver s side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close all of the windows To open a window push the switch to the first detent and continue to hold down until the de sired window position is reached To close a window pull the switch to the first detent and continue to hold down until the desired window position is reached WIC1265 Front passenger s power window switch The passenger s window switch operates only the corresponding passenger s window To open the window push the switch to the first detent and continue to hold it down until the desired window position is reached To close the window pull the switch to the first detent and continue to hold it up until the desired window position is reached 2 It 7 LIC0718 Itt D LIC04
314. in this section 3 For all of the methods listed in Step 2 except Dial Number dialing commences when the listed name is selected Dialing commences when OK is selected if the number is input ted manually The screen changes to the Call in Progress screen 4 After the call is over perform one of the following to finish the call a Select the Hang up key on the Call in Progress screen b Press the wheel switch on the steering Incoming Call amp O 00 Answer Hold Call F XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX Reject Call LHA1323 RECEIVING A CALL When you hear a phone ring the display will change to phone mode To receive a call follow one of the procedures listed below a Select the Answer key on the display b Press the phone button on the steering wheel switches There are some options available when receiving a call Select one of the following displayed on the screen Answer Accept an incoming call to talk Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 113 Hold Call Put an incoming call on hold Reject Call Reject an incoming call To finish the call follow one of the procedures listed below a Select the Reject Call key on the display b Press and hold the phone button onthe steering wheel switches Go fl Yu 8 00 Call in Progress i 0 04 Hang up
315. in this section Volume amp beeps settings Navigation volume For navigation volume settings refer to the sepa rate Navigation System Owner s Manual for infor mation regarding these settings Phone volume For phone volume settings refer to Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with Navigation Sys tem in this section 4 12 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Settings gt Volume amp Beeps 8 00 aco Audio Volume I P cccccccccces DO Guidance Volume C lOssoccesossej gt Ringtone G P rccccccccce gt Incoming Call G P rccccccccce gt outgoing call C EZZ gt 1 7 Use volume knob to adjust during playback LHA1253 Switch beeps With this option on indicator light illuminated a beep will sound if any control panel button is pressed 12 BUTTON To change the display brightness press the 4 2 button Pressing the button again will change the display to the day or the night display If no operation is performed within 5 seconds the display will return to the previous display Settings gt Volume amp Beeps 8 00 Ringtone C P cccccccccce DO Incoming Call C lOssocccsossej gt Outgoing Call Tecoeg Switch Beeps ON Gudance Voice ON 37_ Use volume knob to adjust during playback LHA1254 Press a
316. ing light appears on the The ignition switch is placed in the OFF Move the shift selector to the P Park display and the outside chime sounds position and the shift selector is not in the P position continuously Park position When closing the door with the inside lock The outside chime sounds for approximately The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or Carry the Intelligent Key with you knob placed in the LOCK position 3 seconds and all the doors unlock trunk The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or Carry the Intelligent Key with you trunk When pushing the door handle request The outside chime sounds for approximately Joor is not closed securel Glose the door Securel switch to lock the door 2 seconds The door handle request switch is pushed Push the door handle request switch after before the door is closed the door is closed When closing the trunk lid The outside chime sounds for approximately The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk Carry the Intelligent Key with you seconds and the trunk lid opens 3 16 Pre driving checks and adjustments NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY WITHOUT DOOR AND TRUNK REQUEST SWITCHES AWARNING e Radio waves could adversely affect elec tric medical equipment Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pressed The FAA advises the radio w
317. int stalks with the holes in the seat Make sure the head restraint is facing the correct direction Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down Properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating position SPA1025 Front seat Active Head Restraints The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz ing the force that the seatback receives from the occupant in a rear end collision The movement of the head restraint helps support the occu pant s head by reducing its backward movement and helping absorb some of the forces that may lead to whiplash type injuries Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which it is said that whiplash injury occurs most Active Head Restraints operate only in certain rear end collisions After the collision the head restraints return to their original position Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as described in this section Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 13 SEAT BELTS j oa SSS0136 PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad justed and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and or the severi
318. inuously Vari Slip indicator light 2 16 able Transmission able Transmission CVT check warn CVT position indi ing light if so cator light if so Turn signal hazard 2 16 equipped equipped indicator lights Engine s iia 2 CRUISE Cruise main switch 2 14 Vehicle Dynamic 2 16 warning lig indicator light lt lt Control VDC OFF indicator light 2 11 2 11 2 11 2 12 12 0 12 Illustrated table of contents 1 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Seats era dentssawnnpigesenadl eens sh echoes 1 2 Child feStraintSy 0 cccchiiaasee need gradation sows 1 23 Front manual seat adjustment Precautions on child restraints 005 1 23 if so equipped 6 cece eect eee eee 1 2 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for Front power seat adjustment CHildren System nn unnan nanara rrr 1 25 if so equipped for driver s seat uenea 1 4 Rear facing child restraint installation using Folding rear Seat aii sige ole ak woud nada 1 8 LATCH 20sec e eee e eee eee eee eens 1 27 Head restraints s s osiicc vance kouvauau ede coms uaa 1 10 Rear facing child restraint installation using s S THE SCALIDESIES cdc esis eienaar E 1 29 eat balis cecair erorri ecreeeeei gees doomed 1 14 l a Precautions on seat belt usage u un 1 14 Forward facing child restraint installation USING LATGA i eE E n E A 1 32 Pregnant MOMON appn Et Enega ER E TEENA E ES ae Forward facing child rest
319. io file format This format allows for near CD quality sound but at a fraction of the size of normal audio files MP3 conversion of an audio track from CD ROM can reduce the file size by approximately a 10 1 ratio with virtually no perceptible loss in quality MP3 compression removes the redundant and irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the human ear doesn t hear WMA Windows Media Audio WMA is a compressed audio format created by Micro soft as an alternative to MP3 The WMA codec offers greater file compression than the MP8 codec enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the same amount of space when compared to MP3s at the same level of quality Bit rate Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital music file The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file e Sampling frequency Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital A D conversion per second Multisession Multisession is one of the methods for writing data to media Writing data once to the media is called a single session and writing more than once is called a multisession e D3 WMA Tag The ID3 WMA tag is the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that contains information about the digital music file such as song title artist encoding bit rate track time duration etc ID3 tag in
320. ion The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed When the self test occurs you may hear a clunk noise and or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction AWARNING e The VDC system is designed to help the driver maintain stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steer ing operation at high speeds or by care less or dangerous driving techniques Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully e Do not modify the vehicle s suspension If suspension parts such as shock ab sorbers struts springs stabilizer bars bushings and wheels are not NISSAN recommended for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated the VDC system may not operate properly This could adversely affect vehicle handling per formance and the R indicator may flash or both the ff and indi cator lights may illuminate If brake related parts such as brake pads rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated the VDC system may not Operate properly and both the f and the 2 indicator lights may illuminate e If engine control related parts are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated both the fR and 2 indicator lights may illuminate When driving on extr
321. ion key How to speak numbers Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers when giving voice commands Refer to the following examples General rule Only single digits O zero to 9 can be used When saying the phone number 800 662 6200 the system will accept eight hundred in addition to eight zero zero or eight oh oh 500 700 and 900 are also supported Examples 1 800 662 6200 One eight zero zero six six two six two zero zero One eight hundred six six two six two zero zero Improving Recognition of Phone numbers You can improve the recognition of phone num bers by saying the phone number in three groups of numbers For example when you try to call 800 662 6200 say eight zero zero first and the system will then ask you for the next three digits Then say six six two After recognition the system will then ask for the last four digits Say six two zero zero Using this method of phone digit entry can improve recognition perfor mance NOTE When speaking a house number speak the number 0 as zero or oh If the letter O is included in the house number it will not be recognized as 0 even if you speak oh instead of zero Settings menu The content of the Settings Menu differs when the system is in the Alternate Command Mode Command List Displays the command list for Alternate
322. ion If the driver s door or the front passenger s door is opened during this period of about 45 seconds power to the moon roof is canceled WIC1559 Sliding the moonroof To fully open the moonroof push the switch toward gt To fully close the moonroof push the switch toward LD To open or close the moonroof part way push the switch in any direction while the moonroof is sliding to stop it in the desired position Tilting the moonroof Close the moonroof by pushing the switch toward Release the switch then push the switch toward lt lt gt again to tilt the moonroof up To tilt the moonroof down push the switch toward LS A WARNING in an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open moonroof Always use seat belts and child restraints e Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the moonroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the moonroof is closing A CAUTION e Remove water drops snow ice or sand from the moonroof before opening e Do not place heavy objects on the moonroof or surrounding area Resetting the moonroof switch The moonroof switch may not operate properly and need to be reset if any of the following conditions have occurred the moonroof has been manually moved the moonroof motor has been removed and reinstalled after the moonroof has been re positioned or
323. ion does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit try another seating position or a different child restraint WRS0799 WRS0800 Forward facing web mounted step 3 Forward facing rigid mounted step 3 3 Secure the child restraint anchor attach ments to the LATCH lower anchors Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop erly attached to the lower anchors If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point See Installing top tether strap in this section Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seat ing positions that do not have a top tether anchor Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 33 LRSO671 Forward facing step 5 5 For child restraints that are equipped with webbing mounted attachments remove any additional slack from the anchor attach ments Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments 6 Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions to remove any slack WRS0697 Forward facing step 7 7 After attaching the child restraint test it be fore you place the child in it Push it from side
324. ion systems 4 111 Voicetag Confirm and store the voicetag Voicetags allow easy dialing using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system For more information see NISSAN Voice Recognition System in this section To delete an entry select the Delete key at step 3 HANDSET PHONEBOOK Many phones will support an automatic down load of the cellular phone s phonebook Since this method allows for up to 1000 numbers to be stored and entries are automatically assigned voice tags by the system this is a useful function for easy dialing supported by the Voice Recogni tion system Tai 8 00 aac Settings gt Phone d Edit Vehicle Phonebook Delete Phonebook Download Handset Phonebook Volume amp Ringtone Auto Downloaded Add or edit phonebook entries LHA1319 Transferring the handset phonebook If your cellular phone supports automatic down loading the system transfers the handset phone book automatically by default To ensure that this feature is activated press the SETTING button on the instrument panel and select the Phone key The Auto Downloaded selection should have the amber indicator next to the word ON activated Select the Auto Downloaded key to toggle this feature on or off 4 112 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems To transfer the handset phonebook to the vehicle manually follow these step
325. ions and step by step diagnostic and adjustment pro cedures this manual is the same one used by the factory trained technicians working at NISSAN dealerships Also available are genuine NISSAN Owner s Manuals and genuine NISSAN Service and Owner s Manuals for older NISSAN models For USA For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model year and later contact 1 800 450 9491 www nissan techinfo com For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model year and prior see a NISSAN dealer or contact 1 800 247 5321 For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Owner s Manuals for this model year and prior see a NISSAN dealer or contact 1 800 247 5321 For Canada To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser vice Manual or Owner s Manual please contact your nearest NISSAN dealer For the phone num ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area call the NISSAN Information Center at 1 800 387 0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa tive will assist you Also available are genuine NISSAN Service and Owner s Manuals for older NISSAN models IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION Unfortunately accidents do occur In this unlikely event there is some important information you should know Many insurance companies routinely authorize the use of non genuine collision parts in order to cut costs among other reasons Technical and consume
326. ire that has the same load rating as the factory in stalled tire Term of tubeless or tube type Indicates whether the tire requires an in ner tube tube type or not tubeless The word radial The word radial is shown if the tire has radial structure Manufacturer or brand name Manufacturer or brand name is shown Other Tire related Terminology In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section Intended Outboard Sidewall is 1 the sidewall that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire or 2 the out ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle TYPES OF TIRES A WARNING e When changing or replacing tires be sure all four tires are of the same type i e Summer All Season or Snow and construction A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type size speed rating and availability e Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire e For additional information regarding tires refer to Important Tire Safety In formation US or Tire Safety Informa
327. is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load ACAUTION e Your vehicle is not designed to run on E 85 fuel Using E 85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E 85 fuel can damage fuel system components and is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty e E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline U S government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi fied by a small square orange and black label with the common abbrevia tion or the appropriate percentage for that region API certification mark API service symbol WT10183 ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATIONS Selecting the correct oil It is essential to choose the correct grade quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance See Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants earlier in this section NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy Select only engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute API certification or Interna tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee ILSAC certification and SAE vis cosity standard These oils have the API certifica tion mark on the front of the container Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage Oil additives NISSAN does not recommend
328. issing Continuously Variable Transmission CVT check warning light if so equipped When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the light comes on for about 2 seconds If the light comes on at any other time it may indicate the CVT system is not functioning prop erly Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer 5 Engine oil pressure warning light This light warns of low engine oil pressure If the ight flickers or comes on during normal driving 2 12 Instruments and controls pull off the road in a safe area stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop The engine oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level Use the dipstick to check the oil level See Engine oil in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual ACAUTION Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause se rious damage to the engine almost imme diately Such damage is not covered by warranty Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so O Low tire pressure warning light Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare The low tire pressure warning light warns of low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not functioning properly After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position this light illuminat
329. ith number 1 until the problem is resolved Symptom System fails to interpret the command correctly The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the phone book 1 Ensure that the command is valid See List of voice commands in this section 4 Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive for example windows open or defroster on NOTE If it is too noisy to use the phone it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized 5 If more than one command was said at a time try saying the commands separately 6 If the system consistently fails to recognize commands the voice training procedure should be carried out to im prove the recognition response for the speaker See Speaker Adaptation SA mode in this section 1 Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored This can be confirmed by using the List Names command See Phonebook in this section 2 Replace one of the names being confused with a new name Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 105 BLUETOOTH HANDS FREE PHONE SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM if so equipped AWARNING e Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location If you have to use a phone while driving exercise extreme caution ai all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking o
330. ith only Genuine NISSAN parts WDI0402 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT A CAUTION Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire If any electrical equipment does not operate check for an open fuse 1 Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF 2 Pull the fuse box cover to remove 3 Remove the fuse with the fuse puller WDI0452 Type A 4 If the fuse is open replace it with an equivalent good fuse 5 Push the fuse box cover to install 6 If a new fuse also opens have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer Maintenance and do it yourself 8 25 LDI0456 Type B 8 26 Maintenance and do it yourself LDI2035 Extended storage switch if so equipped If any electrical equipment does not operate remove the extended storage switch and check for an open fuse NOTE The extended storage switch is used for long term vehicle storage Even if the ex tended storage switch is broken it is not necessary to replace it Replace only the open fuse in the switch with a new fuse How to replace the extended storage switch 1 To remove the extended storage switch be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position Be s
331. k e Copy from Call History The system will show a list of your incoming Phone gt Vehicle Phonebook o Yi 8 00 rack Phone gt Vehicle Phonebook o ME Yul Back U outgoing or missed calls that were down loaded from your cell phone depending on your phone s compatibility You may select one of these entries to save in the vehicle amp Call EM phonebook Edit Name INFORMATION Copy from the Handset E INFORMATION Delete Number XXX XXXX XXX XXXX Type 5 The system will show your cell phone s E phonebook that was downloaded depend Voicetag wh ing on your phone s compatibility You may select one of these entries to save in the vehicle phonebook LHA1382 LHA1383 e Editing the Vehicle Phonebook 5 Select the desired item to change 1 Press the button on the steering The following editing items are available wheel o Entry 2 Select the Vehicle Phonebook key Changes the displayed number of the se 3 Select the desired entry from the displayed lected entry list Name 4 Select the Edit key Edit the name of the entry using the keypad displayed on the screen Number Edit the phone number using the keypad displayed on the screen Type Select the icon from the icon list Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognit
332. k local state and provincial laws before installing Maintenance and do it yourself 8 45 studded tires Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded snow tires TIRE CHAINS ACAUTION Only certain SAE class S tire chains can be used on this vehicle Using the wrong Class S chains on this vehicle will cause damage to the vehicle If you plan to use tire chains cables you should use a tire chain that meets the minimum clearances for your vehicle 8 46 Maintenance and do it yourself OJo LDI0574 Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location Check the local laws before installing tire chains When installing tire chains make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer s suggestions Use a tire chain that is designed to provide the specified space between the installed tire chain and where the tire meets the rim as shown on the chart Wheel size Minimum space required 16 in 7 in 17 mm 17 in 2 in 4 mm 18 in 2 in 4 mm A tire chain that provides the specified amount of space will provide the necessary clearance be tween the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tires Other types may damage your vehicle Use chain tensioners when re
333. k succession or the igni tion switch is pushed and held for more than 2 seconds If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven this could lead to a crash and serious injury LSD2000 When the ignition switch is pushed without de pressing the brake pedal CVT or the clutch pedal M T the ignition switch position will illu minate as follows Push center once to change to ACC two times to change to ON three times to return to OFF The ignition switch will automatically return to the LOCK position when any door is either opened or closed with the switch in the OFF position Starting and driving 5 7 The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch position cannot be switched to OFF until the shift selector is moved to the P Park position CVT or N Neutral position M T When the ignition switch cannot be pushed to ward the OFF position proceed as follows 1 Move the shift selector into the P Park position CVT or N Neutral position M T 2 Push the ignition switch The ignition switch position will change to the ON position 3 Push the ignition switch again to the OFF position The shift selector can be moved from the P Park position if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the brake pedal is depressed If the battery of the vehicle is discharged the push button ignition switch cannot be moved from the LOCK position Some indicators and warnings
334. ke pedal before moving the shift selector out of the P Park position 2 Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift selector into a driving gear 3 Release the foot brake then gradually start the vehicle in motion 4 Stop the vehicle completely before shifting the shift selector to the P Park position The CVT is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from P Park to any drive position while the ignition switch is in the ON position The shift selector cannot be moved out of P Park and into any of the other gear posi tions if the ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK position WSD0248 To move the shift selector Press the button while depressing the m brake pedal D Press the button to shift D Shift without pressing button Shifting After starting the engine fully depress the brake pedal and move the shift selector from P Park to any of the desired shift positions Starting and driving 5 13 AWARNING Apply the parking brake if the shift selec tor is in any position while the engine is not running Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage P Park A CAUTION To prevent transmission damage use the P Park or R Reverse position only when the vehicle is completely stopped Use the P Park shift selector position when the vehicle is parked
335. km also in cases of a flat tire etc e Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation e For additional information re garding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Infor mation Booklet WDI0259 1 Wear indicator 2 Location mark Tire wear and damage AWARNING Tires should be periodically in spected for wear cracking bulg ing or objects caught in the tread If excessive wear cracks bulging or deep cuts are found the tire s should be replaced Maintenance and do it yourself 8 47 The original tires have built in tread wear indicators When the wear indicators are visible the tire s should be replaced Tires degrade with age and use Have tires including the spare over 6 years old checked by a qualified technician because some tire damage may not be ob vious Replace the tires as neces sary to prevent tire failure and possible personal injury Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious personal in jury If it is necessary to repair the spare tire contact a NISSAN dealer For additional information re garding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Infor mation Booklet 8 48 Maintenance and do it yourself Replacing wheels and tires When replacing a tire use the same size tread design
336. l function Dehumidified defrosting or defogging 1 Press the defroster control button GY to turn the system on The indicator light in the button will illuminate 2 Turn the temperature dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows turn the manual fan control to HI e As soon as possible after the windshield is clean press the AUTO button to return to the auto mode e When the GY control is activated the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures above 36 F 2 C This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield The air recirculation mode automatically turns off allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compart ment to further improve the defogging per formance Rear window defroster switch For more information about the rear window de froster switch see Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch in the Instruments and controls section of this manual MANUAL OPERATION Fan speed control Turn the fan control dial S manually control the fan speed left or right to Press the gs off OFF button to turn the system Press the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed Air recirculation Push the air recirculation button gt to recir culate interior air inside the vehicle The indicator light on the switch will come on The air recirculati
337. l times to skip back several tracks Each time the button is pressed the CD moves back 1 track aK To pause the sound while a CD is playing press the X pause mute button Pause is shown on the display Press the X button again to resume playing the CD RDM RPT button When the RDM RPT button is pressed while the compact disc is being played the play pattern can be changed as follows VW SEEK TRACK button pause mute button Random Disc gt Repeat Track Normal Random Disc The order of the tracks on the disc will be mixed during play Repeat Track The track that is currently playing will be repeated SCAN CDs button Press the SCAN button less than 1 5 seconds to scan all tracks of the current disc for 10 seconds per track The SCAN icon is flashed during scan mode The scan mode is canceled once it scans through all tracks on the disc or if the SCAN button is pressed during scan mode 4 CD EJECT When the amp button is pressed with a com pact disc loaded the compact disc will be ejected When the amp button is pressed while the compact disc is playing the compact disc will eject and the system will turn off CD IN indicator A CD icon indicator appears on the display when a CD is loaded with the system on AUX Auxiliary button The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard analog audio input
338. l Number Redial Call Back Speak name If you have stored entries in the phonebook you can dial a number associated with a name and location See Phonebook in this section to learn how to store entries When prompted by the system say the name of the phone book entry you wish to call The system acknowledges the name If there are multiple locations associated with the name the system asks you to choose the loca tion Once you have confirmed the name and location the system begins the call 4 98 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Speak Digits When prompted by the system say the number you wish to call Refer to How to say numbers and Making a call by entering a phone number in this section for more details Special Number For dialing more than 10 digits or any special characters say Special Number When the system acknowledges the command the system will prompt you to speak the number Redial Use the Redial command to call the last number that was dialed The system acknowledges the command re peats the number and begins dialing If a redial number does not exist the system announces There is no number to redial and ends the VR session Call Back Use the Call Back command to dial the number of the last incoming call within the vehicle The system acknowledges the command re
339. l the names and locations in the phone book The system recites the phone book entries but does not include the actual phone numbers When the playback of the list is complete the system goes back to the main menu You can stop the playback of the list at any time by pressing the button on the steering wheel The system ends the VR session See the Record name command in this section for infor mation about recording custom voice tags for list entries that the system has difficulty pronounc ing Transfer Entry Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new name in the system When prompted by the system say the name you would like to give the new entry For example say Mary If the name is too long or too short the system tells you then prompts you for a name again Also if the name sounds too much like a name already stored the system tells you then prompts you for a name again The system will ask you to transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone s memory Enter a phone number by voice command For example say five five five one two one two See How to say numbers in this section for more information To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone s memory Say Transfer entry The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate the transfer from the phone handset The new contact phone number will be transferred from the cellular p
340. l the tone sounds before speaking a command Speak in a natural conversational voice with out pausing between words If the air conditioner is set to Auto the fan speed is automatically lowered so that your commands can be recognized more easily ENTER g Dp E2 LHA0768 GIVING VOICE COMMANDS 1 Pressthe amp ing wheel switch located on the steer Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 121 8 00 Voice Recognition 3 Kd 44 Phone 4 Navigation i 4 Information jL Practice 4 Audio 4 Help To exit hold the TALK switch LHA1333 2 A list of commands appears on the screen and the system announces Would you like to access Phone Navigation Information Audio or Help 3 After the tone sounds and the icon on the screen changes from B to B a command 4 Continue to follow the voice menu prompts and speak after the tone sounds until your desired operation is completed speak Operating tips e Say a command after the tone Voice com mands cannot be accepted when the icon is B Commands that are available are always shown on the display and spoken through voice menu prompts Commands other than those that are displayed are not accepted Please follow the prompts given by the system If the command is not recognized the sys tem repeats the
341. label also referred to as the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label is located in the driver s door opening For additional information see Low tire pressure warning light in the Instruments and controls section and Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the In case of emergency section AWARNING e If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking reduce vehicle speed pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible Driving with under inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an acci dent and could result in serious per sonal injury Check the tire pressure for all four tires Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Informa tion label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF If you have a flat tire replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible See Flat tire in the In case of emergency section for changing a flat tire When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute The light will remain on after 1 minute Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire repla
342. lash 3 times to confirm that the horn beep feature has been deactivated To activate Press and hold the and a buttons for at least 2 seconds once more The hazard warning lights will flash once and the horn will sound once to confirm that the horn beep feature has been reactivated Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si lence the horn if the alarm is triggered WARNING SIGNALS To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in the instrument panel When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is displayed be sure to check the vehicle and the Intelligent Key See the Troubleshooting guide that follows and Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls section of this manual Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 21 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are programmed for the vehicle If another Intelligent Key is in range or inside the vehicle the vehicle system may respond differently than expected The SHIFT P warning appears on the dis play and the inside warning chime sounds continuously When pushing the ignition switch to stop the engine When opening the driver s door to get out of the vehicle The inside warning chime sounds continuously T
343. le when this mode is active as some Standard Mode com mands are replaced Please see examples of Alternate Command Mode screens Please note that in this mode the recognition success rate may be affected as the number of available commands and ways of speaking each command are increased You can turn this mode ON or OFF When this mode is activated the Voice Recognition Settings will change to show more options Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 129 Settings gt Others 8 00 Comfort Language amp Units Voice Recognition Adjust comfort amp convenience settings LHA1403 8 00 Settings gt Voice Recognition User Guide Alternate Command Mode Guide the usage of Voice Recognition LHA1331 Settings gt Voice Recognition 8 00 Command List User Guide Speaker Adaptation Alternate Command Mode ll Minimize Voice Feedback Change the mode of Voice Recognition LHA1341 Activating Alternate Command Mode 1 Press the SETTING button on the instru ment panel 2 Select the Others key on the display 3 Select the Voice Recognition key a A Select the Alternate Command Mode key The confirmation message is displayed on the screen Select the OK key to activate the Alternate Command Mode 4
344. least 20 Ibs 9 kg can be placed in a forward facing child restraint Refer to the manufacturer s instructions for minimum and maximum weight and height recommendations NISSAN recom mends that small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer s instructions for installation and use LARGER CHILDREN Children who are too large for child restraints should be seated and restrained by the seat belts which are provided The seat belt may not fit properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in 142 5 cm tall and weighs between 40 Ibs 18 kg and 80 Ibs 36 kg A booster seat should be used to obtain proper seat belt fit NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a commercially available booster seat if the shoul der belt fits close to the face or neck or if the lap portion of the seat belt goes across the abdo men The booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the top middle portion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips A booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three point type seat belt The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certi fying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
345. ligent Key components when register ing new keys be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer A key number plate is supplied with your keys Record the key number and keep it in a safe place such as your wallet not in the vehicle If you lose your keys see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from If you still have a key your NISSAN dealer can duplicate it ACAUTION Listed below are conditions or occur rences which will damage the Intelligent Key e Do not allow the Intelligent Key which contains electrical components to come into contact with water or salt water This could affect the system function e Do not drop the Intelligent Key Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key If the Intelligent Key gets wet im mediately wipe until it is completely dry Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where tem peratures exceed 140 F 60 C Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field such as a TV audio equipment and personal co
346. line 4 cycle DOHC Cylinder arrangement 4 cylinder in line 6 cylinder V block Slanted at 60 Bore x Stroke in mm 3 5 x 3 9 89 0 x 100 0 3 760 x 3 205 95 5 x 81 4 Displacement cu in cm8 151 82 2 488 213 45 3 498 Firing order 1 3 4 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 Idle speed M T CVT in N position No adjustment is necessary Ignition timing degree B T D C at idle speed CO at idle Spark plug DILKAR6A 1 1 FXE22HR 11 Spark plug gap Nominal in mm 0 043 1 1 0 043 1 1 Camshaft operation Timing chain Timing chain This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES 002 Technical and consumer information 9 7 WHEELS AND TIRES DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Coupe Sedan Overall length in mm 180 9 4 595 190 7 4 844 Wheel type Size Offset in mm Overall width in mm 70 7 1 795 70 7 1 795 Aluminum Steel 16x 7JJ 1 77 45 Overall height in mm 56 0 1 423 58 0 1 473 i Front track in mm 61 0 1 550 61 0 1 550 Aluminum 17x7 1 2JJ 1 77 45 Rear track in mm 61 2 1 554 61 1 1 551 Aluminum 18 x 8 0JJ 1 77 45 Wheelbase in mm 105 3 2 675 109 3 2 775 Gross vehicle weight Ib kg T type Spare 16 x 4T 1 57 40 rang ae See the F M V S S C M V S S certification la i A ross axle weight rating bel on the center pillar between the driver s side Tire size P215 60R16 Front Ib kg front and rear doors P215 55R17 Rear Ib kg P235 45R18 Spare tire Alloy T135 90D16 Steel T13
347. lps retain new vehicle appearance Polishing is recommended to remove built up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re applying wax A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash ing Follow the instructions supplied with the wax Do not use a wax containing any abrasives cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks REMOVING SPOTS Remove tar and oil spots industrial dust insects and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store UNDERBODY In areas where road salt is used in winter it is necessary to clean the underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un derbody and suspension Before the winter pe riod and again in the spring the underseal must be checked and if necessary retreated Ot WA I0005 GLASS When cleaning the rear window it may be easier to clean if the high mounted stop light if so equipped is removed first Be careful when removing the high mounted stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the high mounted stop light wires
348. ly with water to clean the meter and gauge lens AWARNING Do not use water or acidic cleaners hot steam cleaners on the seat This can damage the seat or occupant classifica tion sensor This can also affect the opera tion of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury A CAUTION e Never use benzine thinner or any simi lar material e Small dirt particles can be abrasive and damaging to leather surfaces and should be removed promptly Do not use saddle soap car waxes polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners as they may damage the leather s natural finish e Never use fabric protectors unless rec ommended by the manufacturer e Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers It may dam age the lens cover AIR FRESHENERS Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect the vehicle interior If you use an air freshener take the following precautions Hanging type air fresheners can cause per manent discoloration when they contact ve hicle interior surfaces Place the air fresh ener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an interior surface Liquid type air fresheners typically clip on the vents These products can cause imme diate damage and discoloration when spilled on interior surfaces Carefully read and follow the manufacturer s in structions before using the air fresheners FLOOR MATS A WAR
349. mage to the equipment e Make sure the Intelligent Key is in the correct direction when inserting it to the Intelligent Key port The engine may not start if it is in the wrong direction e Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelligent Key port after the ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK position NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer system will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered key If the engine fails to start using a registered key for example when interference is caused by another registered key an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring restart the engine using the following pro cedure 1 Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds Starting and driving 5 9 2 Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 10 seconds 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 4 Restart the engine while holding the device which may have caused the interference separate from the registered key If the no start condition re occurs NISSAN rec ommends placing the registered key on a sepa rate key ring to avoid interference from other devices 5 10 Starting and driving BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear Check fluid levels such as engine oil cool ant brake fluid and windshield washer fluid as frequently as possible or at least when
350. mation 2 See a NISSAN dealer for assistance 8 30 Maintenance and do it yourself Coupe 1 ODNOAARWN Mirror mounted turn signal light if so equipped Interior light Map light Headlamp assembly Fog light if so equipped Step light High mount stoplight Trunk light License plate light Rear combination light Maintenance and do it yourself 8 31 WDI0680 8 32 Maintenance and do it yourself Sedan OANOAIRON gt Rear map light Front map light Step light Headlamp assembly Fog light if so equipped High mount stoplight if so equipped Trunk light Spoiler mounted stoplight if so equipped Rear combination light License plate light Mirror mounted turn signal light if so equipped WDI0306 Replacement procedures All other lights are either type A B C or D When replacing a bulb first remove the lens light and or cover f t Indicates bulb removal Indicates bulb installation LDI0341 Step light Use a cloth to protect the housing Maintenance and do it yourself 8 33 IEZ S CE WDI0723 Map light Use a cloth to protect the housing 8 34 Maintenance and do it yourself WDI0670 Personal light if so equipped Use a cloth to protect the housing Interior light Use a cloth to protect the housing WDI0632 Rear combination l
351. meLink to complete the programming which may require a ladder and another per son for convenience 6 Press and release the smart or learn pro gram button located on the garage door opener s motor to activate the training mode This button is usually located near the antenna wire that hangs down from the motor If the wire originates from under a light lens you will need to remove the lens to access the program button NOTE Once you have pressed and released the program button on the garage door open er s motor and the training light is lit you have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7 Use the help of a second person for conve nience to assist when performing this step 7 Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas ing the garage door opener s program but ton quickly and firmly press and release the HomeLink button you ve just programmed Press and release the HomeLink button up to 3 times to complete the training 8 Your HomeLink button should now be pro grammed To program the remaining HomeLink buttons for additional door or gate openers follow steps 2 4 only NOTE Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to clear all previously programmed HomeLink buttons If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink buttons refer to the HomeLink web site at www homelink com or call 1 800 355 3515 PROGRAMMING HOMELINK FOR CANADIAN C
352. ment panel When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is displayed be sure to check the vehicle and the Intelligent Key See the Troubleshooting guide that follows and Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls section of this manual Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 15 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Key is in range or inside the vehicle the vehicle system may respond differently than expected Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are programmed for the vehicle If another Intelligent When pushing the ignition switch to stop Nee HC lier ele The shift selector is not in the P Park Satie shift selector to the P Park the engine continuously position When opening the driver s door to get out The inside warning chime sounds position position port gent Key port The NO KEY warning appears on the Place the ignition switch in the OFF display the outside chime sounds 3 times The ignition switch is placed in the ACC or position and the inside warning chime sounds for ON position approximately 3 seconds When closing the door after getting out of The NO KEY warning appears on the dis The ignition switch is placed in the ACC Move the shift selector to the P Park posi the vehicle play and the outside chime sounds position and the shift selector is not in the P tion and place the ignition switch in the continuously Park position OFF position The shift P warn
353. mputers SI SPA1951 Mechanical key The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key To remove the mechanical key release the lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key To install the mechanical key firmly insert it into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to the lock position Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors trunk lid glove box and rear seatback lock See Doors and Trunk lid in this section Stor age in the Instruments and controls section Seats in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section and Up per tether anchor key cylinder covers in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual ACAUTION Always carry the mechanical key installed in the Intelligent Key slot Valet hand off When you have to leave a key with a valet give them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the me chanical key with you to protect your belongings To prevent the glove box and the trunk from being opened during valet hand off follow the proce dures below 1 Push the trunk cancel switch to the OFF position 2 Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli gent Key 3 Lock the glove box and the rear seats with the mechanical key 4 Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and keep the mechanical key with you See Trunk lid in this section Storage in the Instruments and control
354. n Ds Drive Sport mode Move the shift se lector over from D Drive to the left into the manual shift gate The position indicator in the meter shows a Ds In Ds Drive Sport mode transmission operation changes to Sporty driving shift operation creating a more aggressive acceleration feeling than the D Drive mode and a gear change sen sation when the driver accelerates quickly When the driver selects M Manual mode ratio with shift selector during Ds Drive Sport mode operation the driver must move the shift selector from Ds mode to D mode and back again to re select Ds Drive Sport mode To cancel the Ds mode return the shift se lector to the D Drive position The trans mission returns to the automatic drive mode The CVT can operate in a manual drive mode M Manual mode With the shift selector in the manual shift gate Ds Drive Sport mode M Manual mode can be selected by mov ing the shift selector up or down In M mode the transmission will produce notice able upshifts and downshifts The position indicator in the meter shows a M Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment NOTE Engine power may be automatically re duced to protect the CVT if the engine speed increases quickly when driving on slippery roads or while being tested on some dynamometers Starting the vehicle 1 After starting the engine fully depress the foot bra
355. n D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department toll free at 1 800 NISSAN 1 For Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a de fect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immedi ately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying NISSAN If Transport Canada receives complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may request that NISSAN con duct a recall campaign However Trans port Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or NISSAN You may contact Transport Canada s De fect Investigations and Recalls Division toll free at 1 800 333 0510 You may also report safety defects online at https wwwapps tc gc ca Saf Sec Sur 7 PCDB BDPP Index aspx Technical and consumer information 9 25 Additional information concerning motor vehicle safety may be obtained from Transport Canada s Road Safety Informa tion Centre at 1 800 333 0371 or online at www tc gc ca roadsafety To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns please contact our Consumer Information Centre toll free at 1 800 387 0122 9 26 Technical and consumer information READINESS FOR INSPECTION MAINTENANCE I M TEST Due to legal requirements in some states and Canadian Provinces your vehicl
356. n the phone pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle microphone location 0 ACAUTION To avoid discharging the vehicle battery use a phone after starting the engine WHA1501 Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System If you have a com patible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module With Bluetooth wireless technology you can 4 106 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems make or receive a hands free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle Once your cellular phone is connected to the in vehicle phone module no other phone con necting procedure is required Your phone is automatically connected with the in vehicle phone module when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with the connected cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth cellular phones to the in vehicle phone module However you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the phone commands so dialing a phone number using your voice is possible For more details see NISSAN Voice Recognition System in this sec tion Before using the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System refer to the following notes Set up the wireless connecti
357. n ac cident To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Repair and replacement procedure The front air bags side air bags curtain air bags and pretensioners are designed to inflate on a one time only basis As a reminder unless it is damaged the supplemental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has occurred Repair and replacement of these supplemental air bag systems should be done only by a NISSAN dealer When maintenance work is required on the ve hicle the front air bags side air bags curtain air bags pretensioners and related parts should be pointed out to the person performing the mainte nance The ignition should always be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle AWARNING e Once a front air bag side air bag or curtain air bag has inflated the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced Additionally if any of the front air bags inflate the activated pretensioners must also be replaced The air bag module and pretensioners should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer The air bag module and pretensioners cannot be repaired 1 57 The front air bag side air bag curtain air bag systems and the pretensioner system should be inspected by a NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the
358. n oper ates only when the engine is running Rear window defroster switch For more information about the rear window de froster switch see Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch in the Instruments and controls section of this manual HEATER OPERATION Heating This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot outlets Some air also flows from the defrost outlets and the side vent outlets 4 20 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 1 Press the gt button to the OFF position for normal heating 2 Press the yi air flow control button 3 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion 4 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position between the middle and the hot position Ventilation This mode directs outside air to the side and center ventilators 1 Press the gt button to the OFF position 2 Press the 3 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion air flow control button 4 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position Defrosting or defogging This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to defrost defog the windows 1 Press the defrost defog button OY 2 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion 3 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position between the middle and the hot position To quickly remove ice or fog from the win dows turn the fan control dial to th
359. n systems For Navigation system control buttons refer to the separate Navigation System Owner s Manual When you use this system make sure the engine is running If you use the system with the engine not running ignition ON or ACC for a long time it will discharge the battery and the engine will not start Reference symbols Example Words marked in quotes refer to a key shown only on the display These keys can be selected by touching the screen HOW TO USE THE TOUCH SCREEN A CAUTION The glass screen on the liquid crystal display may break if it is hit with a hard or sharp object If the glass breaks do not touch the liquid crystalline material which contains a small amount of mer cury Doing so could result in an injury In case of contact with skin wash im mediately with soap and water To clean the display never use a rough cloth alcohol benzine thinner or any kind of solvent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning agent They will scratch or deteriorate the panel Do not splash any liquid such as water or car fragrance on the display Contact with liquid will cause the system to malfunction To help ensure safe driving some functions can not be operated while driving The on screen functions that are not available while driving will be grayed out or muted Park the vehicle in a safe location and then oper ate the navigation system AWARNING e ALWAYS give you
360. nal Call command for all other formats and when special characters such as star pound and plus need to be entered If you say Change Number during phone number entry the system will automatically request that you repeat the number using the 3 3 4 format In this case please say the area code first and then follow the prompts Do not add a 1 in front of the area code when speaking phone numbers If the system does not recognize your com mand please try repeating the command using a natural voice Speaking too slowly or too loudly may further decrease recognition performance Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 127 Voice Recognition 8 00 j El 44 Phone 7 Navigation 4 Information Practice ote Audio 4 Help 2 To exit hold the TALK switch Voice Recognition gt Phone Yall 8 00 Phone Ee 4 Dial Number 49 Vehicle Phonebook 4 Handset Phonebook 4 Call History 4 Intemational Call To exit hold the TALK switch LHA0768 LHA1333 LHA1334 Example 2 Placing an international call 2 The system announces Would you like to 4 Say International Call to the phone number 011 81 111 222 3333 access Phone Navigation Information Au dio or Help 1 Pressthe switch located on the steer ing wheel 3 Sa
361. native to the voice command Help you may access the command list using the fol lowing steps 1 Press the INFO button on the instrument panel 2 Select the Voice Recognition key NOTE You can skip steps 1 and 2 if you say Help 3 Select the Command List key 4 Select a category The command list for the category selected is shown If necessary scroll the screen to view the entire list 6 Select the Back key to return to the previ ous screen Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 131 Alternate Command Mode command list Phone Command Makes a call to a contact in the handset phonebook Makes a allio contain the handset phonebook SS 4 132 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Navigation Command Zoom Out lt 1 to 13 gt Changes the map scale to a larger number Guidance Voice ON OFF Turns the navigation voice guidance on or off Guide Voice Repeat Repeats the last navigation voice guidance Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 133 Information Command COMMAND ACTION Traffic Information Turns the traffic information system on and off Displays the current vehicle location Weather Information Displays weather information Weather Map Displays the current weather map Audio Command CD 3 USB i foo E FUSE eins tothe USBaudiompet SSCS 4 134 Monitor climate audio phone and
362. nce mode earlier in this section 2 Oil filter replacement indicator This indicator appears when the customer set distance comes for replacing the oil filter You can set or reset the distance for replac ing the oil filter See Maintenance mode earlier in this section 3 Tire replacement indicator This indicator appears when the customer set distance comes for replacing tires You can set or reset the distance for replacing tires See Maintenance mode earlier in this section AWARNING The tire replacement indicator is not a substitute for regular tire checks includ ing tire pressure checks See Changing Wheels and Tires in Maintenance amp Do It Yourself section Many factors includ ing tire inflation alignment driving habits and road conditions affect tire wear and when tires should be replaced Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance does not mean your tires will last that long Use the tire replace ment indicator as a guide only and always perform regular tire checks Failure to per form regular tire checks including tire pressure checks could result in tire fail ure Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to a collision which could result in serious personal injury or death 4 OTHER indicator This indicator appears when the customer set distance comes for checking or replac ing maintenance items other than the engine oil oil filter and
363. nce and do it yourself A CAUTION e Do not ground accessories directly to the battery terminal Doing so will by pass the variable voltage control sys tem and the vehicle battery may not charge completely e Use electrical accessories with the en gine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage control system This system measures the amount of electrical discharge from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator The current sensor is located near the battery along the negative battery cable If you add elec trical accessories to your vehicle be sure to ground them to a suitable body ground such as the frame or engine block area DRIVE BELT WDI0673 QR25DE engine Power steering fluid pump pulley Water pump pulley Generator Air conditioner Crankshaft pulley Drive belt Automatic tensioner AWARNING Be sure the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belt The engine could rotate unexpectedly Oo f ON Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear cuts fraying or looseness If the belt is in poor condition or is loose have it replaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer Have the belt checked regularly for condi tion and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule found in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide SPARK PLUGS NOaRON gt a N
364. nd hold the d button for more than two seconds to turn the display off Press the button again to turn the display on REARVIEW MONITOR if so equipped When the shift selector is shifted into the R Reverse position the monitor display shows a rearward view from the vehicle A WARNING e The system is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary ob jects to help avoid damaging the ve hicle The system will not detect small objects below the bumper and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground The RearView Monitor is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper back ing Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up Always back up slowly e Objects viewed in the RearView Moni tor differ from actual distance because a wide angle lens is used e Make sure that the trunk is securely closed when backing up e Do not put anything on the rearview camera The rearview camera is in stalled beside the license plate light When washing the vehicle with high pressure water be sure not to spray it around the camera Otherwise water may enter the camera unit causing wa ter condensation on the lens a mal function fire or an electric shock e Do not strike the camera It is a preci sion instrument Otherwise it may mal function or cause damage resulting ina fire or an electric shock A CAUTION There is a plastic cover over the camera Do n
365. nflate the tires to this pressure when the tires are cold Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km at moderate speeds The recom mended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best bal ance of tire wear vehicle handling driveability tire noise etc up to the vehicle s GVWR Tire size refer to Tire labeling later in this section Spare tire size LDI0393 Checking tire pressure 1 Remove the valve stem cap from the tire Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem Do not press too hard or force the valve stem side ways or air will escape If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage 3 Remove the gauge 4 Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and compare to the specifica tion shown on the Tire and Loading Information label Add air to the tire as needed If too much air is added press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed Install the valve stem cap Check the pressure of all other tires including the spare Maintenance and do it yourself 8 41 Size Cold Tire Inflation Pres sure Front Original Tire P215 60R16 220 kPa 32 PSI pene O 7 230 kPa
366. nfluence of al cohol or drugs e ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions e ALWAYS give your full attention to driving and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that could distract you e ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro priate child restraint systems Preteen children should be seated in the rear seat e ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle e ALWAYS review this Owner s Manual for important safety information MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE This vehicle should not be modified Modification could affect its performance safety or durability and may even violate governmental regulations In addition damage or per formance problems resulting from modi fications may not be covered under NISSAN warranties WHEN READING THE MANUAL This manual includes information for all options available on this model Therefore you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle All information specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or design without notice and with out obligation IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL You will see various symbols in this manual They are used in the following ways AWARNING This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cau
367. nging engine coolant 8 9 Changing engine oil 8 11 Changing engine oilfilter 8 12 Checking engine coolant level 8 9 Checking engine oil level 8 10 Engine compartment check locations 8 6 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 5 Engine cooling system 8 8 Engine ollls sax mo amp aad eae ae 8 10 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation 9 5 Engine oil pressure warning light 2 12 Engine oil viscosity 0 9 5 Engine serialnumber 9 10 Engine specifications 9 7 Starting the engine 5 10 Enter DUON ie e 6 wae Poe eae ead 4 2 Event data recorders 9 26 Exhaust gas Carbon monoxide 5 2 Extended storage switch 8 26 Eyeglass caso kaain ead aoa nae a ma ad 2 38 F Flashers See hazard warning flasher switch 2 34 Flat tires s 2 c2 onde hacer ete we aoe d 6 2 Floor mat positioning aid 7 5 Fluid Brake flid y s G sac aaa teed oo 8 14 Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants 2 6 E e ae e 9 2 Cl teh fluid spa e kaera ced ee a 8 15 Continuously Variable Transmission CVT Fle eee ecg ap ea na ee a aes 8 13 Engine coolant 005 8 8 Engine Olli sie tae es Bee ee Bhs 8 10 Power steering fluid 8 14 F M V S S certification label 0 2 0 0 9 10 Fog light switch 000 8 2 34 Front air bag system See supplemental
368. nical and con sumer information section of this manual for drain and refill capacity 8 12 Maintenance and do it yourself WDI0495 VQ35DE ACAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself The engine oil may be hot 5 Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with a clean rag ACAUTION Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the sealing surface of the engine Failure to do so could lead to engine damage Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt then tighten an additional 2 3 turn Start the engine and check for leakage around the oil filter Correct as required Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes Check the oil level Add engine oil if necessary CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION CVT FLUID if so equipped ACAUTION e Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 2 Do not mix with other fluids Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS 2 will damage the CVT which is not covered by the warranty When checking or replacement of CVT fluid is required we recommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing Maintenance and do it yourself 8 13 POWER STEERING FLUID LDI0557 The fluid level should be checked using the HOT MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir at fluid temperatures of 122 176 F 50 80 C or using the COLD MAX range
369. not recorded successfully due to skipping sounds the symbol is displayed behind the track number The Music Box audio system cannot perform recording under the following conditions There is not enough space in the hard drive The number of aloums reaches the maximum of 500 The number of tracks reaches the maximum of 3 000 Automatic recording If the Automatic Recording function is turned to ON recording starts when a CD is inserted For more information see Music Box settings in this section Stopping recording To stop the recording touch the Stop REC key on the screen If the CD is ejected the audio system is turned off or the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position the recording also stops 4 78 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Music Box All Songs TUNE 3 Track Artist NO ARTIST Album a a 2009 03 10 09 24 VRE Track SS 2009 03 10 09 24 03 1 35 Track 27 of 54 LHA1283 Playing recorded songs Select the Music Box audio system by using one of the following methods Press the SOURCE select switch on the steering wheel For information see Steering wheel switch for audio control in this section Press the DISC AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the Music Box mode Give voice commands For information see NISSAN Voice Recog nition system in this section
370. nt Key e Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object e Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key e Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key If the Intelligent Key gets wet im mediately wipe until it is completely dry Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where tem peratures exceed 140 F 60 C e Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet e Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field such as a TV audio equipment and personal computers 3 18 Pre driving checks and adjustments If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli gent Key from the vehicle This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle For information regarding the erasing procedure contact a NISSAN dealer OPERATING RANGE The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operat ing location the Intelligent Key system s operat ing range becomes narrower and the Intelligent Key may not function properly The operating range is within 33 ft 10 m of the vehicle HOW TO USE THE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION The remote keyless entry function can operate all door locks using the remot
371. nt passenger Refer to Seat belts in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section for precautions on seat belt usage a Supplemental air bag warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position the supplemental air bag warn ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off This means the system is operational 2 14 Instruments and controls If any of the following conditions occur the front air bag side air bag curtain air bag and preten sioner systems need servicing and your vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer The supplemental air bag warning light re mains on after approximately 7 seconds The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all Unless checked and repaired the supplemental restraint system air bag system and or the pre tensioners may not function properly For addi tional details see Supplemental restraint sys tem in the Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual AWARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on it could mean that the front air bag side air bag curtain air bag systems and or pretensioner systems will not op erate in an accident To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible IND
372. ntenna position usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter static or flutter can be heard This can be reduced by adjusting the treble control to reduce treble response Multipath reception Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time The signals may cancel each other resulting in mo mentary flutter or loss of sound AM RADIO RECEPTION AM signals because of their low frequency can bend around objects and skip along the ground In addition the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth Because of these characteristics AM signals are also sub ject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver Fading Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings It can also occur for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles exist Static Caused by thunderstorms electrical power lines electric signs and even traffic lights Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 29 SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION if so equipped When the satellite radio is used for the first time or the battery has been replaced the satellite radio may not work properly This is not a mal function Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or large building for sa
373. nterference including interference that may cause unde sired operation of the device IC Regulatory information Operation is subject to the following two con ditions 1 this device may not cause interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This Class B digital apparatus meets all re quirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth Bluetooth SIG Inc U S A and licensed to Visteon USING THE SYSTEM The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows hands free operation of the Bluetooth Phone System If the vehicle is in motion some commands may not be available so full attention may be given to vehicle operation Initialization When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized which takes a few seconds If the amp button is pressed before the initialization completes the system will announce Hands free phone system not ready and will not react to voice commands Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 93 Operating tips To get the best performance out of the NISSAN Voice Recognition system observe the following Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible Close the windows to eliminate surrounding noises traffic noises vibration sounds etc wh
374. o key 5 Enter a PIN of your choice It will be needed by your Bluetooth audio device to com plete the connection process See the Bluetooth audio device s owner s manual for more information Audio main operation To switch to the Bluetooth audio mode press the DISC AUX button repeatedly until the Bluetooth audio mode is displayed on the screen The controls for the Bluetooth audio are dis played on the screen Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 85 Settings gt Bluetooth o di Yu 8 00 Gsack Settings gt connect Devic SO GN Yul 8 00 Gozack Settings gt audio Player od Yul 8 00 Cack Bluetooth XXXXXXXX Connect Bluetooth XXXXXXXX Connected Devices Handsfree Phone None Edit Bluetooth Info Audio Player None Replace Connected Phone None LHA1316 LHA1296 LHA1297 Bluetooth audio settings 4 Select the Audio Player key 5 A list of the connected Bluetooth audio players is displayed Select the name of the To adjust the Bluetooth audio settings follow device you wish to edit the procedure below 1 Press the SETTING button on the instru ment panel 2 Select the Bluetooth key 3 Select the Connected Devices key 4 86 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Settings
375. o a malfunction all stored music data will be erased cD 8 00 ooo TUNE F Track Track 1 of is 0 36 LHA1263 TUNE 3 Track 1 of 15 1 31 Track are LHA1282 Recording CDs 1 Operate the audio system to play a CD For information on playing CDs see Com pact Disc CD player operation in this sec tion 2 Touch the Start REC key REC CD ap pears on the screen NOTE The system starts playing and recording the 1st track on the CD when the Start REC key is selected Individual tracks from a CD cannot be se lected to be recorded to the Music Box hard drive The fast forward and rewind features are disabled while the CD is recording The recording process can be stopped at any time All tracks that were played before the CD was stopped are stored Individual tracks can be deleted from the hard drive after the CD is recorded The system records faster than it plays Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 77 If the title information of the track being recorded is stored either in the hard drive or in the CD the title is automatically displayed on the screen For title acquisition from the hard drive music recog nition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote To view the details of the track touch the Text key on the screen The track name and album title are displayed on the screen If a track is
376. o a safe location and stop your vehicle ACAUTION Keep the antenna as far away as pos sible from the electronic control modules Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in 20 cm away from the electronic con trol system harnesses Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness Adjust the antenna standing wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body For details consult a NISSAN dealer BLUETOOTH HANDS FREE PHONE SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM if so equipped AWARNING e Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location If you have to use a phone while driving exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle ACAUTION To avoid discharging the vehicle battery use a phone after starting the engine Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 91 microphone location 0 Bluetooth 0 WHA1042 Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System If you have a com patible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module With Bluetooth wireless technology you can make or receive a hands free telep
377. o start playing the DVD or resume playing the DVD after it has been paused EE STOP Select the W key to stop playing the DVD P pp NEXT PREVIOUS CHAPTER Select the gt key to skip the chapter s of the disc forward Select the M4 key to skip the chapter s of the disc backward The chapters will advance forward or backward the number of times the respective key is touched P CM SKIP This function is only for DVD VIDEO and DVD VR Selectthe I or lt l key to fast forward or rewind a set interval of time based on the CM settings For more information see DVD set tings in this section Next Prev This function is only for DVD AUDIO Select the or key to advance or rewind the still image The still image will advance or rewind the number of times the key is touched Top Menu When the Top Menu key is selected while the DVD is playing the top menu specific to each disc will be displayed For details see the instruc tions attached to the disc DVD settings Select the Settings key to adjust the following settings e Key DVD VIDEO DVD AUDIO Displays the operation keys for the specific DVD menu Select the directional keys to move the cursor on the DVD menu Select the Enter key to fix the selected menu item Select the Move key to move the loca tion of the operation keys on the screen Select the Back ke
378. o the face or neck The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones In an accident an improperly fit ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury Always use appropriate child restraints All U S states and Canadian provinces or terri tories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children See Child re straints later in this section A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by using either the LATCH Lower Anchor and Teth ers for CHildren system or with the vehicle seat belt See the Child restraints section for more information NISSAN recommends that all pre teens and children be restrained in the rear seat Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat 1 21 This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys tem air bag system for the front passen ger See Supplemental restraint system later in this section INFANTS Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear facing child restraint NISSAN recom mends that infants be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu facturer s instructions for installation and use SMALL CHILDREN Children that are over one year old and weigh at
379. oftware and Gracenote Servers Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data the Gracenote Software and the Gracenote Servers including all ownership rights Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide You agree that Gracenote Inc may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name The Gracenote MusiclD Service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote MusiclD ser vice to count queries without knowing anything about who you are For more information see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote MusiclD Service The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you AS IS Gracenote makes no representations or warran ties express or implied regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error free or that functioning of Gracenote Soft ware or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or cat egories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free
380. old Engine drive belts Make sure the drive belts are not frayed worn cracked or oily Engine oil level Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose supports cracks or holes If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes immediately have the exhaust system inspected by a NISSAN dealer See Ex haust gas carbon monoxide in the Starting and driving section of this manual Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel oil water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident check for the cause and have it corrected imme diately Power steering fluid level and lines Check the level when the fluid is cold with the engine off Check the lines for proper attachment leaks cracks etc Radiator and hoses Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt insects leaves etc that may have accumulated Make sure the hoses have no cracks deformation rot or loose connections Underbody The underbody is frequently ex posed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust It is very important to remove these substances from the underbody otherwise rust ma
381. on between a cellular phone and the in vehicle phone module before using the hands free phone system Some Bluetooth enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in vehicle phone module Please visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for a recom mended phone list and connecting You will not be able to use a hands free phone under the following conditions Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser vice area Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive cellular signal such as in a tunnel in an underground parking garage near a tall building or in a moun tainous area Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud it may be difficult to hear the other person s voice dur ing a call Immediately after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position it may be impos sible to receive a call for a short period of time Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connection the bat tery power of the cellular phone may dis charge quicker than usual The Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones If the hands free phone system seems to be malfunctioning see Tr
382. on button will not be activated when the air conditioner isin DEF or mode Air flow control Press the air flow control buttons to manually control air flow and select the air outlet s4 Air flows from center and side vents 174 Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets i Air flows mainly from foot outlets Air flows from defroster and foot outlets y Air flows from defroster outlets To turn system off Press the S OFF button Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 27 OPERATING TIPS When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of 150 seconds However this is not a malfunction After the coolant tempera ture warms up air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally a fo SSS WHA0791 The sunload sensor located on the top of the instrument panel on the driver s side helps the system maintain a constant temperature Do not put anything on or around this sensor 4 28 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind This refrigerant does not harm the earth s ozone layer Special charging equipment and lubricant is re quired when servicing your NISSAN air
383. ong as the permit from Macrovision Corporation is not issued Modifying or disassembling is prohib ited Dolby digital is manufactured under li cense from Dolby Laboratories Inc are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Inc DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc Universal Serial Bus USB memory if so equipped This system supports various USB memory sticks USB hard drives and iPod players There are some USB devices which may not be sup ported with this system Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB connector Do not force the memory stick or USB cable into the USB connector During cold weather or rainy days the player may malfunction due to the humidity If this occurs remove the USB memory stick and dehumidify or ventilate the player com pletely The player sometimes cannot function when the passenger compartment temperature is extremely high Decrease the temperature before use Do not leave the USB memory in a place prone to static electricity or where the air conditioner blows directly The data in the USB memory may be damaged Prepare the USB device by yourself be cause it is not equipped with the vehicle The USB device cannot be formatted with this system If you want to format the USB memory use your personal computer Partitioned USB devices may not be played correctly Some characters used in othe
384. or 1 17 Seat belt warning light 2 14 Seats Adjustment seee ta reaa i eee aa 1 2 Frontseats sye ce galiai a fake and 1 2 Heated seats nononono 2 35 Manual front seat adjustment 1 2 Rearseat 22 2 ee ee Eiras 1 8 Security indicator light 2 16 Security system NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system engine start 9 27 3 3 5 9 Self adjusting brakes 0 8 22 Service manual order form 9 27 Servicing air conditioner 4 28 Setting button 2 0 0004 4 6 Shifting Continuously Variable Transmission CVT a a oak ea ed ak ee ad 5 13 Manual transmission 5 18 Shift lock release 2 2 ee ee 5 16 Shoulder belt height adjustment 1 19 Spark plug replacement 8 19 Speedometer 0000008 2 4 Spotlights See map light 2 50 SRS warning label 004 1 56 Starting Before starting the engine 5 10 Jump starting o eccer reacer a 6 8 Precautions when starting and driving 5 2 P sh starting ea e aa e e tes E d 6 10 Starting the engine 5 10 Steering Power steering fluid 8 14 Power steering system 5 24 Stoplight g sas ca glee naked 8 30 DOMAGEs so eae a Se dl ee ee we E 2 37 Sunglasses case 2 2 ee ee 2 38 Sunglasses holder 004 2 38 SUNOG sca oe thee gee a OR ate dee ap Be 2 46 Sunroof
385. or child restraint as outlined in this section The illuminates to indicate that the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash Occupied passenger seat and the passen ger meets the conditions outlined in this section The light is OFF to indicate that the front passenger air bag is opera tional Front passenger air bag The front passenger air bag is designed to auto matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U S regulations If the front passenger air bag is OFF it will not inflate in a crash The driver air bag and other air bags in your vehicle are not part of this system Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passenger seat occupants such as children by requiring the air bag to be auto matically turned OFF The occupant classification sensor pattern sen sor is in the front passenger seat cushion and is designed to detect an occupant and objects on the seat For example if a child is in the front passenger seat the Advanced Air Bag System is designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations Also if a child restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat the occupant classification sensor can detect it and cause the air bag to turn OFF
386. or instrument panel The front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants Because of this the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to or is against the front air bag module during inflation The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision The front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position After placing the ignition switch in the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational OFF PY Front passenger air bag and status light AWARNING The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF under some con ditions Read this section carefully to learn how it operates Proper use of the seat seat belt and child restraints is nec essary for most effective protection Fail ure to follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats seat belts and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident Status light The front passenger air bag status light is located on the instrument panel above the radio controls The light operates as follows Unoccupied passenger s seat The is OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash e Passenger s seat occupied by a small adult child
387. or when starting the engine Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped The brake pedal should be depressed to move the shift selector from N Neutral or any drive position to P Park Apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake first then move the shift selector into the P Park position 5 14 Starting and driving R Reverse A CAUTION To prevent transmission damage use the P Park or R Reverse position only when the vehicle is completely stopped Use the R Reverse position to back up Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R Reverse position The brake pedal must be depressed to move the shift selector from P Park N Neutral or any drive position to R Reverse N Neutral Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged The engine can be started in this position You may shift to N Neutral and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving D Drive Use this position for all normal forward driving DS Drive Sport When the shift selector is shifted from the D Drive position to the manual shift gate the transmission enters the DS Drive Sport mode Moving the shift selector to the DS Drive Sport position allows you to enjoy sporty driving shift operation on a winding road and feel smooth acceleration or deceleration on a hilly road by moving in a lower gear automatically When can celing the DS mode return the shift sele
388. ot clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper install new windshield wiper blades ACAUTION Worn windshield wiper blades can dam age the windshield and impair driver vision 1O WDI0594 REPLACING Replace the wiper blades if they are worn Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield Push the release tab then move the wiper blade down the wiper arm to remove 1 Remove the wiper blade 4 Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place ol Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is in the groove Maintenance and do it yourself 8 21 6 Return the wiper to its original position and release it until it has made contact with the windshield A CAUTION After wiper blade replacement return the wiper arm to its original position otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass otherwise the arms may be dam aged from wind pressure 8 22 Maintenance and do it yourself Oo WDI0570 If you wax the surface of the hood be careful not to let wax get into the windshield washer nozzle This may cause clogging or improper wind shield washer operation If wax gets into the nozzle remove it with a needle or small pin BRAKES If the brakes do not operate properly have the brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer SELF ADJUSTING BRAKES Your vehicle is equipped with self adj
389. ot scratch the cover when cleaning dirt or snow from the cover HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED LINES Lines which indicate the vehicle clearance and distances to objects with reference to the bum per line are displayed on the monitor Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 13 LHA0437 They are indicated as reference distances to objects The lines and colors in the display indi cate distances from the back bumper line in the illustration 1 5 ft 0 5 m red 3 ft 1 m yellow 7 ft 2m green 10 ft 8 m green The vehicle clearance lines are wider than the actual clearance DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND ACTUAL DISTANCES The distance guide line and the vehicle width guide line should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level paved surface The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects 4 14 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems WHA1504 Backing up on a steep uphill When backing up the vehicle up a hill the dis tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance For example the display shows 3 ft 1 0 m to the place but the actual 3 ft 1 0 m distance on the hill is the place Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the monitor
390. oubleshooting guide in this section You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for trouble shooting help Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers Stor ing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise Refer to the cellular phone owner s manual regarding the telephone charges cellular phone antenna and body etc The signal strength display on the monitor will not coincide with the signal strength display of some cellular phones If reception between callers is unclear ad justing the incoming or outgoing call volume may improve the clarity See Call volume in this section Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 107 REGULATORY INFORMATION FCC Regulatory information CAUTION To maintain compliance with FCC s RF exposure guidelines use only the supplied antenna Unauthorized antenna modification or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regula tions Operation is subject to the following two con ditions 1 This device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause unde sired operation of the device IC Regulatory information Operation is subject to the following two con ditions 1 this device may not cause interfer ence and 2 this device must accept any interfer
391. our vehicle use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level e For additional information re garding tires refer to Important Tire Safety Information US or Tire Safety Information Canada in the Warranty Infor mation Booklet Maintenance and do it yourself 8 39 TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION SEATING CAPACITY NOMBRE DE PLACES The combined weight of occupants C and cargo should never exceed XX kg or XX Ibs Le poids total des occupants et du chargement ne doit jamais d passer XXX kg ou XXX Ibs TIRE SIZE COLD TIRE PRESSURE PNEU RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT RANT TOTAL RE ARRIERE PARE DE SECOURS DIMENSIONS FRONT FRONT P XXX XX R XX PRESSION DES PNEUS FROID XXX kPa XX psi P XXX XX R XX XXX kPa XX psi T XXX XXR XX XXX kPa XX psi SEE OIFNER S MANUAL FOR ADDTIONAL INFORMATION VOIR LE MANUEL DE L USAGER POUR FELUS DE RENSEIGNEMENTS S WDI0730 Tire and loading information label Seating capacity The maximum num ber of occupants that can be seated in the vehicle Vehicle load limit See Vehicle load ing information in the Technical and consumer information section Original tire size The size of the tires originally installed on the vehicle at the factory 8 40 Maintenance and do it yourself Cold tire pressure I
392. ower outlets are for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones They are rated at 12 volt 120W 10A maximum The console outlet is powered directly by the vehi cle s battery ACAUTION The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use Only certain power outlets are designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter See your NISSAN dealer for additional information Do not use with accessories that ex ceed a 12 volt 120W 10A power draw Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory Use power outlets with the engine run ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner headlights or rear window defroster is on Before inserting or disconnecting a plug be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF Push the plug in as far as it will go If good contact is not made the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open When not in use be sure to close the cap Do not allow water or any other liquids to contact the outlet STORAGE WIC1262 Console box Open the lower half of the console box to access the power outlet Refer to Console box in this section LIC1073 LIC0016 MAP POCKETS SEATBACK POCKETS if so equipped The seatback pockets are located on the back of the driver
393. owing messages will be dis played Disc Read Error e Confirm that the CD DVD is inserted correctly the label side is facing up etc e Confirm that the CD DVD is not bent or warped and it is free of scratches Please Eject Disc This error may be due to the tempera ture inside the player getting too high Remove the CD DVD by pushing the EJECT button and after a short time reinsert the CD DVD The CD DVD can be played when the temperature of the player returns to normal If the error persists consult your local dealership Unplayable File e The file may be copy protected The file is not MP3 WMA AAC M4A or DIVX type Region Invalid e The DVD is not for region 1 or all regions e Use DVDs with a region code 1 ALL or 1 included for your DVD entertainment system The region code is displayed as a small sym bol printed on the top of the DVD This vehicle installed DVD player cannot play DVDs with a re gion code other than 1 or ALL 4 32 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems LHA0484 Copyright and trademark e The technology protected by the U S patent and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other right holders is adopted for this system This copyright protected technology cannot be used without a permit from Macrovision Corporation It is limited to personal use etc as l
394. p proximately 1 3 to the floor and while holding crank the engine Release the accelerator pedal when the engine starts Ifthe engine is very hard to start because it is flooded depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Push the ignition switch to the ON posi tion to start cranking the engine After 5 or 6 seconds stop cranking by pushing the ignition switch to LOCK After cranking the engine release the accelerator pedal Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by depressing the brake pedal and pushing the push button ignition switch to start the engine If the engine starts but fails to run repeat the above procedure ACAUTION Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time If the engine does not start push the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds before cranking again otherwise the starter could be damaged 4 Warm up Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec onds after starting Do not race the engine while warming it up Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first especially in cold weather In cold weather keep the en gine running for a minimum of 2 3 minutes before shutting it off Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start 5 To stop the engine shift the shift selector to the P Park position CVT or to N Neutral and apply the parking brake M T
395. pecification at all times It is recom mended that wheel nuts be tightened to specifications at each lubrication interval 6 8 In case of emergency Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure COLD pressure After vehicle has been parked for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire and loading information label affixed to the driver side center pillar 5 Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip ment in the vehicle 6 Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floor carpeting over the damaged tire 7 Close the trunk AWARNING e Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly se cured after use Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop e The spare tire is designed for emer gency use See specific instructions un der the heading Wheels and tires in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual JUMP STARTING To start your engine with a booster battery the instructions and precautions below must be fol lowed AWARNING If done incorrectly jump starting can lead to a battery explosion resulting in severe injury or death It could also damage your vehicle e Explosive hydrogen gas is always pres ent in the vicinity of the battery Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery e Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes skin clothing o
396. per Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line If fluid must be added frequently the system should be checked by a NISSAN dealer CLUTCH FLUID if so equipped Check the clutch fluid level in the reservoir manual transmissions only If the fluid level is below the MIN line add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line If fluid must be added fre quently the system should be checked by a NISSAN dealer For further brake and clutch fluid specification information refer to Capacities and recom mended fuel lubricants in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID RESERVOIR Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir periodi cally Add windshield washer fluid when the low windshield washer fluid warning light comes on To fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the windshield washer fluid into the reservoir opening Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning In the winter season add a windshield washer antifreeze Follow the manufacturer s in structions for the mixture ratio Maintenance and do it yourself 8 15 Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of windshield washer fluid Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner amp Anti freeze or equivalent
397. ple mental air bag system This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest and pelvic area of the driver and front passenger in certain side impact collisions The side air bags are de signed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted 1 41 Roof mounted curtain side impact supple mental air bag system This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occu pants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side impact collisions The curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted These supplemental restraint systems are de signed to supplement the crash protection pro vided by the driver and front passenger seat belts and are not a substitute for them Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occu pant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel instrument panel and door finish ers See Seat belts earlier in this section for instructions and precautions on seat belt usage The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position After placing the ignition switch in the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational 1 42 Ga ha Sit upright and well back WRS0031 A WARNING e The front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event
398. position the radio will come on at the station last played The last station played will also come on when the VOL ON OFF control knob is pressed ON If a compact disc is playing when the FM AM button is pressed the compact disc will auto matically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on The FM stereo indicator STEREO will illuminate during FM stereo reception When the stereo broadcast signal is weak the radio will automati cally change from stereo to monaural reception XM band select Press the XM button to change the band as follows XM1 XM2 XM3 XM1 satellite if so equipped When the XM button is pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position the radio will come on at the station last played The last station played will also come on when the VOL ON OFF control knob is pressed ON When the XM button is pressed the satellite radio reception will not be available unless an optional satellite receiver and antenna are in stalled and an XM satellite radio service sub scription is active Satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam If a compact disc is playing when the XM button is pressed the compact disc will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on TUNE FOLDER Tuning knob To manually tune the radio turn the TUNE FOLDER knob to the right or left lt lt For AM or FM Press the M4 sid
399. pressed while a compact disc is playing the track being played returns to its beginning Press sev eral times to skip back through tracks The com pact disc will go back the number of times the button is pressed Ppl Seeking button When the Pl side of the seeking button is pressed while the compact disc is playing the next track will start to play from its beginning Press several times to skip through tracks The compact disc will advance the number of times the button is pressed When the last track on the compact disc is skipped through the first track will be played lt lt gt pl Seeking Rewind and Fast Forward button Press and hold the 4 side of the seeking button or the PI side of the seeking button while a compact disc is playing the compact disc will play while rewinding or fast forwarding When the button is released the compact disc will return to normal play speed TUNE FOLDER knob While playing a CD with compressed audio files turn the TUNE FOLDER knob right or left to play the next or previous folder cD 8 00 Artist TUNE 3 Folder XXXXXXXK Album XXXXXXXX Track XXXXXXXX Folder 1of4 Track tofi 0 40 LHA1258 CD menu Touch the Menu key on the display while a CD or CD with compressed audio files is playing to bring up a list of options Depending on the type of CD being played the following options may be available Monitor
400. protec tion mode or fail safe operation occurs vehicle speed may be gradually reduced The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic which could increase the chance of a collision Be especially care ful when driving If necessary pull to the side of the road at a safe place and allow the transmission to return to normal op eration or have it repaired if necessary MANUAL TRANSMISSION if so equipped AWARNING e Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads This may cause a loss of conirol e Do not over rev the engine when shift ing to a lower gear This may cause a loss of control or engine damage ACAUTION e Donotrest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving This may cause clutch damage e Fully depress the clutch pedal before shifting to help prevent transmission damage e Stop your vehicle completely before shifting into R Reverse When the vehicle is stopped with the engine running for example at a stop light shift to N Neutral and release the clutch pedal with the foot brake applied Starting and driving 5 17 LSD0180 Shifting To change gears or when upshifting or down shifting depress the clutch pedal fully shift into the appropriate gear then release the clutch slowly and smoothly To ensure smooth gear changes fully depress the clutch pedal before operating the shift selec tor If the clutch pedal is not fully depressed before the transmission is shifted a g
401. r greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis tance will be longer Using the brakes Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving This will overheat the brakes wear out the brake pads faster and reduce gas mileage To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control AWARNING e While driving on a slippery surface be careful when braking accelerating or downshifting Abrupt braking or accel erating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident e If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving the power assist for the brakes will not work Braking will be harder Parking brake break in Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and or drum rotors are replaced in order to assure the best brake performance This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual and can be performed by a NISSAN dealer Wet brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through water the brakes may get wet As a result your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking To dry the brakes drive the vehicle at a safe speed wh
402. r load from your trailer will be trans ferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this re duces the available cargo and lug gage load capacity of your vehicle Before driving a loaded vehicle confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for your vehicle See Measurement of weights later in this section Also check tires for proper inflation pres sures See the Tire and Loading Informa tion label LOADING TIPS The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the F M V S S C M V S S certification label e Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR Doing so will exceed the GVWR AWARNING e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than the seat backs In a sudden stop or colli sion unsecured cargo could cause personal injury e Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs If you do parts of your vehicle can break tire damage could oc cur or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could result in loss of control and cause per sonal injury e Overloading not only can shorten the life of your vehicle and the tire but can also cause unsafe vehicle handling and longer brak ing distances This may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and person
403. r painted surfaces Battery fluid is a cor rosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns If the fluid should come into contact with anything imme diately flush the contacted area with water Keep battery out of the reach of children The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle Whenever working on or near a battery always wear suitable eye protectors for example goggles or industrial safety spectacles and remove rings metal bands or any other jewelry Do not lean over the battery when jump starting Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery It could explode and cause se rious injury e Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan It could come on at any time Keep hands and other objects away from it uae SS Cloth Dh lt W ea p Vehicle with gt tae for YA Cloth gt booster Ss Stet WCE0054 AWARNING Always follow the instructions below Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury 1 If the booster battery is in another vehicle position the two vehicles to bring their bat teries near each other Do not allow the two vehicles to touch 2 Apply the parking brake Move the shift se lector to N Neutral manual transmission or to P Park Continuously Variable Trans mission Switch off all unnecessary electri cal systems ligh
404. r than after they have worked on it You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer s service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle in a reliable and economical way GENERAL MAINTENANCE During the normal day to day operation of the vehicle general maintenance should be per formed regularly as prescribed in this section If you detect any unusual sounds vibrations or smells be sure to check for the cause or have a NISSAN dealer do it promptly In addition you should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required When performing any checks or maintenance work closely observe the Maintenance precau tions later in this section EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS Additional information on the following items with is found later in this section Outside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time unless otherwise specified Doors and engine hood Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly Also ensure that all latches lock securely Lubricate hinges latches latch pins rollers and links as necessary Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials check lubrication frequently Lights Clean the headlights on a regular basis Make sure that the headlights stop lights
405. r toward the BI to close them 4 18 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems WHAO0737 WHA0688 Rear sedan if so equipped HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER manual if so equipped AWARNING The air conditioner cooling function op erates only when the engine is running Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle Pets should also not be left alone They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle Also on hot sunny days temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up ortn 4 oND g e O WHA1407 Fan speed control system OFF dial CONTROLS Air flow control buttons Temperature control dial Fan control dial Air conditioner button The fan control dial turns the fan on and off and Rear window defroster controls fan speed MAX A C button Front windshield defrost button Air recirculation button The air flow control buttons allow you to select the air flow outlets Air flow control buttons MAX Air flows from center and side A C vents with maximum cooling 74 Air flo
406. r cleaner make sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the housing and latch the clips AWARNING e Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or oth ers to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it stops the flame if the engine backfires If it isn t there and the engine backfires you could be burned Do not drive with the air cleaner removed and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed e Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed Doing so could result in serious injury IN CABIN MICROFILTER The in cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air borne dust and pollen particles and reduces some objectionable outside odors The filter is located behind the glove box Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for change intervals If replacement is required see your NISSAN dealer WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES CLEANING If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer fluid or a mild detergent Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer fluid or a mild detergent Then rinse the blades with clear water If your windshield is still n
407. r cover is open WPD0126 REARVIEW MIRROR if so equipped The night position reduces glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you at night Use the day position when driving in daylight hours AWARNING Use the night position only when neces sary because it reduces rear view clarity Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 29 AUTOMATIC ANTI GLARE REARVIEW MIRROR if so equipped The inside mirror is designed so that it automati cally dims during night time conditions and ac cording to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you The automatic anti glare feature is activated when the ignition switch is in the ON position The indicator light will illuminate when the auto matic anti glare feature is operating NOTE Do not hang any objects over the sensors or apply glass cleaner to the sensors Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensors resulting in improper operation 3 30 Pre driving checks and adjustments LPD0469 Type A Without compass Type A and Type B The indicator light will illuminate when the automatic anti glare feature is operating To turn off the automatic anti glare feature press the O button for inside mirrors without compass e the button for inside mirrors with compass The indicator light will turn off LPD0470 Type B With compass To turn on the automatic anti glare feature again p
408. r full attention to driving e Avoid using vehicle features that could distract you If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident Settings Volume amp Beeps Navigation Audio Display Phone Clock Bluetooth Others Adjust navigation settings LHA1227 Touch screen operation Selecting the item Touch an item to select To select the Naviga tion key touch the Navigation key on the screen Touch the BACK key to return to the previous screen Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 3 Settings gt Volume amp Beeps 8 00 Gack Guidance Volume C ovcce econes D Ringtone Issece eceees DOC Incoming Call C ELETT TETEYI ERO Outgoing Call lt foc oeg TED Switch Beeps ON 2 7 Use volume knob to adjust during playback LHA1228 Phone gt Device Name 8 00 a 060 0800 8800 00O QOO OOO 080E 09 O09 Delete Space Lowercase OK LHA1230 Adjusting the item Touch the key or the key to adjust the settings of an item Touch the up arrow 3 to scroll up the page one item at a time or touch the double up arrow to scroll up an entire page Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page one item at a time
409. r information 9 27 Insist on the use of genuine NISSAN collision parts If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts made to NISSAN s original exacting specifica tions if you want to help it to last and hold its resale value the solution is simple Tell your insurance agent and your repair shop to only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts NISSAN does not warrant non NISSAN parts nor does NISSAN s warranty apply to damage caused by a non genuine part Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect your personal safety preserve your warranty pro tection and maintain the resale value of your vehicle And if your vehicle was leased using Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un necessary excess wear and tear expenses at the end of your lease NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones to minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the windshield of your vehicle in an accident Non genuine imitation parts may not provide such built in safeguards Also non genuine parts of ten show premature wear rust and corrosion Why should you take a chance In over 40 states the law says you must be advised if non genuine parts are used to repair your vehicle And some states have enacted laws that restrict insurance companies from authoriz ing the use of non genuine collision parts during the new vehicle warranty These laws help pro tect you so you can take action to protect your self It s your right I
410. r languages Chinese Japanese etc are not displayed properly on the vehicle center screen NISSAN recommends using English lan guage characters with USB devices Do not connect the USB device if the con nector or cable is wet Allow the cable and or connectors to dry completely before connecting the USB device Large video podcast files cause slow re sponses in the iPod The vehicle center display may momentarily black out but it will soon recover If the iPod automatically selects large video podcast files while in the shuffle mode the vehicle center display may momentarily black out but it will soon recover Audiobooks may not play in the same order as they appear on the iPod The iPod nano 1st Generation may re main in fast forward or rewind mode if it is connected during a seek operation In this case please manually reset the iPod The iPod nano 2nd Generation will con tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is discon nected during a seek operation An incorrect song title may appear when the Play Mode is changed while using the iPod nano 2nd generation Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 33 e f you are using an iPod 3rd Generation with Dock connector do not use very long names for the song title album name or artist name to avoid the iPod resetting itself iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries Bluetooth
411. r parcel The seatback and track will not lock until the znel seat back is returned rearward 2 Push down on the button on the rear parcel shelf The seatback will return to an upright seating position if the upper seatback release lever is pulled to the uppermost position 3 Fold down the passenger s side seatback To remove or reinstall the seatback release but ton access covers see Upper tether anchor key cylinder covers in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual AWARNING e Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold down position Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury in an acci dent or sudden stop e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting Do not place cargo higher than WRS0794 the seatbacks In a sudden stop or col lision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury FOLDING REAR SEAT Interior trunk access The trunk can be accessed from the passenger side of the rear seat for loading and unloading as shown 1 8 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system When returning the seatbacks to the upright position be certain they are completely secured in the latched posi tion If they are not completely secured passengers may be injured in an acci dent or sudden stop
412. r pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle especially at highway speeds Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect the tires for wear and damage See Wheels and tires in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or blows out while driving maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below Please note that this procedure is only a general guide The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the ve hicle road and traffic AWARNING The following actions can increase the chance of losing control of the vehicle if there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure Losing control of the vehicle may cause a collision and result in personal injury e The vehicle generally moves or pulls in the direction of the flat tire Do not rapidly apply the brakes e Do not rapidly release the accelerator pedal Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel 1 Remain calm and do not over react 2 Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course 3 When appropriate slowly release the accel erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle 4 Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location off the road and away from traffic if possible 5 Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle 6 Turn on
413. r than the tire speed rating Maintenance and do it yourself 8 43 DOT XX XX XXX XXXX XX XX t t 2 3 XXX t t t XXX XXXX 4 5 6 WDI0396 Example TIN Tire Identification Number for a new tire example DOT XX XX XXX XXXX 1 DOT Abbreviation for the Depart ment Of Transportation The symbol can be placed above below or to the left or right of the Tire Identification Number 2 Two digit code identification mark Manufacturer s 3 Two digit code Tire size 8 44 Maintenance and do it yourself 4 Three digit code Tire type code Optional Three digit code Date of Manufac ture Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For ex ample the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2003 If these numbers are missing then look on the other sidewall of the tire Tire ply composition and material The number of layers or plies of rubber coated fabric in the tire Tire manufactur ers also must indicate the materials in the tire which include steel nylon polyester and others Maximum permissible inflation pres sure This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire Do not exceed the maximum permissible in flation pressure Maximum load rating This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be car ried by the tire When replacing the tires on the vehicle always use a t
414. r without the key move the inside lock knob to the unlock position 4 iN SE WPD0381 Q Door lock switch LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH To lock all the doors without a key push the door lock switch driver s or front passenger s side to the lock position When locking the door this way be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle To unlock all the doors without a key push the door lock switch driver s or front passenger s side to the unlock position Lockout protection When the power door lock switch driver s or front passenger s side is moved to the lock position with the Intelligent Key in the port and any door open all doors will lock and unlock automatically With the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle not in the Intelligent Key port and any door open all doors will unlock automatically and a chime will sound after the door is closed AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS All doors lock automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH 24 km h All doors unlock automatically when the ig nition switch is placed in the OFF position The automatic unlock function can be de activated or activated To deactivate or acti vate the automatic door unlock system perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors 2 Place the ignition switch in the ON position 3 Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2 push and hold the power door lock switch to the position UNLOCK for mor
415. rack Clock operation Pressing the CLOCK button displays the clock with the radio on or off Press the CLOCK button again to turn off the clock display Clock set 1 Press and hold the CLOCK button for ap proximately 2 seconds 2 The display will show H Seek M Tune 3 Press the SEEK TRACK button 4 or to adjust the hours 4 Press TUNE FF REW button 4 or Y to adjust the minutes 5 Press the CLOCK button again to exit the clock set mode The display will return to the regular clock display after 10 seconds or you may press the CLOCK button again to return to the regular clock display aK To mute or pause the audio sound press the X pause mute button Press the X button again to resume the audio sound FM AM radio operation FM AM band select Pressing the RADIO button will change the band as follows AM FM pause mute button Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 45 When the RADIO button is pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position the radio will come on at the station last played If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO button is pressed the compact disc will auto matically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on The FM stereo indicator ST illuminates during FM stereo reception When the stereo broadcast signal is weak the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception A
416. raint installation Injured PERSONS cee nb paint pega Reda eet peas 1 17 using the seat belts nauuna 1 34 Three point type seat belt with retractor 1 17 Installing top tether strap 02 0e eee ee 1 38 Seat belt extenders c cece eee eens 1 20 Booster seatS ccc cece eee e eee eeueuuuaaae 1 38 Seat belt maintenance 00 00 1 20 Supplemental restraint system 0 000 1 41 Child safety LELE PIE E ae alanine eats Renta at eee ah acces E 1 21 Precautions on supplemental restraint INFANTS i cst deh EE E E ties 1 22 SYSTEM ee saatutes Bowe te asedaceedre cade detent 1 41 Smali childreniy sa etaewiviisiahiee ass kes wha 1 22 Supplemental air bag warning labels 1 56 Larger children seisi 6 nese ceed eeetgedadadacene 1 22 Supplemental air bag warning light 1 57 SEATS ARS1152 AWARNING e Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined This can be dangerous The shoulder belt will not be against your body In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries e For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion the seat should be upright Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat properly See Precau tions on seat belt usage later in this section
417. ransmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds If HomeLink is not programmed within that time try holding the transmitter in another position keeping the indicator light in view at all times If you continue to have programming difficulties please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department The phone numbers are located in the Foreword of this manual CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION Individual buttons cannot be cleared However to clear all programming press and hold the two outside buttons and release when the indicator light begins to flash approximately 20 seconds Instruments and controls 2 53 ROLLING CODE PROGRAMMING Rolling code garage door openers or other roll ing code devices which are code protected and manufactured after 1996 may be deter mined by the following e Reference the garage door opener Owner s Manual for verification The hand held transmitter appears to pro gram the HomeLink Universal Transceiver but does not activate the garage door Press and hold the trained HomeLink but ton If the garage door opener has the rolling code feature the HomeLink indicator light will flash rapidly then remain on after 2 sec onds To program the HomeLink Universal Transceiver to a garage door opener with the rolling code feature follow these instructions after completing the Programming HomeLink the aid of a sec ond person may make the following procedur
418. re pressure of the spare tire The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h Also this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure for example a flat tire while driving The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted After all 4 tires are inflated to the recommended pressure the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH 25 km h to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning ap pears in the vehicle information display when the low tire pressure warning light is illumi nated and low tire pressure is detected The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning turns off when the low tire pressure warning light turns off The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction 5 4 Starting and driving Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle s operation and the outside temperature Low outside temperature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illumi nate If the warning light illuminates in low ambient temperature check the tire pres sure for all four tires The Tire and Loading Information
419. ress the button for inside mirrors without compass e the button for inside mirrors with compass The indicator light will turn on For information on HomeLink Universal Trans ceiver operation see the HomeLink Universal Transceiver in the Instruments and controls section of this manual For information on the compass display if so equipped see Compass display in the Instru ments and controls section of this manual OUTSIDE MIRRORS AWARNING e Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear Be careful when moving to the right Using only this mirror could cause an accident Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects LPD0346 WPDO0056 Electric control type The outside mirror remote control only operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position Rotate the control lever to select the right or left mirror Adjust the mirror to the desired position by moving the control lever Heated mirrors if so equipped Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost defog or de ice for improved visibility For addi tional information see Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch in the Instruments and controls section of this manual Manual folding outside mirrors if so equipped Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it
420. restraint system 1 50 Front seats s duos mania a Hts a ah ee 1 2 Fuel Capacities and recommended fuel lubricants s scs ss sass toanen 9 2 Fuel economy aana aana 5 22 Fuel filler doorandcap 3 25 Fuel filler door lock opener lever 3 25 FUGI Gauges a s a ct ace ah Bae we Co ews em 2 6 Fuel octane rating 0 9 4 Fuel recommendation 9 3 Loose fuel cap warning 2 25 3 25 FUSES a ook Bs hy By bee Sle ed aad 8 23 Fusible links 2 0 0 0 eee eee es 8 24 G Garage door opener HomeLink Universal TranSCewver ae aie We he Gwe ee es 2 51 GaSicap we onr eee ee ee we 3 25 Gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 5 Fuel gauges i acca eee ee ee ee 2 6 Odometer ic senes eee tea es 2 4 Speedometer 20004 2 4 Tachometer 0 2 aana na 2 5 Trip odometer 0004 2 4 General maintenance 8 2 GIOVE BOX mrapa i eae ede A we ee 2 41 Glove boxlock s 2 dreg saa 2 41 Grocery hooks 2 i sa ea le ee aS 2 42 H Hands free phone system Bluetooth 0008 4 91 4 106 Hazard warning flasher switch 2 34 Headlight and turn signal switch 2 29 Headlight control switch 2 31 Headlights sarissa wie eae ae a ad 8 28 Heated seats 0 2 0 0 00 eee 2 35 Heater Heater and air conditioner Gonto 5G Gigwise asl ss eis eens 4 19 4 26 Heater operation 4 20 4 27 HomeLink Universal Trans
421. riving checks and adjustments section Check tire pressure warning This warning appears when the low tire pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire pressure is detected If this warning appears stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label See Low tire pressure warning light earlier in this section and Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Starting and driving section Instruments and controls 2 25 SECURITY SYSTEMS LICO301 Your vehicle may have two types of security sys tems Vehicle security system NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM The vehicle security system provides visual and audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors or trunk lid when the system is armed It is not however a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it nor can it prevent the theft of interior or 2 26 Instruments and controls exterior vehicle components in all situations Al ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a brief period Never leave your Intelligent Key in the vehicle and always lock the vehicle when unattended Be aware of your surroundings and park in secure well lit areas whenever possible Many devices offering additional protection s
422. rked C may have poor traction performance 9 24 Technical and consumer information AWARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature A B and C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and exces sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor mance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law AWARNING The temperature grade for this tire is es tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive loading ei ther separately or in combination can cause heat build up and possible tire failure EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties For USA 1 Emission Defects Warranty 2 Emissions Performance Warranty Details of this warranty may be found with oth
423. runk lid lower and push the trunk lid down securely NOTE You can open the trunk lid with the Intelli gent Key Refer to NISSAN Intelligent Key in this section 3 24 Pre driving checks and adjustments LPD0395 LPD0396 Cancel switch When the switch located inside the glove box is in the OFF position the power to the trunk lid wil be cancelled The trunk can only be opened with the master key or keyfob The trunk lid cannot be opened when using the trunk lid release switch the trunk open request switch if so equipped is pushed when the Intelligent Key is in range of the vehicle or the HOLD button on the Intelligent Key is pressed INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE AWARNING Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured Keep the car locked with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use and prevent children s access to car keys The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides a means of escape for children and adults in the event they become locked inside the trunk To open the trunk from the inside pull the illumi nated release handle until the lock releases and push up on the trunk lid The release handle is made of a material that glows in the dark after a brief exposure to ambient light The handle i
424. rval Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes repeated short distance driving at cold out side temperatures driving in dusty conditions extensive idling towing a trailer stop and go commuting Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for the maintenance schedule AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND OIL RECOMMENDATIONS The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refriger ant HFC 134a R 134a and NISSAN A C system oil Type S or the exact equivalents 9 6 Technical and consumer information ACAUTION The use of any other refrigerant or oil will cause severe damage to the air condition ing system and will require the replace ment of all air conditioner system components The refrigerant HFC 134a R 134a in your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth s ozone layer Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth s atmosphere certain government regula tions require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys tem service A NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refriger ant Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioner system SPECIFICATIONS ENGINE Model QR25DE VQ35DE Type Gasoline 4 cycle DOHC Gaso
425. ry WRSO0751 Sedan Pull up on the upper seatback release lever to release the seatback only Push the seat back forward to allow for access to items behind the front seat Push the seatback to the rear of the vehicle to return the seatback to the upright and locked position The up per seatback release lever does not need to be used Forward and backward Moving the switch forward or backward will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position Reclining Move the recline switch backward until the de sired angle is obtained To bring the seatback forward again move the switch forward and move your body forward The seatback will move forward The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit see Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section Also the seatback can be re clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve hicle is stopped and the transmission is in P Park or N Neutral position with the parking brake fully applied Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 5 a f tev WRS0842 Coupe shown Sedan similar Seat lifter if so equipped for driver s seat Pull the lever up or push down to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion LT pe ets j WRS0743 WRS0843 Type A Type B Lumbar support if so equippe
426. s 1 Press the SETTING button on the instru ment panel 2 Select the Phone key 3 Select the Download Handset Phonebook key Once the handset phonebook is transferred to the vehicle it can be accessed by pressing the button on the steering wheel then selecting the Handset Phonebook key Whether the handset phonebook is transferred manually or automatically the process can take up to five minutes to complete depending on the size of the handset phonebook See the cellular phone s owner s manual for more details Phone HD Ful 8 00 aco Vehicle Phonebook Volume amp Ringtone Call History Connect Phone Handset Phonebook Fo wore Connected Phones Calls a phonebook entry saved to the vehicle LHA1322 MAKING A CALL To make a call follow the procedure below 1 Press the button on the steering wheel The Phone screen will appear on the display 2 Select one of the following options to make a call Vehicle Phonebook Select the name from an entry stored in the vehicle phonebook e Handset Phonebook Select the name from an entry stored in the handset phonebook Call History Select the name from the in coming or outgoing call history Dial Number Input the phone number manu ally using a keypad displayed on the screen For information on how to use the touch screen see How to use the touch screen
427. s section and Seats in the Safety seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system section NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEYS You can only drive your vehicle using the master keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle The master key can be used for all the locks Never leave these keys in the vehicle Additional or replacement keys If you still have a key the key number is not necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys Your dealer can dupli cate your existing key This is because the regis tration process will erase the memory of all key codes previously registered into the NISSAN Ve hicle Immobilizer System Do not allow the immobilizer system key which contains an electrical transponder to come into contact with salt water This could affect system function Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 3 DOORS When the doors are locked using one of the following methods the doors can not be opened using the inside or outside door handles The doors must be unlocked to open the doors AWARNING e Always have the doors locked while driving Along with the use of seat belts this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally open ing the doors and will help keep out intruders e Be
428. s and passenger s seats The pockets can be used to store maps Instruments and controls 2 37 LIC1242 M0 w STORAGE POUCH if so equipped A storage pouch is located on the front of the driver s and passenger s seats AWARNING Do not store angular sharp heavy objects or objects that cannot fully fit inside the pouch because they might increase the likelihood of an injury in a crash 2 38 Instruments and controls WIC1551 SUNGLASSES HOLDER To open the sunglasses holder push and release Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder AWARNING Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to prevent an accident ACAUTION e Do not use for anything other than sunglasses Do not leave sunglasses in the sun glasses holder while parking in direct sunlight The heat may damage the sunglasses LIC1075 LIC1105 WRSO167 Front Type A Front Type B Rear sedan Instruments and controls 2 39 LIC1219 Rear coupe CUP HOLDERS To open the front cup holders push the cup holder lid To close lower the cup holder lid and push down until it clicks in place The plastic insert if so equipped may be re moved to accommodate a larger cup size or for cleaning The rear center cup holders are located in the rear fold down armrest sedan or in the rear arm rest coupe 2 40 Instruments and con
429. s down more than 8 MPH 13 km h below the set speed you depress the clutch pedal manual trans mission or move the shift selector to N Neutral CVT To reset at a faster cruising speed use one of the following three methods Depress the accelerator pedal When the vehicle attains the desired speed push and release the COAST SET switch Push and hold the ACCEL RES switch When the vehicle attains the speed you de sire release the switch Push and release the ACCEL RES switch Each time you do this the set speed in creases by about 1 MPH 1 6 km h To reset at a slower cruising speed use one of the following three methods Lightly tap the brake pedal When the ve hicle attains the desired speed push the COAST SET switch and release it Push and hold the COAST SET switch Re lease the switch when the vehicle slows to the desired speed e Push and release the COAST SET switch Each time you do this the set speed de creases by about 1 MPH 1 6 km h To resume the preset speed push and re lease the ACCEL RES switch The vehicle re turns to the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH 40 km h Starting and driving 5 21 BREAK IN SCHEDULE ACAUTION During the first 1 200 miles 2 000 km follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and en sure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle Failure to follow these recommendations
430. s located inside the trunk compart ment on the interior of the trunk lid FUEL FILLER DOOR LPD0397 OPENER OPERATION The fuel filler door release is located on the floor to the left of the driver s seat To open the fuel filler door pull up the release To lock close the fuel filler door securely FUEL FILLER CAP AWARNING e Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain condi tions You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling e Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire e Use only an original equipment type fuel filler cap as a replacement It has a built in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emis sion control system An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury It could also cause the ENGINE Malfunction Indicator Light MIL to come on e Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 25 Do not fill a portable fuel container in the vehicle or trailer Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid vapor or gas in any vehicle or tra
431. s with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada 8 28 Maintenance and do it yourself Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received in cluding interference that may cause unde sired operation of the device LIGHTS HEADLIGHTS Replacing the xenon headlight bulb if so equipped AWARNING ZANHIGH VOLTAGE When xenon headlights are on they pro duce a high voltage To prevent an electric shock never attempt to modify or disas semble Always have your xenon head lights replaced at a NISSAN dealer For additional information see Headlight and turn signal switch in the Instru ments and controls section Replacing the halogen headlight bulb if so equipped The headlight is a semi sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight halogen bulb Be cause the headlight assembly must be removed from the vehicle for bulb replacement see your NISSAN dealer ACAUTION e Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb When aiming adjustment is necessary contact a NISSAN dealer Do not leave the headlight assembly open without a bulb installed for a long period of time Dust moisture smoke etc entering the headlight body may affect bulb performance Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly just before a replacement bulb is installed e Only touch the base when h
432. se death or serious personal injury To avoid or reduce the risk the procedures must be followed precisely A CAUTION This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moder ate personal injury or damage to your ve hicle To avoid or reduce the risk the pro cedures must be followed carefully APD1005 If you see this symbol it means Do not do this or Do not let this happen lt S amp If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra tion it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle 6 5 Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING AWARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth de fects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY Some vehicle parts such as lithium batter ies may contain perchlorate material The following advisory is provided Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc c
433. seconds to quit the voice recognition system at any time TUNING SWITCH While using the voice recognition system tilt the tuning switch up or down to manually control the phone system GETTING STARTED The following procedures will help you get started using the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with NISSAN Voice Recognition For ad ditional command options refer to List of voice commands in this section lt gt 4 96 Choosing a language You can interact with the Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System using English Spanish or French To change the language perform the following 1 Press and hold the l button for more than 5 seconds 2 The system announces Press the PHONE SEND button for the hands free phone system to enter the speaker adaptation mode or press the PHONE END _ button to select a dif ferent language 3 Press the button For information on speaker adaptation see Speaker Adaptation SA mode in this sec tion 4 The system announces the current language and gives you the option to change the lan guage to Spanish in Spanish or French in French To select the current language press the PHONE SEND s _ button To select a different language tilt the tuning switch or M up or down Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems NOTE You must press the l button within 5 seconds to change the language 5
434. selected to provide you with the temperature outside of your vehicle Setting mode The setting mode allows you to set reminders or preferences for alerts maintenance intervals or language displays In the setting mode screen press O to move to e Alert e Maintenance Options and press to select the menu Instruments and controls 2 19 ALERT gt BACK gt TIMER gt ICY QENTER NEXT LIC1544 XXXX mJAaA LO gt SETTING gt RESET GENTER NEXT LIC1046 MAINTENANCE kA gt TIRE gt OIL gt FILTER gt OTHER QENTER NEXT LIC1545 Alert mode The alert mode allows you to set alerts notifying you of time to rest or icy conditions The time to rest alert lets you know when you have been traveling for a long time and may need a break The icy alert notifies you that icy driving condi tions may exist 2 20 Instruments and controls Reset mode The reset mode can be selected in any screen that allows for preferences to be programmed Once the screen is selected you have the option to reset the selected distances or time to a new setting Maintenance mode The maintenance mode allows you to set alerts for the reminding of maintenance intervals for the following tires oil filter other Set a desired interval by pushing to high light the maintenance field and pressing The reset mode will open up and allow you to enter the de
435. shift in D position For passing or hill climbing depress the accel erator pedal to the floor This shifts the transmis sion down into a lower gear depending on the vehicle speed High fluid temperature protection mode This transmission has a high fluid temperature protection mode If the fluid temperature be comes too high for example when climbing steep grades in high temperature with heavy loads such as when towing a trailer engine power and under some conditions vehicle speed will be decreased automatically to reduce the chance of transmission damage Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal but the engine and vehicle speed may be limited Fail safe If the vehicle is driven under extreme con ditions such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking the fail safe system may be activated The MIL may come on to indicate the fail safe mode is activated see Malfunction Indicator Light MIL in the Instrument and controls sec tion This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly In this case place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait for 10 seconds Then push the switch back to the ON position The vehicle should return to its normal op erating condition If it does not return to its normal operating condition have a NISSAN dealer check the transmission and repair if necessary AWARNING When the high fluid temperature
436. should lock and re strict further belt movement If the retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any questions about seat belt opera tion see a NISSAN dealer Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Om LRS0242 Shoulder belt height adjustment Sedan front seats The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad justed to the position best for you See Precau tions on seat belt usage earlier in this section To adjust pull out the adjustment button and move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired position Q so the belt passes over the center of the shoulder The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off your shoulder Release the adjustment button to lock the shoul der belt anchor into position 1 19 AWARNING e After adjustment release the adjust ment button and try to move the shoul der belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you Failure to do so may reduce the effec tiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident LRS0821 Shoulder belt guide Coupe The shoulder arm can be adjusted to allow easier access to the shoulder belt The arm can also be folded down to allow rear seat passengers easier access SEAT BELT EXTENDERS If because of body siz
437. shoulder belt is positioned across the top middle portion of the child s shoulder Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing Follow the warnings cautions and instruc tions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in Three point type seat belt with retractor earlier in this section OFF PY 7 If the booster seat is installed in the front passenger seat place the ignition switch in the ON position The front passenger air bag status light may or may not illuminate depending on the size of the child and the type of booster seat being used See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM This Supplemental Restraint System SRS sec tion contains important information concerning the following systems e Driver and passenger supplemental front impact air bag NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System Front seat mounted side impact supple mental air bag Roof mounted curtain side impact supple mental air bag Seat belt with pretensioner Supplemental front impact air bag system The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions Front seat mounted side impact sup
438. side to side Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place If the restraint is not secure tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary or put the restraint in another seat and test it again You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using the vehicle seat belt if applicable Not all child restraints fit in all types of ve hicles 6 Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use If the child restraint is loose repeat steps 2 through 5 WRS0256 REAR FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system AWARNING The three point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor ALR must be used when installing a child restraint Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision Also it can change the opera tion of the front passenger air bag See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section 1 29 WRS0256 Rear facing step 1 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child safety and Child restraints sections before in stalling a child restraint Follow these steps to install a rear facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seats
439. sie prina isis elie Getting started ere tarreni kesip cee eee eee List of voice commands 0 ccc e eee Speaker Adaptation SA mode 545 Manual control isc c22cecetscae eesti sied beet Troubleshooting guide c cee eee eee Bluetooth Hands Free Phone System with Navigation System if so equipped 4 Regulatory Information 0 csc eee Voice COMMANAS esre ceed whens oe ee Connecting procedure 2 2 00000 4 108 Vehicle phonebook 20 cece cence ees 4 110 Handset phonebook 00 eee eee eens 4 112 Making a call ccscsteodiceecurelvaodanead ede d 4 113 Receivingja Call si ieecceiewete cre etaee eee ts 4 113 During Call i200 sc cnrdeereniediednareeyee ed 4 114 Ending callii ses wiaiaiatarn arstaleaiene wits gas ecaetnsle 4 115 Phone SCtINGS fic wiee ice sande apone srda 4 115 Bluetooth settings 0cc cece eee eee 4 116 Call volumes sitet wie heen daneeeeetaned akaber nd 4 117 NISSAN Voice Recognition System if so equipped pe 2 eee eect eee ees 4 117 NISSAN Voice Recognition Standard Mode 4 118 Using the Systm cece one de dd tee eee 4 121 Before starting 64 0 cuttes isan deere oe tid 4 121 Giving voice commands 0 05 4 121 NISSAN Voice Recognition Alternate Command Mode 0 0 eee eee ees 4 129 Using the Systems certs eee kee epee cari deed 4 135 Speaker Adaptation function
440. sired distance For additional information see Indicators for maintenance later in this section OPTIONS gt BACK gt LANGUAGE gt UNIT GENTER NEXT LIC1546 gt SKIP gt DETAIL GENTER NEXT LIC1098 Options mode The LANGUAGE UNIT screen will appear when selecting the Language Unit key and pressing Language English or French Unit US mile F MPG Metric km C l km You can select the language and unit using the O button and pressing The settings are automatically saved when you exit the menu by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button Warning mode The warning mode can be selected to view any warnings that may be present Once the screen is selected you have the option of skipping the warning or viewing it in detail Warnings can be present for issues such as an open door or low fuel For more information about potential warnings see Vehicle information dis play warnings and indicators later in this section Instruments and controls 2 21 MAINTENANCE ENGINE a OIL MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE OTHER GANEXT LIC2027 2 22 Instruments and controls Indicators for maintenance 1 Engine oil replacement indicator This indicator appears when the customer set distance comes for changing the engine oil You can set or reset the distance for changing the engine oil See Maintena
441. so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS The cruise control allows driving at a speed be tween 25 89 MPH 40 144 km h without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal To turn on the cruise control push the ON OFF switch The CRUISE indicator light in the instrument panel comes on To set cruising speed accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed push the COAST SET switch and release it The SET indicator light in the instrument panel comes on Take your foot off the accelerator pedal Your vehicle maintains the set speed e To pass another vehicle depress the ac celerator pedal When you release the pedal the vehicle returns to the previously set speed The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills If this happens drive without the cruise control To cancel the preset speed use one of the following three methods Push the CANCEL button the SET indicator light in the instrument panel goes out e Tap the brake pedal the SET indicator light goes out e Push the ON OFF switch off Both the CRUISE indicator light and SET indicator light in the instrument panel go out The cruise control is automatically canceled and the SET light in the instrument panel goes out if you depress the brake or clutch pedal while pushing the ACCEL RES or SET COAST switch The preset speed is deleted from memory the vehicle slow
442. speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped Recommended types and sizes are shown in Wheels and tires in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual AWARNING The use of tires other than those recom mended or the mixed use of tires of different brands construction bias bias belted or radial or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride braking handling VDC system if so equipped ground clearance body to tire clear ance tire chain clearance speedom eter calibration headlight aim and bumper height Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury e If your vehicle was originally equipped with 4 tires that were the same size and you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires install the new tires on the rear axle Placing new tires on the front axle may cause loss of vehicle control in some driving conditions and cause an acci dent and personal injury If the wheels are changed for any rea son always replace with wheels which have the same off set dimension Wheels of a different off set could cause premature tire wear degrade ve hicle handling characteristics affect the VDC system if so equipped and or interference with the brake discs drums Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and or early brake pad shoe wear Re fer to Wheels and tires in the Techni cal and consumer information
443. splay Album Cover Art eon LHA1257 co 8 00 Artist TUNE 3 Folder XXXXXXXK Album XXXXXXXK Track XXXXXXXX Folder 1of4 Track 1 of1 0 40 LHA1258 Display album cover art When an audio source encoded with album cover art is played the album cover art can be displayed on the screen To toggle this feature on or off touch the Display Album Cover Art key When the feature is activated the amber indica tor next to the word ON will illuminate CD DVD or USB with compressed audio files While listening to a CD or compressed audio files certain text might be able to be displayed when CD encoded with text is being used Depending on how the CD or compressed audio files are encoded the following text might be displayed Folder displays the name of the current folder being accessed File displays the name of the file currently playing 4 56 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems e Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the song name Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the album name Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the artist s name Some of this text might not display while playing a regular CD FM AM SAT radio operation FM AM band select Pressing the FM AM button will change the band as follows AM FM1 FM2 AM When the FM AM button is pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
444. strap route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point rear seat installation only See In stalling top tether strap in this section Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 35 LRSO667 Forward facing step 4 4 Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended At this time the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR mode child restraint mode It reverts to Emergency Locking Retractor ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted LRS0668 Forward facing step 5 5 Allow the seat belt to retract Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt 1 36 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 6 WRS0681 Forward facing step 6 Remove any additional slack from the seat belt press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions to remove any slack WRS0698 Forward facing step 8 8 After attaching the child restraint test it be fore you place the child in it Push it from side to side while holding the child restr
445. such as from a portable cas sette tape CD player MP3 player or laptop com puters Press the AUX button to play a compatible device when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 47 1 2 3 5 6 7 Bros ioscan E as disc Qe ome Qe ome vi SEEK CATEGORY SCROLL TUNE U ae cD 0 AUX j ww ON OFF PUSH SETTING ENTER xe 15 13 12 11 10 WHA1475 1 SCAN button 7 SEEK CATEGORY button 2 Station select 1 6 buttons 8 SETTING ENTER button SCROLL 3 CD insert slot TUNE knob 4 Display screen 9 AUXIN jack 5 iPod MENU button 10 AUX button 6 amp CD eject button 11 CD button 4 48 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 12 AM FM button 13 RPT button 14 VOL ON OFF control knob 15 RDM button No satellite radio reception is available when the AUX button is pressed to ac cess satellite radio stations unless op tional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an XM satellite radio ser vice subscription is active Satellite ra dio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam FM AM SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC CD PLAYER if so equipped For all operation precautions see Audio opera tion precautions earlier in this section Audio main operation VOL ON OFF control Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and push
446. switch is operational only when the Intelligent Key has been de tected by the Intelligent Key system Lockout protection To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci dentally locked in the vehicle lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key When the driver s side door is open the doors are locked and then the Intelligent Key is put inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed the lock will automatically unlock and the door buzzer sounds NOTE The doors may not lock when the Intelli gent Key is in the same hand that is oper ating the request switch to lock the door Put the Intelligent Key in a purse pocket or your other hand A CAUTION The lockout protection may not function under the following conditions When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of the instrument panel When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of the rear parcel shelf When the Intelligent Key is placed in side the glove box or a storage bin When the Intelligent Key is placed in side the door pockets When the Intelligent Key is placed on or under the spare tire area When the Intelligent Key is placed in side or near metallic materials WPD0432 Coupe shown Sedan similar Unlocking doors 1 Carry the Intelligent Key 2 Push the door handle request switch 3 The hazard warning lights flash once and the outside buzzer sounds once Push the door handle request swi
447. system tells you then prompts you for a name again The system will ask you to transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone s memory Enter a phone number by voice command For example say five five five one two one two See How to say numbers in this section for more information To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phone s memory Say Transfer entry The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate the transfer from the phone handset The new contact phone number will be transferred from the cellular phone via the Bluetooth communication link The transfer procedure varies according to each cellular phone See the cellular phone Owner s Manual for details You can also visit www nissanusa com bluetooth for instructions on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN recommended cellular phones The system repeats the number and prompts you for the next command When you have finished entering numbers or transferring an entry choose Store The system confirms the name location and number Delete Entry Use the Delete Entry command to erase one entry from the phonebook After the system rec ognizes the command speak the name to delete or say List Names to choose an entry List Names Use the List Names command to hear all the names in the phonebook The system recites the phonebook entries but does not include the actual phone numb
448. systems A NISSAN Towing Guide U S only is available on the website at www nissanusa com This guide includes information on trailer towing ca pability and the special equipment required for proper towing 9 16 Technical and consumer information MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS Maximum trailer loads Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the value specified in the Towing Load Specification chart found later in this sec tion The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight When towing a trailer load of 1 000 Ibs 454 kg or more trailers with a brake system must be used aes Q a N gt ed LT10164 The Gross Combined Weight Rating GCWR equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle including passengers and cargo plus the total trailer load Towing loads greater than these or using improper towing equipment could ad versely affect vehicle handling braking and per formance The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not only related to the maximum trailer loads but also the places you plan to tow Tow weights appro priate for level highway driving may have to be reduced for low traction situations for example on slippery boat ramps Temperature conditions can also affect towing For example towing a heavy trailer in high outside temperatures on graded roads can affect engine performance and cause overheating The engine protection mode
449. t displaying AF in the instrument panel moni tors the circuits of the supplemental front impact air bag front seat mounted side impact supple mental air bag roof mounted curtain side impact supplemental air bag and seat belt pretensioner systems The monitored circuits include the Air bag Control Unit ACU crash zone sensor sat ellite sensors side impact air bag pressure sen sors occupant classification system front air bag modules side air bag modules curtain air bag modules pretensioners and all related wiring When the ignition is placed in the ON position the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off This means the system is operational If any of the following conditions occur the front air bag side air bag and curtain air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing The supplemental air bag warning light re mains on after approximately 7 seconds The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all Under these conditions the front air bag side air bag and curtain air bag or pretensioner systems may not operate properly They must be checked and repaired Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer AWARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on it could mean that the front air bag side air bag curtain air bag and or preten sioner systems will not operate in a
450. t if so equipped SERVICE ENGINE SOON aS R Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Security indicator light Slip indicator light Continuously Variable Transmission CVT CRUISE Cruise main switch indicator light check warning light if so equipped ras Se Turn signal hazard indicator lights Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC OFF indicator light Engine oil pressure warning light Cruise set switch indicator light SET OFF ee 2 HO High beam indicator light blue Low tire pressure warning light Front passenger air bag status light Master warning light CHECKING BULBS With all doors closed apply the parking brake and place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine The following lights will come on The following lights come on briefly and then go If any light fails to come on it may indicate off a burned out bulb or an open circuit in the electrical system Have the system repaired of ABS o y promptly AT 1 OFF 13 CHECK SERVICE r EH or Er Be A AN 2 10 Instruments and controls WARNING LIGHTS ABS Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position the Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light illuminates and then turns off This indicates the ABS is operational If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine is running or while driving it may indicate
451. t belts with pretensioners Front seats AWARNING e The pretensioners cannot be reused af ter activation They must be replaced together with the retractor and buckle as a unit If the vehicle becomes involved in a frontal collision but a pretensioner is not activated be sure to have the pre tensioner system checked and if nec essary replaced by your NISSAN dealer No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pretensioner system This is to pre vent damage to or accidental activation of the pretensioners Tampering with the pretensioner system may result in serious personal injury Work around and on the pretensioner system should be done by a NISSAN dealer Installation of electrical equip ment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner system If you need to dispose of a pretensioner or scrap the vehicle contact a NISSAN dealer Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 55 The pretensioner system activates in conjunction with the front air bag system Working with the seat belt retractor it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions helping to restrain front seat occupants The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt retractor These seat belts are used t
452. t impressions in the seat Such objects can damage the seat or occu pant classification sensor pattern sen sor This can affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury Do not use water or acidic cleaners hot steam cleaners on the seat This can damage the seat or occupant classifica tion sensor This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury Immediately after inflation several front air bag system components will be hot Do not touch them you may se verely burn yourself No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system e Tampering with the front air bag system may result in serious personal injury Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system Modifying or tampering with the front Passenger seat may result in serious personal injury For example do not change the front seats by placing mate rial on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material such as seat covers on the seat that are not specifi cally designed to assure proper air bag operation Additionally do not sto
453. t speeds above 3 6 MPH 5 10 km h The speed varies according to road conditions When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels are close to locking up the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating This is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly However the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is re quired while driving 5 26 Starting and driving VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL VDC SYSTEM The Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC system uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve hicle motion Under certain driving conditions the VDC System helps to perform the following functions Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on the same axle Controls brake pressure and engine output to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle speed traction control function Controls brake pressure at individual wheels and engine output to help the driver maintain control of the vehicle in the following condi tions understeer vehicle tends to not follow the steered path despite increased steer ing input oversteer vehicle tends to spin due to certain road or driving condi
454. tch again within 5 seconds to unlock all doors WPD0369 If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the doors that door may not be unlocked Returning the door handle to its original position will unlock the door If the door does not unlock after return ing the door handle push the door handle re quest switch to unlock the door All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pushing the request switch Opening any door Pushing the ignition switch Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 11 The interior light timer illuminates for 30 seconds when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position The interior light can be turned off without waiting for 30 seconds by performing one of the follow ing operations e Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi tion Locking the doors with the remote controller Switching the room light switch to the OFF position 3 12 Pre driving checks and adjustments LPD0478 Opening the trunk lid 1 Push the trunk opener request switch for more than 1 second while carrying the Intel ligent Key with you 2 The trunk will unlatch A chime will sound 4 times 3 Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk Lockout protection To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci dentally locked in the trunk lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent K
455. te control through NISSAN Voice Recognition When this mode is active an expanded list of commands can be spoken after pushing the TALK switch on the steering wheel and the voice com mand menu prompts are turned off In Alternate Command Mode the recognition success rate may be affected because the num ber of available commands and the ways of speaking each command are increased See NISSAN Voice Recognition Alternate Com mand Mode in this section Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 117 To improve the recognition success rate when Alternate Command Mode is active try using the Speaker Adaptation Function available in that mode See Speaker Adaptation Function in this section Otherwise it is recommended that Alter nate Command Mode be turned off and Standard Mode be used for the best recognition perfor mance While using the NISSAN Voice Recognition sys tem for certain Phone and Navigation features you can switch to using manual controls touch screen steering wheel controls and the informa tion you have already entered by voice control will be retained To switch to manual controls select the Manual Controls key on the display when it appears The system will respond by speaking Changing to manual operation Please use manual controls to continue For the voice commands for the navigation sys tem refer to the Navigation System Owner s Manual of your vehicle
456. te properly Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted All child restraints and attaching hard ware should be inspected after any col lision Always follow the restraint manufacturer s inspection instructions and replacement recommendations The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged PREGNANT WOMEN NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts The seat belt should be worn snug and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips not the waist Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest Never run the lap shoulder belt over your ab dominal area Contact your doctor for specific recommendations INJURED PERSONS NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts Check with your doctor for specific recommendations THREE POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR AWARNING e Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times e Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined This can be dangerous The shoulder belt will not be against your body In an accident you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries e For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion the seat should be upright Always sit w
457. ted When the CVT fluid temperature is high the shift range may upshift in lower rom than usual This is not a malfunction 5 16 Starting and driving WSD0250 Shift lock release If the battery charge is low or discharged the shift selector may not be moved from the P Park position even with the brake pedal depressed and the shift selector button pushed It will be necessary to jump start or have your battery charged see Jump starting in the In case of emergency section Contact your NISSAN dealer or a professional towing service To move the shift selector complete the following procedure 1 Push the ignition switch to the LOCK posi tion 2 Apply the parking brake 3 Using a protective cloth on the tip of a3 mm screwdriver remove the shift lock release cover If available a plastic trim tool can also be used 4 Insert the small screwdriver in the shift lock release slot and push down 5 Move the shift selector to the N Neutral position while holding down the shift lock release If the shift selector cannot be moved out of P Park have a NISSAN dealer check the trans mission as soon as possible AWARNING If the shift selector cannot be moved from the P Park position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed the stop lights may not work Malfunction ing stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others Accelerator down
458. ted to these anchors For details see LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren sys tem later in this section If you do not have a LATCH compatible child restraint the vehicle seat belts can be used Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and children of various sizes When se lecting any child restraint keep the following points in mind Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle s seat and seat belt system 1 24 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Ifthe child restraint is compatible with your vehicle place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child Choose a child restraint that is designed for your child s height and weight Always follow all recommended procedures All U S states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated Canadian law requires the top tether strap on forward facing child restraints be secured to the designated an chor point on the vehicle WRS0795 LATCH system lower anchor locations LATCH Lower Anchors and Te
459. ted with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played 2 Available codes depend on what kind of media versions and information are going to be displayed 4 36 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Troubleshooting guide Symptom Cause and Countermeasure Cannot play Poor sound quality It takes a relatively long time before the music starts playing Music cuts off or skips Skipping with high bit rate Moves immediately to the Songs do not play back in Check if the disc was inserted correctly Check if the disc is scratched or dirty Check if there is condensation inside the player If there is wait until the condensation is gone about 1 hour before using the player If there is a temperature increase error the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature If there is a mixture of music CD files CD DA data and MP3 WMA files on a CD only the music CD files CD DA data will be played Files with extensions other than MP3 WMA mp3 or wma cannot be played In addition the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications Check if the finalization process such as session close and disc close is done for the disc Check if the disc is protected by copyright Check if the disc is scratched or dirty Bit rate may be too low If there
460. tellite radio to receive all of the necessary data No satellite radio reception is available and NO SAT is displayed when the SAT band option is selected unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an XM satellite radio service subscription is active Satellite radio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam Satellite radio performance may be affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio signal If possible do not put cargo over the satellite antenna A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can affect satellite radio performance Remove the ice to restore satellite radio reception COMPACT LHA0099 AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS 4 30 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Compact disc CD player models without Navigation System ACAUTION Do not force a compact disc into the CD insert slot This could damage the CD and or CD player e Only one CD can be loaded into the CD player at a time e Only use high quality 4 7 in 12 cm round discs that have the COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO logo on the disc or packaging e During cold weather or rainy days the player may malfunction due to the hu midity If this occurs remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely e The player may skip while driving on rough roads e The CD player sometimes cannot func tion when the compartment temper
461. th 36 58 5th to 6th 51 82 For VO35DE Gear change MPH km h 1st to 2nd 15 24 2nd to 3rd 25 40 3rd to 4th 40 64 4th to 5th 45 72 5th to 6th 50 80 Suggested maximum speed in each gear Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly or if you need to accelerate Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed shown below in any gear For level road driving use the highest gear suggested for that speed Always observe posted speed limits and drive according to the road conditions which will en sure safe operation Do not over rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control GEAR QR25DE VQ35DE MPH km h MPH km h 1st 32 53 36 58 2nd 59 95 58 93 3rd 82 133 81 131 4th 5th _ 6th PARKING BRAKE AWARNING e Be sure the parking brake is fully re leased before driving Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident e Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle e Do not use the shift selector in place of the parking brake When parking be sure the parking brake is fully engaged e Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle They could release the parking brake and cause an accident LSD0158 Type A To engage Type A firmly depress the parking brake Type B pull the lever up To release 1 Firmly apply the foot brake 2 Manual transmission models Place
462. the hazard warning flashers and either contact a roadside emergency service to change the tire or see Changing a flat tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual DRINKING ALCOHOL DRUGS AND DRIVING AWARNING Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs Alcohol in the bloodstream re duces coordination delays reaction time and impairs judgement Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others Additionally if you are injured in an accident alcohol can increase the severity of the injury NISSAN is committed to safe driving However you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol related accidents Al though the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol Remember drinking and driving don t mix And that is true for drugs too over the counter pre scription and illegal drugs Don t drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco hol drugs or some other physical condition PUSH BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH AWARNING Do not operate the push button ignition switch while driving the vehicle except in an emergency The engine will stop when the ignition switch is pushed 3 consecu tive times in quic
463. the iPod connected the system will turn on If another audio source is playing and the iPod is connected press the DISC AUX but ton repeatedly until the center display changes to the iPod mode Interface The interface for iPod operation shown on the vehicle center display is similar to the iPod in terface Use the touchscreen to control your fa vorite settings The following items can be chosen from the menu list screen For further information about each item see the iPod Owner s Manual Now Playing e Playlists Artists e Albums Songs Podcasts Genres Composers Audiobooks Shuffle Songs The following keys shown on the screen are also available Menu returns to the previous screen e Pil plays pauses the music selected Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 75 iPod gt Play Mode 8 00 Shuffle Songs Repeat All Audiobooks Normal LHA1315 Play mode While the iPod is playing touch the Menu key to display the iPod menu Touch the Play Mode key to display the Play Mode screen and adjust the settings for Shuffle Repeat and Audio books For further information about each item see the iPod Owner s Manual Seeking button When the 44 or PP side of the seeking button is pressed for less than 1 5 seconds while the iPod is playing the next track or the begin ning of the
464. the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead NISSAN recommends waxing the road wheels to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter Spare tire TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire Observe the following precautions if the TEM PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used Otherwise your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident AWARNING The spare tire should be used for emer gency use only It should be replaced with the standard tire at the first oppor tunity to avoid possible tire or differen tial damage Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving Periodically check spare tire inflation pressure Always keep the pressure of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire at 60 psi 420 kPa 4 2 bar With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire installed do not drive the vehicle at speeds faster than 50 MPH 80 km h When driving on roads covered with snow or ice the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire should be used on the rear wheels and the original tire used on the front wheels drive wheels Use tire chains only on th
465. thers for CHildren SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren system compatible child restraints This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system With this system you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint LATCH lower anchor AWARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instruc tions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious in jury or death of a child or other passen gers in a sudden stop or collision Attach LATCH system compatible child restraints only at the locations shown in the illustration Do not secure a child restraint in the center rear seating position using the LATCH lower anchors The child restraint will not be secured properly Inspect the lower anchors by insert ing your fingers into the lower anchor area Feel to make sure there are no obstructions over the anchors such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material The child restraint will not be secured properly if the lower an chors are obstructed Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0700 LATCH lower anchor location LATCH lower anchor location The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear of the seat cushion near the seatback A label is attached to the seatback to help you locate the LATCH lower anchors 1 25
466. tion when the shift selec tor is moved to the P Park position See Shift P warning CVT models in this sec tion for additional information To turn off the Push warning place the ignition switch in the ON position and then in the LOCK position Low fuel warning This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low Refuel as soon as it is convenient preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E Empty There will be a small re serve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E Empty 2 24 Instruments and controls Low windshield washer fluid warning This warning illuminates when the windshield washer fluid is at a low level Add windshield washer fluid as necessary See Windshield washer fluid in the Maintenance and do it yourself section of this manual No key warning This warning illuminates following two condi tions 1 When the ignition switch is pushed and the Intelligent Key cannot be recognized by the system If this warning illuminates you can not start the engine Check for the following causes and perform the assigned remedies The battery of the Intelligent Key carried with you is discharged completely Re place the battery with a new one The Intelligent Key carried with you is not registered to the system Use the regis tered Intelligent Key You do not have an Intelligent Key with you Carry an Intelligent Key with you
467. tions The VDC system can help the driver to maintain control of the vehicle but it cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving situations When the VDC system operates the R indi cator in the instrument panel flashes so note the following The road may be slippery or the system may determine some action is required to help keep the vehicle on the steered path You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working properly Adjust your speed and driving to the road conditions See Slip indicator light and Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC off indicator light in the Instru ments and controls section If a malfunction occurs in the system the ft and indicator lights come on in the instru ment panel The VDC system automatically turns off when these indicator lights are on The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC system The 8 indicator illuminates to indi cate the VDC system is off When the VDC switch is used to turn off the system the VDC system still operates to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by transferring power to a non slipping drive wheel The indicator flashes if this occurs All other VDC functions are off and the indicator will not flash The VDC system is automatically reset to on when the ignition switch is placed in the off position then back to the on posit
468. tires Other maintenance items can include such things as air filter or tire rotation You can set or reset the dis tance for checking or replacing the items See Maintenance mode earlier in this sec tion For scheduled maintenance items and intervals see your NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide WARNING WARNING S WARNING DOOR H i No 5 oo LOOSE RS CLUTCH a PUSH WARNING RELEASE PT a WARNING S CHECK BRAKE w 19 TIRE PRESSURE oo NG RANGE P 7 we ii 000 Eh 3 m MILES SHIFT NE WARNING 0 0 er LOW 4 8 12 SE WASHER drake 8 rm TE LIC2007 Vehicle information display warnings 4 Low windshield washer fluid warning 8 Engine start operation indicator and indicators 5 No key warning CVT models 1 Door and trunk open warning 6 Parking brake warning 9 re eli indicator cae anaes alaieei fy SRD Walon CaM inode 10 NISSAN Intelligent Key insertion indicator 3 Low fuel warning Instruments and controls 2 23 11 NISSAN Intelligent Key removal indicator 12 NISSAN Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator 13 Loose fuel cap warning 14 Check tire pressure warning Door and trunk open warning This warning illuminates when a door or the trunk has been opened when the engine is running Push warning CVT models After the Shift P warning illuminates the Push warning will illuminate if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC posi
469. tment to further improve the defog ging performance Operating tips Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and air inlet in front of the windshield This improves heater operation AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION Start the engine turn the fan control dial to the desired position and push inthe 4 button to activate the air conditioner When the air condi tioner is on cooling and dehumidifying functions are added to the heater operation The air conditioner cooling function oper ates only when the engine is running Cooling This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air 1 Press the gt button to the OFF position 2 Press MAX A C or 4 button air flow control 3 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion 4 Push the A C comes on button the indicator light 5 Turn the temperature control dial to the de sired position Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 21 For quick cooling when the outside tem perature is high push the CS button to the ON position Be sure to return the TS to the OFF position for normal cooling MAX A C may be used for quick cooling Dehumidified heating This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air 1 Press the gt button to the OFF position 9 Press the air flow control button 3 Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi tion 4 Push the 4 7 comes on button The indicator light 5 Turn the temper
470. tom of the steering wheel with one hand Move your hand in the direction in which you want the trailer to go Make small corrections and back up slowly If possible have someone guide you when you are backing up Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking Parking on a slope is not recommended however if you must do so ACAUTION If you move the shift selector to the P Park position before blocking the wheels and applying the parking brake transmission damage could occur 1 Apply and hold the brake pedal 2 Have someone place blocks on the downhill side of the vehicle and trailer wheels 3 After the wheel blocks are in place slowly release the brake pedal until the blocks ab sorb the vehicle load 4 Apply the parking brake 5 Shift the transmission into P Park 6 Turn off the engine Technical and consumer information 9 21 To 1 a fF WO ND o gt drive away Start the vehicle Apply and hold the brake pedal Shift the transmission into gear Release the parking brake Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are clear from the blocks Apply and hold the brake pedal 7 Have someone retrieve and store the blocks 9 22 Technical and consumer information While going downhill the weight of the trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may dete riorate overall handling characteristics Therefore to maintain adequate control re duce your speed and shift to
471. topping dis tance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel If the brake fluid level is below the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir do not drive until the brake system has been checked at a NISSAN dealer Anti lock Braking System ABS warning indicator When the parking brake is released and the brake fluid level is sufficient if both the brake warning light and the Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light illuminate it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly Have the brake system checked and if necessary repaired by a NISSAN dealer promptly Avoid high speed driv ing and abrupt braking See Anti lock Braking System ABS warning light in this section Charge warning light If this light comes on while the engine is running it may indicate the charging system is not func tioning properly Turn the engine off and check the generator belt If the belt is loose broken missing or if the light remains on see a NISSAN dealer immediately Instruments and controls 2 11 ACAUTION e Do not ground electrical accessories directly to the battery terminal Doing so will bypass the variable control sys tem and the vehicle battery may not charge completely Refer to Variable voltage control system in the Mainte nance and do it yourself section later in this manual Do not continue driving if the generator belt is loose broken or m
472. tors 0 e eee eae 8 22 FUSOS ihes stems inate cee aa E A 8 23 Engine compartment 0 0 0 0 cece eee 8 24 Passenger compartment 0 ee eee 8 25 Battery replacement 0 0 0 cece eee eee 8 27 NISSAN Intelligent Key 00005 8 27 Ligh S cerei canine ote ders rotaen ONEEN en Hoes 8 28 HeadlightSic 200 siicnen tasieas tepien wea itis 8 28 Front park turn sidemarker light 8 29 Exterior and interior lights 0 008 8 30 Upper tether anchor key cylinder covers 8 36 Removing covers from rear parcel shelf 8 37 Installing covers to rear parcel shelf 8 37 Wheels and tires su 2 ce eid iris ie iiris anite 8 38 TYPOS Of tOSe cia sedis tude dod haan ates 8 45 Tire PRESSE iien mucritgteaue cane Seasdaleriveutiectotnanet 8 38 WIRE CHAINS iios acrhacnged teh adenatcent aot ded ne drah neaotat 8 46 MIPS NAD SLING synns dees encant tvaits wane greta Sten Micelle 8 42 Changing wheels and tires 00 8 47 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS Your NISSAN has been designed to have mini mum maintenance requirements with long ser vice intervals to save you both time and money However some day to day and regular mainte nance is essential to maintain your NISSAN s good mechanical condition as well as its emis sions and engine performance It is the owner s responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance as well as gen
473. tors and warnings other information For details about the Intelligent Key see NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Pre driving checks and adjustments section HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY Press the button located on the instru ment panel just behind the steering wheel to display the following modes MPG MPG MPH Time Miles Range Exterior Temperature Setting Warning Instruments and controls 2 17 LIC1093 MPG MPH 24 9 18 7 LIC1097 TIME MILES Fuel economy mode The fuel economy mode can be selected to dis play the instant fuel economy since the last reset 2 18 Instruments and controls WIC1266 Average speed mode The average speed mode can be selected to display the average miles per gallon and miles per hour since the last reset Time Miles km mode The time miles km mode can be selected to show the time and distance driven since the last reset LIC1095 OUTSIDE TEMP 68 F LIC1096 SETTING ild gt MAINTENANCE gt ALERT gt OPTIONS QENTER NEXT LIC1541 Range mode The range mode can be selected to give you an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling The range is constantly calcu lated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption Exterior temperature mode The exterior temperature mode can be
474. tration The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions ACAUTION If the gauge indicates coolant tempera ture near the hot H end of the normal range reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature If the gauge is over the nor mal range stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible If the engine is over heated continued operation of the ve hicle may seriously damage the engine See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section for immediate action required Instruments and controls 2 5 UF Mii lt a we 7 E LIC1060 FUEL GAUGE The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank The gauge may move slightly during braking turning acceleration or going up or down hills The gauge needle returns to E Empty after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position The low fuel warning light comes on when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis ters E Empty 2 6 Instruments and controls The lt p indicates that the fuel filler door is located on the driver s side of the vehicle A CAUTION if the vehicle runs out of fuel the ENGINE Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may come on Refuel as soon as possible After a few driving trips the ENGINE light should turn off If the light remains on after a few driving trips have the vehicle inspected by a
475. trols ACAUTION e Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink If the liquid is hot it can scald you or your passenger e Use only soft cups in the cup holder Hard objects can injure you in an accident WIC1216 Soft bottle holder Soft bottle holder ACAUTION e Do not use bottle holder for any other objects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during sudden braking or an accident e Do not use bottle holder for open liquid containers me WIC1076 WIC1120 na GLOVE BOX Open the glove box by pulling the handle Use the master key when locking or unlocking the glove box AWARNING Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop WIC1121 CONSOLE BOX Upper half Pull up on the driver s side latch to open the upper half of the console box The mat if so equipped may be removed for cleaning The upper half of the console box may be used for storage of cellular phones An access hole is provided at the front of the upper half of the console box for phone cord routing to the power outlet Lower half Pull up on the passenger s side latch to open the ower half of the console box A power outlet is ocated inside the console box The mat if so equipped may be removed for cleaning Instruments and controls
476. try or Rock Station specific text If the station broadcasts RDS information the text information is automatically displayed 4 58 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems on LHA1413 Compact disc CD player operation Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position The CD DVD insert slot is located be hind the display screen To insert a CD press the OPEN TILT button on the audio unit The display screen will automatically move down to expose the CD DVD insert slot Insert the CD into the slot with the label side facing up The CD will be guided automatically into the slot and begin play ing To return the display screen to its upright position after the CD is inserted press the OPEN TILT button again If the radio is already operating it will automati cally turn off and the compact disc will play If the system has been turned off while the com pact disc was playing pressing the VOL ON OFF control knob will start the compact disc DISC AUX button When the DISC AUX button is pressed with the system off and the compact disc loaded the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play When the DISC AUX button is pressed with the compact disc loaded but the radio playing the radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play lt lt When the M4 side of the seeking button is
477. ts heater air conditioner etc Remove vent caps on the battery if so equipped Cover the battery with an old cloth to reduce explosion hazard Connect jumper cables in the sequence il lustrated In case of emergency 6 9 ACAUTION e Always connect positive to positive and negative to body ground for example strut mounting bolt engine lift bracket etc not to the battery Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine com partment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal 5 Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes 6 Keep the engine speed of the booster ve hicle at about 2 000 rpm and start the en gine of the vehicle being jump started ACAUTION Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds If the engine does not start right away turn the key off and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again 7 After starting the engine carefully discon nect the negative cable and then the positive cable 8 Replace the vent caps if so equipped Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid 6 10 Incase of emergency PUSH STARTING ACAUTION e Do not push start this vehicle The three way catalyst may be damaged e Continuously Variable Transmission CVT models cannot be push started or tow started Attempting
478. tter button 4 The HomeLink indicator light will flash first slowly and then rapidly When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly release both buttons The HomeLink Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed The new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink button that was just programmed This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink buttons IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN If your vehicle is stolen you should change the codes of any non rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink Consult the Owner s Manual of each device or call the manu facturer or dealer of those devices for additional information When your vehicle is recovered you will need to reprogram the HomeLink Univer sal Transceiver with your new transmitter information FCC Notice This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Opera tion is subject to the following two condi tions 1 This device may not cause harmful in terference and 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received in cluding interference that may cause unde sired operation This transmitter has been tested and com plies with FCC and DOC MDC rules Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to op erate the equipment DOC ISTC 1763K1313 FCC I D CV2V67690 Instruments and controls
479. ty of injury may be greatly reduced NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive even if your seating position includes a supple mental air bag Most U S states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven 1 14 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Sit upright and weil back SSS0016 AWARNING AWARNING e Every person who drives or rides in this The seat belt should be properly ad vehicle should use a seat belt at all justed to a snug fit Failure to do so may times Children should be properly re reduce the effectiveness of the entire strained in the rear seat and if appro restraint system and increase the priate in a child restraint chance or severity of injury in an acci dent Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 15 SSS0014 AWARNING e Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest Never put the belt behind your back under your arm or across your neck The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off your shoulder Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS NOT THE WAIST A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident Be sure
480. uch as component locks identification markers and tracking systems are available at auto supply stores and specialty shops Your NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment Check with your insurance company to see if you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features How to arm the vehicle security system 1 Close all windows The system can be armed even if the windows are open 2 Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle 3 Close all doors hood and trunk Lock all doors The doors can be locked with the Intelligent Key door handle request switch if so equipped power door lock switch or mechanical key 4 Confirm that the security indicator light comes on The security light stays on for about 30 seconds The vehicle security sys tem is now pre armed After about 30 sec onds the vehicle security system automati cally shifts into the armed phase The security light begins to flash once every 3 seconds If during the 30 second pre arm time period the driver s door is unlocked by the key or the keyfob or the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position the sys tem will not arm Even when the driver and or passen gers are in the vehicle the system will activate with all the doors hood and trunk lid locked with the ignition switch placed in the LOCK position When placing the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position the system will be released Vehicle security system a
481. uine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue is used follow the coolant manufacturer s instructions to maintain minimum anti freeze protection to 34 F 37 C The use of other types of coolant solutions other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue or equivalent may damage the engine cooling system The life expectancy of the factory fill coolant is 105 000 miles 168 000 km or 7 years Mixing any other type of cool ant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue includ ing Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant green or the use of non distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory fill cool ant Refer to the Nissan Service and Maintenance Guide for more details LDI0554 CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold If the coolant level is below the MIN level add coolant to the MAX level If the reservoir is empty check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant blue The life expectancy of the factory fill coolant is 105 000 miles 168 000 km or 7 years Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non distilled water will reduce th
482. uld be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline e If an oxygenate blend other than methanol blend is used it should con tain no more than 10 oxygenate MTBE may however be added up to 15 e If a methanol blend is used it should contain no more than 5 methanol methyl alcohol wood alcohol It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvenis and corro sion inhibitors If not properly formu lated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and or vehicle performance problems At this time sufficient data is not avail able to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN ve hicles If any driveability problems such as engine stall ing and difficult hot starting are experienced after using oxygenate blend fuels immediately change to a non oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE Take care not to spill gasoline during refu eling Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage Technical and consumer information 9 3 E 85 fuel E 85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline E 85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV Do not use E 85 in your vehicle U S government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small square orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the
483. um weight of 2 000 Ib 909 kg You may add Class trailer hitch equipment that has a 2 000 Ib 909 kg maximum weight rating to the vehicle but your vehicle is only capable of towing the maximum trailer weights shown in the Towing Load Specification chart earlier in this section Technical and consumer information 9 19 A CAUTION e Do not use axle mounted hitches The hitch should not be attached to or affect the operation of the impact absorbing bumper e Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys tem brake system etc to install a trailer hitch To reduce the possibility of additional damage if your vehicle is struck from the rear where practical remove the receiver when not in use e After the hitch is removed seal the bolt holes to prevent exhaust fumes water or dust from entering the passenger compartment Regularly check that all trailer hitch mounting bolts are securely mounted 9 20 Technical and consumer information Tire pressures When towing a trailer inflate the ve hicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label Trailer tire condition size load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturer s specifications Safety chains Always use suitable safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer The safety chains should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch not to
484. unterclockwise to remove 2 Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder while refueling To install the fuel filler cap 1 Insert the fuel filler cap straight into the fuel filler tube 2 Turn the fuel filler cap clockwise until it clicks The fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type LPD0449 Sedan WARNING oro LOOSE FUEL RS CAP LRS2006 Loose Fuel Cap warning The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in the vehicle information display when the fuel filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled To turn off the warning do the following 1 Remove and install the fuel filler cap as soon as possible See Fuel filler cap 2 Tighten the fuel filler cap until it clicks 3 Press the next button on the in strument panel located behind the steering wheel for about 1 second to turn off the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning after tight ening the fuel filler cap Pre driving checks and adjustments 3 27 TILT TELESCOPIC STEERING LPD0398 TILT OPERATION Pull the lever all the way toward you and adjust the steering wheel up or down to the desired position Lock the wheel by releasing the lever and ensure that the lever has returned to its original position AWARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident 3 28 Pre driving checks and adjustments TELESCOPIC OPE
485. up and down smoothly and the lock knobs if so equipped hold securely in all latched posi tions Maintenance and do it yourself 8 3 Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt system for example buckles anchors adjusters and retractors operate properly and smoothly and are installed securely Check the belt web bing for cuts fraying wear or damage Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer ing system such as excessive freeplay hard steering or strange noises Warning lights and chimes Make sure all warning lights and chimes are operating properly Windshield wiper and washer Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak Windshield defroster Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner Under the hood and vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically for example each time you check the engine oil or refuel Battery Check the fluid level in each cell It should be between the MAX and MIN lines Ve hicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level 8 4 Maintenance and do it yourself Brake and clutch fluid levels Make sure that the brake and clutch fluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir Engine coolant level Check the coolant level when the engine is c
486. ure the headlight switch is in the OFF position 3 Remove the fuse box cover 4 Pinch the locking tabs found on each side of the storage switch Pull the storage switch straight out from the fuse box 2 BATTERY REPLACEMENT ACAUTION Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery or removed parts NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY LDI2001 Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol lows 1 Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli gent Key 2 Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the lower part Use a cloth to protect the casing 3 Replace the battery with a new one Recommended battery CR2032 or equiva lent Do not touch the internal circuit and elec tric terminals as doing so could cause a malfunction Hold the battery by the edges Holding the battery across the contact points will seriously deplete the storage capacity Make sure that the side faces the bot tom of the case Maintenance and do it yourself 8 27 eo WDI0568 4 Close the lid securely as illustrated 5 Operate the buttons to check the operation See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for replacement FCC Notice Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to op erate the equipment This device complie
487. ures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals 4 26 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner AUTOMATIC OPERATION Cooling or heating auto This mode may be normally used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a con stant temperature Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically 1 Press the AUTO button on 2 Turn the driver s side temperature control dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature Driver and passenger tem peratures can be set independently Press DUAL or turn the passenger temperature control dial to the left or right to activate dual climate control functions Turn the passen ger s side temperature control dial to the left or right to set the desired passenger s tem perature e Adjust the temperature dial to about 75 F 24 C for normal operation The temperature of the passenger compart ment will be maintained automatically Air flow distribution fan speed and A C on off are also controlled automatically A visible mist may be seen coming from the vents in hot humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly This does not indicate a ma
488. urfaces The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre vent each wheel from locking and sliding By preventing each wheel from locking the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip pery surfaces Using the system Depress the brake pedal and hold it down De press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure but do not pump the brakes The ABS will oper ate to prevent the wheels from locking up Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles AWARNING Do not pump the brake pedal Doing so may result in increased stopping distances Self test feature The ABS includes electronic sensors electric pumps hydraulic solenoids and a computer The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse When the self test occurs you may hear a clunk noise and or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction If the computer senses a malfunc tion it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the instrument panel The brake system then operates normally but without anti lock assistance If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self test or while driving have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer Starting and driving 5 25 Normal operation The ABS operates a
489. usly injured Be especially careful with children who should always be properly restrained Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks They may interfere with side air bag inflation SSS0159 SSS0162 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 47 1 2 3 GIN os 12 11 109 8 LRS2025 Co 1 48 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system Roof mounted curtain side impact supplemental air bag inflators Roof mounted curtain side impact supplemental air bags Front seat mounted side impact supplemental air bag modules Air bag Control Unit ACU Side impact air bag pressure sensor driver s side shown passenger s side similar Supplemental front impact air bag modules Crash zone sensor Seat belt buckle switches on driver s and passenger s side Occupant classification sensor pattern sensor Occupant classification system control unit Seat belt with pretensioner Side satellite sensor Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 49 NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System front seats This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front passenger seats This system is designed to meet certification requirements under U S regu lations It is also permitted in Canada However
490. ust gases to escape Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack If it is neces sary to work under the vehicle support it with safety stands Keep smoking materials flame and sparks away from the fuel tank and battery On gasoline engine models the fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced by a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off ACAUTION Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down Avoid contact with used engine oil and coolant Improperly disposed engine oil engine coolant and or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment Al ways conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid e Never leave the engine or the CVT re lated component harness connector disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in the ON position e Your vehicle is equipped with an auto matic engine cooling fan It may come on at any time without warning even if the ignition key is in the OFF position and the engine is not running To avoid injury always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan This Maintenance and do it yourself section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform A
491. usting brakes The front and rear disc type brakes self adjust every time the brake pedal is applied AWARNING See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system check if the brake pedal height does not return to normal BRAKE PAD WEAR INDICATORS The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators When a brake pad requires re placement a high pitched scraping or screech ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in motion The noise will be heard whether or not the brake pedal is depressed Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard Under some driving or climate conditions occa sional brake squeak squeal or other noise may be heard Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed For more information regarding brake inspections see the appropriate mainte nance schedule information in the NISSAN Ser vice and Maintenance Guide FUSES Z i E LDI0455 LDI0457 Two types of fuses are used Type is used in the fuse boxes in the engine compartment Type is used in the passenger compartment fuse box Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses They are stored in the passenger compartment fuse box Type A fuses can b
492. ustments 3 9 WPD0433 Coupe shown Sedan similar Locking doors 1 Move the shift selector to the P Park posi tion place the ignition switch in the LOCK position and make sure you carry the Intelli gent Key with you 2 Close all doors 3 Push any door handle request switch while carrying the Intelligent Key with you 4 All doors and the trunk will lock 5 The hazard warning lights flash twice and the outside buzzer sounds twice 3 10 Pre driving checks and adjustments WPD0369 NOTE Doors lock with the door handle request switch while the ignition switch is not in the LOCK position Doors do not lock by pushing the door handle request switch while any door is open However doors lock with the me chanical key even if any door is open Doors do not lock with the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you However when an Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle doors can be locked with an other Intelligent Key ACAUTION e After locking the doors using the re quest switch make sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handle or the trunk opener switch When locking the doors using the re quest switch make sure to have the Intelligent Key in your possession be fore operating the request switch to prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle e The request
493. vailable when the XM button is pressed to ac cess satellite radio stations unless op tional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an XM satellite radio ser vice subscription is active Satellite ra dio is not available in Alaska Hawaii and Guam FM AM SAT RADIO WITH CD DVD PLAYER if so equipped For all operation precautions see Audio opera tion precautions in this section Audio main operation VOL ON OFF control Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and push the VOL ON OFF control knob while the system is off to call up the mode that was playing immediately before the system was turned off To turn the system off press the VOL ON OFF control knob Turn the VOL ON OFF control knob to adjust the volume This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume SSV for audio The audio volume changes as the driv ing speed changes AUDIO control knob Bass Treble Bal ance and Fade Press the AUDIO control knob to change the mode as follows Bass Treble Balance Fade To adjust Bass Treble Balance and Fade press the AUDIO control knob until the desired mode appears in the display Turn the tuning knob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level You can also use the tuning knob to adjust Fade and Balance modes Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers Once you have adjusted the soun
494. vehicle e If you need to dispose of a supplemen tal air bag or pretensioners or scrap the vehicle contact a NISSAN dealer Incor rect disposal procedures could cause personal injury 1 58 Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system MEMO Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 59 2 Instruments and controls Instrument panel lt ceis0ce crewetecsee ce reeeeeee ces 2 2 Meters and gauges orige cirrosi timi nein tenies 2 3 Speedometer and odometer 00e0ee ee 2 4 TaChOMCtehst cis cases ones EE EE 2 5 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2 5 Fuel gauge id de bos Rete scrastnaniien E Ea ane ee 2 6 Compass display if so equipped 08 2 6 Compass displays ciccscaeeceters ones ween ced 2 7 Warning indicator lights and audible reminders 2 10 Checking bulbs sss rcccsoendegeveeeeanesaecne 2 10 Warning lights s lt ccteieudexe rierien vances bate 2 11 IncicatoriliGghtS s ssschasesuitae selenite nieces able 2 14 Audible reminders 00 000 cece ence eee 2 16 Vehicle information display 0cc cece eee 2 17 How to use the Vehicle Information Display 2 17 Security SYSIEMSi 2 0 rasgan sae eri AAE EEE Mae 2 26 Vehicle security system 000 000 c eee ee 2 26 NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system 2 27 Windshield wiper and washer switch 2 28 Switch operation 0 00 e eee eee ee 2 28 R
495. vehicle audio controls To disconnect the iPod from the vehicle remove the USB end of the cable from the USB jack on the vehicle then remove the cable from the iPod iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries Compatibility The following models are compatible iPod 5th Generation version 1 2 3 iPod Classic version 1 1 1 iPod Touch version 2 0 0 iPod Nano 1st generation version 1 3 1 iPod Nano 2nd generation version 1 1 3 iPod Nano 3rd generation version 1 1 3 iPod Nano 4th generation version 1 0 4 iPod Nano 5th generation version 1 0 1 Some features of this iPod may not be fully functional 4 74 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Make sure that your iPod firmware is updated to the version indicated above 8 00 Artist XXXXXX Album XXXXXX Track XXXXXX Q Shuffle Songs Repeat All 2 10 LHA1397 Now Playing Playlists Artists Albums Songs Podcasts LHA1398 Audio main operation Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position Press the DISC AUX button repeatedly to switch to the iPod mode If the system has been turned off while the iPod was playing pressing the VOL ON OFF control knob will start the iPod DISC AUX button When the DISC AUX button is pressed with the system off and
496. vehicle recovery Rocking a stuck vehicle AWARNING Stand clear of a stuck vehicle e Do not spin your tires at high speed This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged If your vehicle is stuck in sand snow mud etc use the following procedure 1 Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control Sys tem 2 Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions 3 Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires 4 Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back ward Shift back and forth between R Reverse and D Drive CVT models or 1st Low and R Reverse M T models Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R Reverse and D Drive CVT models or 1st Low and R Reverse M T models e Do not spin the tires above 35 mph 55 km h 5 If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few tries contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle 7 Appearance and care Cleaning exterior i visciaeccreeseiwa ean ewbeapeanes 7 2 Air fresheners 0c0sneccvewess ern cenan tere aed 7 5 Washing 1 24222 si6tecrandn ete nor eyra taiim 7 2 FIOOriMats waives iuran manei wna aah and RA 7 5 WAKING seins aka denen see tunnak dei dank es 7 2 Seat Helis vi2s2ccvnueensneneed noy ieia 7 6 Removing Spots
497. w any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback Such objects may interfere with the proper Operation of the occupant classifica tion sensor No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the seat belt system This may affect the front air bag system Tampering with the seat belt system may result in seri ous personal injury Work on and around the front air bag system should be done by a NISSAN dealer Installation of electrical equip ment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer The Supplemental Restraint System SRS wiring should not be modified or disconnected Unauthor ized electrical test equipment and prob ing devices should not be used on the air bag system e A cracked windshield should be re placed immediately by a qualified re pair facility A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification When selling your vehicle we request that you inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner s Manual Safety Seats seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 53 WRS0816 Front seat mounted side impact supplemental air bag and roof mounted curtain side impact supplemental air bag systems The side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front seats
498. while the headlight switch is in the Dd position the headlights will turn off after 5 minutes or 2 ACAUTION Even though the battery saver feature au tomatically turns off the headlights after a period of time you should turn the head light switch to the OFF position when the engine is not running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM Canada only The headlights automatically illuminate at a re duced intensity when the engine is started with the parking brake released The daytime running lights operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position or in the 2 gt 4 position Turn the headlight switch to the 2 position for full illumination when driving at night If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started the daytime running lights do not illumi nate The daytime running lights illuminate when the parking brake is released The daytime run ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position AWARNING When the daytime running light system is active tail lights on your vehicle are not on It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others LIC1066 LIC1088 INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL The instrument cluster illuminates when the igni tion switch is placed in the ON position The instrument brightness control operates when the headl
499. witch P 2 34 Front passenger air bag status light P 1 51 Front passenger supplemental air bag P 1 41 Glove box P 2 41 Navigation system if so equipped P 4 2 Covered storage box P 2 42 Heater and air conditioner automatic P 4 26 Heater and air conditioner manual P 4 19 Shift selector P 5 11 Audio system controls if so equipped Storage if so equipped P 4 29 P 2 42 Tilt telescopic steering wheel controls P 3 28 20 Vehicle information display controls P 2 17 21 Hood release P 3 23 22 Trunk opener P 3 23 Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC OFF switch P 2 36 NISSAN Intelligent Key port P 5 7 Refer to the separate Navigation System Own er s Manual if so equipped See the page number indicated in paren theses for operating details Illustrated table of contents 0 9 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS 1 7 iY H ii ni are as aI KOZ eu F ai a 12 11 10 9 8 0 10 Illustrated table of contents QR25DE engine 1 Power steering fluid reservoir P 8 14 2 Engine oil filler cap P 8 10 3 Brake fluid reservoir Clutch fluid reservoir M T model P 8 15 8 15 4 Air cleaner P 8 20 5 Fuse block P 8 23 6 Battery P 8 16 7 Fuse fusible link box P 8 23 8 Engine oil dipstick P 8 10 9 Radiator cap P 8 8 10 Drive belt location P 8 18
500. with used engine oil may cause skin cancer Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil If skin contact is made wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible Keep used engine oil out of reach of children A CAUTION The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time Use these specifications for reference only Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine Start the engine Check for leakage around the drain plug and oil filter Correct as re quired Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes Check the oil level with the dipstick Add engine oil if necessary Be careful not to burn yourself The engine oil may be hot WDI10494 QR25DE CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER 6 Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new washer Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench Do not use excessive force 1 Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake Drain plug tightening torque 22 29 ft lb 29 39 N m 2 Turn the engine off 7 Refill engine with recommended oil through 3 Place a large drain pan under the oil filter the oil filler opening then install the oil filler cap securely 4 Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench by turning it counterclockwise Then See Capacities and recommended remove the oil filter by turning it by hand fuel lubricants in the Tech
501. ws from center and side vents Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 19 y Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets Air flows mainly from foot outlets 3 Air flows from defroster outlets and foot outlets y Air flows mainly from defroster outlets Temperature control dial The temperature control dial allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air To lower the temperature turn the dial to the left To increase the temperature turn the dial to the right cD Air recirculation button On position Indicator light on Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle Press the gt button to the on position when driving on a dusty road to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas senger compartment for maximum cooling when using the air con ditioner Off position Indicator light off Outside air is drawn into the passenger compart ment and distributed through the selected outlet Use the off position for normal heater or air con ditioner operation Air conditioner button The button is provided only on vehicles equipped with an air conditioner Start the engine turn the fan control dial to the desired position and push the button to turn on the air conditioner The indicator light comes on when the air conditioner is operating To turn off the air conditioner push the A C button again The air conditioner cooling functio
502. x 2 300 Ib Trailer Tongue Weight tl 300 Ib 27 kg 135 kg Luggage oo 30 Ib x 2 60 Ib Remaining available cargo and luggage load capacity 740 Ib 336 kg Remaining available cargo and luggage load capacity 1 040 Ib 70 kg 135 kg 14 kg 27 kg 472 kg Occupants Luggage Load limit Remaining available 640 kg load capacity 150 Ib x 5 750 Ib 30 Ib x 5 150 Ib 500 Ib 70 kg 340 kg 14kg 70 kg 227 kg LT10152 Example 9 14 Technical and consumer information Steps for determining correct load limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on your vehicle s placard Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs The resulting figure equals the avail able amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of avail able cargo and luggage load capac ity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 X 150 650 Ibs or 640 340 5 X 70 300 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a traile
503. xtended pe riod This can discharge the battery EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving perform the following procedure Rapidly push the push button ignition switch 3 consecutive times or Push and hold the push button ignition switch for more than 2 seconds WSD0232 WSD0233 NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DISCHARGE If the battery of the Intelligent Key is almost dis charged the guide light A of the Intelligent Key port blinks and the indicator appears on the ve hicle information display See Vehicle informa tion display in the Instruments and controls section In this case inserting the Intelligent Key into the port 8 allows you to start the engine Make sure the Intelligent Key is placed in the correct direc tion The front side faces upward and the key ring side faces downward as illustrated To remove the Intelligent Key from the port push the ignition switch to the LOCK position and pul the Intelligent Key out of the port NOTE The Intelligent Key port does not charge the Intelligent Key battery If you see the low battery indicator replace the battery as soon as possible See Battery replace ment in the Maintenance and do it yourself section ACAUTION e Never place anything except the Intelli gent Key in the Intelligent Key port Do ing so may cause da
504. y six two zero zero Using this method of phone digit entry can improve recognition performance NOTE When speaking a house number speak the number 0 as zero or oh If the letter O is included in the house number it will not be recognized as 0 even if you speak oh instead of zero Standard Mode command list Category Command COMMAND ACTION Displays Phone function commands Displays Navigation function commands Displays Vehicle Information Displays Audio commands Displays User Guide Phone Command Navigation Command COMMAND ACTION Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book Searches for a location by the street address specified and sets a route for continental US and Canada only Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location Address Book Searches for a location stored in the Address Book Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 123 Information Command COMMAND ACTION Where am Displays current vehicle location Audio Command COMMAND ACTION Changes the audio system mode to AM radio Changes the audio system mode to FM radio Traffic Info Turns the traffic information system on and off Changes the audio system mode to satellite radio Changes the audio system mode to Music Box Changes the audio system mode to CD
505. y Phone 4 128 Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems Voice Recognition gt Internatio Yul 8 00 4 International Call Manual Controls Say the entire number or groups of numbers Say 0 9 pound star or plus To exit hold the TALK switch LHA1339 Voice Recognition gt Internatio Yul 8 00 4 Dial 47 Change Number 011811112223333 Manual Controls Please continue or say Dial To exit hold the TALK switch LHA1340 5 Say 011811112223333 6 Say Dial 7 The system makes a call to 011 81 111 222 3333 NOTE Any digit input format is available in the International Number input process as well as the special characters such as star pound and plus NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION ALTERNATE COMMAND MODE The Alternate Command Mode enables control of the Audio Climate Control and Display sys tems as well as additional commands for the Vehicle Information Phone and Navigation sys tems With this setting active the system does not announce or display the available commands at each step When Alternate Command Mode is activated an expanded list of commands can be used after pushing the TALK amp switch Under this mode the screen for Standard Mode commands is not available on the display Please review the expanded command list availab
506. y form on the floor pan frame fuel lines and exhaust system At the end of winter the underbody should be thor oughly flushed with plain water in those areas where mud and dirt may have accumulated See the Appearance and care section of this manual Windshield washer fluid Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle The following are general precau tions which should be closely observed AWARNING Park the vehicle on a level surface ap ply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving For manual transmission models move the shift selector to N Neutral For CVT models move the shift selector to P Park e Besure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs If you must work with the engine run ning keep your hands clothing hair and tools away from moving fans belts and any other moving parts It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jewelry such as rings watches etc before working on your vehicle Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle If you must run the engine in an en closed space such as a garage be sure there is proper ventilation for exha
507. y speed lt lt Press the M4 side of the seeking button while an audio file on the USB device is playing to return to the beginning of the current track Press the M4 side of the seeking button several times to skip backward several tracks Press the PI side of the seeking button while an audio file on the USB device is playing to advance one track Press the PP side of the seeking button several times to skip forward sev eral tracks If the last track in a folder on the USB device is skipped the first track of the next folder is played gt Seeking button Folder selection To change to another folder in the USB memory turn the TUNE FOLDER knob or choose a folder displayed on the screen using the touchscreen Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 69 8 00 USB gt Menu Folder List Track List Play Mode LHA1294 Menu There are some options available during play back Select one of the following that are dis played on the screen if necessary Refer to the following information for each item Movie Playback Switch to the movie playback mode This item is displayed only when the USB memory contains movie files The shift selector must be in Park P with the parking brake engaged to watch movies from a USB device Folder List Track List Displays the folder or track list The Movie Playback key is
508. y to return to the previous menu screen Select the Hide key to hide the opera tion keys e Title Menu DVD VIDEO Some menus specific to each disc will be shown For details see the instructions at tached to the disc Title Search DVD VIDEO DVD VR The scene with the specified title will be displayed the number of times the or side is selected Group Search DVD AUDIO VIDEO CD The scene with the specified group will be displayed the number of times the or side is selected 10 Key Search DVD VIDEO VIDEO CD CD DA DVD VR Select the 10 Key Search key to open the number entry screen Input the number you want to search for and select the OK key The specified Title Chapter or Group Track will be played Select No VIDEO CD Select the Select No key to open the number entry screen Input the number you want to search for and select the OK key The specified scene will be played Angle DVD VIDEO If the DVD contains different angles such as moving images the current image angle can be switched to another one Select the Angle key and use the or key to change the angle Monitor climate audio phone and voice recognition systems 4 65 e Angle Mark DVD VIDEO When this item is turned on an angle mark will be shown on the bottom of the screen if the scene can be seen from a different angle e Menu Skip DVD VIDEO

2011 Nissan Altima Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents